ASCE PM All in One PDF

Basic Information
P.E. Structural Exam Review:

Bridge Loads • AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
– 4th Edition, 2007 with 2008 Interim Revisions
– Current version 4th Edition with 2010 interims
Mike Wenning ,PE, F.ASCE
Phone # : 317-547-5580 – Beware of other versions
E-mail: [email protected]
• Strengths always in ksi
Topics Basic Information

• Introduction • Primary AASHTO Code Information
• Combinations – Chapter 2 - General Design
• L d
Loads – Chapter 3 - Loads
– Chapter 9 – Decks
• Factors
• Influence Lines
• Deck Design
2 4
Load Factors and Combinations Load Factors and Combinations
• STRENGTH I
– Load combination relating to the normal vehicular use without • EXTREME EVENT I
wind.
– Load combination including earthquake.
• STRENGTH II
– Combination relating to the use of the bridge by special design • EXTREME EVENT II
vehicles and permit vehicles
• STRENGTH III – Load combination relating to ice load, collision by
– Combination relating to the bridge exposed to wind velocity vessels and vehicles, and certain hydraulic events
exceeding 55 mph. with
ith a reduced
d d lilive lload.
d
• STRENGTH IV
– Combination relating to very high dead to live load force effect
• FATIGUE
ratios –F
Fatigue
ti and
d ffracture
t load
l d combination
bi ti relating
l ti to
t
• STRENGTH V repetitive gravitational vehicular live load and dynamic
– Combination relating to normal vehicular use of the bridge with responses under a single design truck
wind of 55 mph velocity
velocity.
5 7
Load Factors and Combinations Factored Force Effect

• SERVICE I General Equation (3.4.1):
– Combination relating to the normal operational use of the bridge
with a 55 mph wind and all loads taken at their nominal values.
• SERVICE II Q= i iQi øR
– Load combination intended to control yielding of steel structures
• SERVICE III
– Load combination for longitudinal analysis relating to tension in i = Load Modifier pper Article 1.3.2
prestressed concrete superstructures with the objective of Qi = Force Effects
crack control
• SERVICE IV i = Load
oad Factors
acto s ((Table
ab e 1 aandd 2))
– Load combination relating only to tension in prestressed ø = Resistance Factor
concrete columns with the objective of crack control.
R = Nominal Resistance
6 8
Factored Force Effect Live Load
• 0.95
0 95 ≤ ≤ 1.05
1 05 Live Load moment (shear) to a beam
– D relates to ductility consists of the moment (shear), impact
• 1.05
1 05 = non,
non 11.00
00 normal
normal, 0.95
0 95 exceptional factor and distribution.
distribution
– R relates to redundancy Mtot = MLL * (1 + IM) * Distr.
• 1.05
1 05 = non,
non 11.00
00 normal
normal, 0
0.95
95 exceptional
IM = DDynamic i L
Loadd Allowance
All
– I relates to importance
• 1.05 = important, 1.00 normal, 0.95 less imp.
– All factors multiplied to get i
9 11
AASHTO Loads Live Loads

• Covered in Section 3 • One lane per 12’ width, no rounding.
– Widths between 20’ and 24’ = 2 lanes.
• Unit Weights (3.5.1-1)
• Apply Lane Load to contributory length
– Steel
St l 0.490
0 490 kkcff only.
– Concrete 0.145 kcf • Apply 90% of 2 Design Trucks at 50’ min.
• Live Load (3.6.1) spacing and Lane Load for continuous
– Truck + Lane spans for maximum moments.
– Tandem + Lane
0.64 klf
– Combined loading is called HL93
10 12
Live Loads Live Loads
25 25
kip kip
4’
14’ 14’ to 30’
Influence Line for Moment at 0.4 Span A
• Design Tandem is 2 axles at 25k.

25k
• Design Truck similar to old HS-20.
– Rear axle can be increased to 30’
30 to obtain
max. load.
Lane Loading for Max. Moment at 0.4 Span A
• These used in conjunction
j with Lane
Load unless otherwise specified.
13 15
Live Loads Problem No 1
Which case gives the correct loading for maximum moment at support C
assuming 150’ spans?
A.
Influence Line for Reaction at Support A

B.
C.
Lane Loading for Max. Reaction at Support A

D.
14 16
Dynamic Load Allowance
Solution
(I
(Impact Load)
L d)
Problem No 1
(C) To get the maximum negative moment
you would load the adjacent spans and
alternate spans further away which all
have contributing areas on an influence
diagram. AASHTO 3.6.1.3 says to add an
additional truck at 50’
50 min.
min spacing for
continuous spans.
17 19
Dynamic Load Allowance

Live Load Distribution
(I
(Impact Load)
L d)
Clear Roadway Width =33’
• Section 3
3.6.2
62 1’-6” 1’-6”
1 -6 3 spaces @ 10
10’ 1’-6”
1 -6 1’-6”
• Does not apply to:

– Walls
W ll w/o/ vertical
ti l reactions
ti from
f
8”
superstructure.
– Foundation components entirely below
ground.
Problem No 2: What is the maximum
– Lane Load portion of HL
HL-93
93
number of design lanes on this bridge?
((A)) 0 ((B)) 1 ((C)) 2 ((D)) 3
18 20
Solution Live Load Distribution
Problem No 2
(C) 33’ clear roadway / 12’ lane = 2.75.
Therefore the bridge has two full lanes.
21 23
Live Load Distribution Live Load Distribution

• Used to compute
p how much of the LL g
goes to a
beam.
• 4.6.2.2 Beam-Slab Bridges
– Dependant on type of beam
– Different factor for interior and exterior beams
– Different factor for moment or shear
– Different factor for each region of bridge
– Modifier for skewed structures
• Distribution is the percentage of lane load of live
load + impact that is applied to one beam.
22 24
25 27

Compute the Live Load Distribution factor for an interior
girder.
id
First, compute the longitudinal stiffness, Kg
Kgg = n(I
( + A eg2)
n= EB / ED
where:
EB = modulus of elasticity of beam mat’l
mat l (ksi)
ED = modulus of elasticity of deck mat’l (ksi)
I = moment of inertia of beam (in.4)
eg = distance
di t b
between
t th
the centers
t off gravity
it off th
the b
beam
and deck (in.)
A = area of the beam (in.2)
26 28
Compute One Lane Distribution Factor

8”
29 31

Check the range of applicability
3 5 ≤ S ≤ 16.0
3.5 16 0
S = 9.75 ft OK
4.5 ≤ ts ≤ 12.0
ts = 8.0 in OK
=0.06 + (9.75/14)0.4(9.75/120)0.3[818,611/(12(120)(8)3)]0.1
20 ≤ L ≤ 240
L = 120 ft OK = 0.06
0 06 + (0
(0.87)(0.47)(1.01)
87)(0 47)(1 01) = 0.47
0 47
Nb 4 Therefore 1 beam carries 0.47 lanes of LL
Nb = 5 OK
10,000 ≤ Kg ≤ 7,000,000
Do not convert units, already included in equations.
Kg = 818,611 in4 OK (based on section properties)
Would then compute for 2 lanes and exterior girders…
30 32
Multiple Presence Factor Multiple Presence Factor
• Distribution was for
applying live load to a 6’
girder.
girder lane
• MPF is for calculating the

live load’s
load s effect on
substructure loadings.
m = 1.2
33 35
Multiple Presence Factor Multiple Presence Factor

• Probability based factor used to adjust LL for
substructure design
design.
• Section 3.6.1.1.2 6’ 6’
• Not used in conjunction
j with distribution factors. (Already
( y lane lane
in factor)
• Not applied to Fatigue Truck (always 1 truck)
m = 1.0
34 36
Multiple Presence Factor Centrifugal Force (CE)
• AASHTO 3 3.6.3
63
6’ 6’ 6’ • C=f * v2 / g * R
lane lane lane
– f = 1.0
1 0 for
f fatigue,
f ti 4/3 for
f allll other
th
combinations
– v = highway design speed (ft/sec)
– g = 32.2 ft/sec
m = 0.85 – R = Radius
R di off curvature
t off hi
highway
h (ft)
– Applied design truck weight 6’ above roadway
37 39
Pedestrian Loads Centrifugal Force (CE)

• AASHTO 3.6.1.6
3616 Assume 50 mphmph, R=1000’
R=1000
• For highway bridges, Load = 0.075 ksf Assume truck/tandem reaction = 50k
– Sidewalks
Sid lk > 2’ wide
id 1 0 ft/
1.0 ft/sec = 0
0.682
682 mphh
– This load treated as 1 lane when using multi- C=4/3 * (50/0.682)2 / (32.2 * 1000’)
presence factor per 3.6.1.1.2
36112
= 0.223
• For pedestrian bridges, Load = 0.085 ksf
– Add H5 truck if 7’ < width < 10’
CE = 0.223 * 50k = 11.2k per lane
– Add H10 truck if width > 10’
– Only if bridge can be used for maint. vehicles.
38 40
Braking Force (BR) Vehicular Collision Force (CT)
• AASHTO 3 3.6.4
64 • AASHTO 3 3.6.5
65
• Greater of: • 400k load applied 4’ above ground.
– 25% off truck/tandem
t k/t d axle
l loads
l d – Applied
A li d if:
if
– 5% of (truck/tandem + lane load) • < 30’ to edge of roadway or
– Apply 6’ above roadway • < 50’
50 to centerline of railway
– All lanes simultaneously loaded if likely to – Not needed if:

b
become one-directional
di ti l iin ffuture.
t • Protected by embankment
• Protected by 54” barrier within 10’ of structure
• Protected byy 42” barrier more than 10’ from struct.
41 43
Braking Force (BR) Water Loads (WA)

Given: truck/tandem reaction = 50k • AASHTO 3
3.7
7
lane load reaction = 80k – Static Pressure applied similar to earth load
but with 0
0.0624
0624 kcf load
G t of:
Greater f
– Buoyancy of 0.0624 kcf on submerged
25% * 50k = 12.5k
portions
5% * (50k + 80k) = 6.5k • This is an uplift force and reduces reactions
BR = 12.5k
42 44
Water Loads (WA) Water Loads (WA)
– Stream Pressure Given: 3’
3 wide stem w/ semi-circular
semi circular face
• Applied parallel to flow of stream. 20’ high exposed surface
• p = CD * V2 / 1000 V=6 6.00 ft/sec
– p = stream pressure (ksf)
– CD = drag coefficient θ = 0°
– V = design velocity of water (ft/sec) p = CD * V2 / 1000 = 0 0.7
7 * 6.0
6 02 / 1000 = 0.025
0 025 ksf
• Longitudinal and Lateral equation the same but
drag coefficients are different.
WA = 0
0.025
025 * 3’
3 * 20’
20 = 1
1.5k
5k
45 47
Water Loads (WA) Wind Load (WL and WS)

• AASHTO 3 3.8 8
• Pressure based on 100 mph wind.
• Apply
A l tto allll exposed
d areas
46 48
Wind Load (WL and WS) Wind Load (WL and WS)
• If structure above 30
30’ above ground/water: • Wind on vehicles
– 0.100 klf force applied normal to and 6’ above
deck.
deck
– For girder bridges with individual spans < 125’
with a max. height of 30’
30 apply 0.100 ksf
transverse and 0.040 ksf longitudinal
simultaneously.
49 51
Wind Load (WL and WS) Wind Load (WL and WS)
• Vertical Wind Pressure (AASHTO 3
3.8.2)
8 2)
– Upward force of 0.020 ksf times deck width
applied at windward deck quarter point
point.
– Creates both upward force and overturning
moment.
50 52
Superimposed Deformations
Earth Pressure (EH
(EH,ES
ES & LS)
(TU, TG, SH, CR, SE & PS)
• AASHTO 3 3.11
11 • AASHTO 33.12
12
• Walls with little to no movement designed • Temperature movement, TU
for at
at-rest
rest earth pressure
pressure. • Method
M th d A uses ttemp range from
f ttable
bl
• Must be “flexible” to use active pressures.
• If temp below 32° for 14 or more days then

cold climate
climate.
53 55
Earth Pressure (EH
(EH,ES
ES & LS)
Use standard g
geotechnical equations
q to calculate loads. • Method B uses temp p range
g from contour maps
p Fig.
g
3.12.2.2-1 to 3.12.2.2-4.
54 56
Superimposed Deformations Superimposed Deformations
(TU, TG, SH, CR, SE & PS) (TU & SH)
• Δ = αL Given: Cold climate
climate, method A
– α = coefficient of thermal expansion Concrete pour temp = 60°
• Concrete is 66.0
0 x 10-6 (5.4.2.2)
(5 4 2 2) E
Exp. L
Length
th = 120’
• Steel is 6.5 x 10-6
– L = expansion length (in)
ΔSH = 0.0005 * 120’ * 12”/’ = 0.72 inch
ΔTU = 6.0
6 0*10
10-6 * 60
60° * 120
120’ * 12
12”/’
/ = 0.52
0 52 inch
57 59
Load Combinations
• Shrinkage & Creep (3 (3.12.4
12 4 refers to
5.4.2.3)
• Coefficient of shrinkage
– 0.0002 after 28 days
– 0.0005
0 0005 after
ft 1 year
• Creep covered in prestressed concrete

session.
58 Table 3.4.1-1 60
Load Combinations Solution
Problem No 3
IM = 33%
LL+IM = 11.2[400
2[400 + (350 * 1.33)]
1 33)] = 1038
1038.6
6 ‘k
p = 1.25 max, 0.90 min
M max
Mu = 1.25(1000
1 25(1000 ‘k) + 1
1.75(1038.6
75(1038 6 ‘k)
= 3068 ‘k
Mumin = 0.90(1000 ‘k) + 1.75(1038.6 ‘k)
= 2718 ‘k
61 63
Table 3.4.1-2
Problem 3 Are we there yet?

Assuming:
g
Service Dead Load Moment = 1,000 ft-kip
Service Live Load Moment = 750 ft-kip (400 ft-kip due
to lane loading)
Live Load due to 1 lane loaded condition.
Water, Friction,Temp, Shrink. And Settlement all = 0
Compute the ultimate moments using the Strength

I combination.
62 64
Deck Design Deck Design
• Strip Method (4.6.2)
– Structural simplification where deck is
replaced by a set of continuous beams.
– Beams assumed as unyielding supports.
– A single line of wheels acts on this beam.
• S = spacing of supporting components (ft

(ft.))
• X = distance from load to point of support (ft.)
• Maximum width of strip is 144”
144
65 67
Deck Design Problem 4

• Calculate the strip widths for the bridge
section shown below.
1’ 6’
Cl. lane 8”
66 68
• X = 47.25” – 17.25” – 12” = 18” = 1.5’ • The live load portion of the factored design
moments will be computed using Table
• Overhang
g strip
p = 45 + 10(1.5)
( ) = 60” A4 1-1
A4.1 1. These moments per unit width
include dynamic load allowance and
• Positive Moment = 26.0 + 6.6(9.75) = 90.3” multiple presence factors
factors.
• Negative Moment = 48.0 + 3.0(9.75) = 77.2”
• The values are tabulated using the
equivalent strip method
method.
• All < 144” therefore OK
69 71

Deck Load = 0.150 kcf * 8” / 12 = 0.100 klf / ft
MDC = w(l)2 / 10 = 0.100 (9.75)2 / 10 = 0.95 K-ft / ft
Future Wearing Surface = 30 psf

MDW = 0
0.030
030 (9
(9.75)
75)2 / 10 = 0
0.29
29 K
K-ft
ft / ft
Parapet = 0.53 K / ft (Composite loads may be spread

evenly across the deck, therefore 0.53/46.88’=0.011)
MDC = 0.011
0 011 (9
(9.75)
75)2 / 10 = 0
0.11
11 K-ft
K ft / ft
70 72
For a girder spacing of 9'-9"
9 9 , the maximum Mu = 11.80
11 80 + 1
1.76
76 = 13
13.56
56 K ft / ft
unfactored positive live load moment is
6 74 K-ft/ft
6.74 K ft/ft. Remember
R b our generall equation:
ti
MuLLpos = LL(6.74) = 1.75 * 6.74 Q = i iQ i øR
= 11.80
11 80 K
K-ft/ft
ft/ft
For this case = 1.0
10
Ø = 0.90 for Strength Limit State (5.5.4.2)
73 75

2½” Cl.
Muposdead = pDCmax (
(0.95 K ft / ft)) •Assume
Assume bar size
+ pDCmax (0.11 K ft / ft) •Calculate As
1” Cl.
+ pDWmax (0.29 K ft / ft) Required Pos. Mom.

Reinf
Reinf.
•Determine bar
9’-9”
spacing
pDCmax = 1.25 pDWmax = 1.50
pDCmin = 0
0.90
90 pDWmin = 0
0.65
65 •Use
Use ff’c
c = 4 ksi
Assume #5 bars
•Use fy = 60 ksi
diam = 0.625”
Mu
uposdead = 1.25(0.95)
5(0 95) + 1.25(0.11)
5(0 ) + 1.50(0.29)
50(0 9)
Area = 0.31 in2
de = ts –Coverb – diam/2 – 0.5” wearing surface
= 1.76 K ft / ft
de = 8” – 1” – (.625”/2)
( 625”/2) – 0.5”
0 5” = 6
6.19”
19”
74 76
Deck Design Foundation
• Øf = 0.90
0 90 • Service Limit State :
• b = 12” – Overall Stability and Movement
• Rn
R =M MuTOT(12”/’)/[Øf(b)(de)2] – Pile Layout
= 13.56 ft-K (12”/’)/[0.90(12”)(6.19”)2] • Strength Limit State:
= 0.39
0 39 K/in
K/i 2 – Footing Shear
S
– Footing Moment
• p = 0.00698
0 00698
77 79
Deck Design Foundation

• As = p (b)(de) = 0.00698(12)(6.19)
0 00698(12)(6 19) • Sum and factor loads
= 0.52 in2 / ft • Calculate critical pile reaction
• Required spacing = (12”/’)0
(12 / )0.31
31 / 0
0.52
52 – Or
O check
h k critical
iti l soilil pressure ffor spread
d
= 7.2 in footing
• Use
U #5 bars
b @ 7.07 0 iin • C
Compute t shear
h and
d check
h k thi
thickness
k off
footing.
• Compute moment and design footing
reinforcement.
78 80
Foundation Load Combinations
Group P(kip) Mx(ft-kip)
Strength Imax 3,624 1,050
3’-0” 3’-0”
21’-0” 4’-6” 3’-0” 4’-6” Strength Imin 2,749 1,050
Strength IIImax 2,957 2,548
Strength IIImin 2,082 2,548
Strength Vmax 3,462 1,738
1’-0
1 0” pile embedment
Strength
g Vmin 2,587
, 1,738
,
f’c = 3000 psi Service Imax 2,749 1,346
8 @ 3’ = 24’-0”
fy = 60,000
, p
psi Service Imin
i 2,749 1,346
1’-6” 1’-6” 81 83
Foundation Pile Group Properties

• Service Loads at top of Piles
• N = 4 * 9 = 36
Type P(kip) Mx(ft-kip)
LL 285 0
• Ix = 2 * 9 [(1
[(1.5
5’))2 + (4
(4.5
5’))2]
DC 2,500 0 = 405.0
WS -120
120 1,820
WL 0 200 • Iy = 2 * 4 [(3’)2 + (6’)2 + (9’)2 + (12’)2]
BR 0 600 = 2160.0
60 0
• Compute Strength
g I Moments per Table • Pile Reaction = Pu/N ± MX(c)/IX ± MY(c)/IY
3.4.1-1 and 3.4.1-2
82 84
Factored Pile Reactions
Group Reactionmax(kip) Reactionmin(kip)
Questions???
Strength Imax 112 89
Michael Wenning, PE, F.ASCE
Strength Imin 88 65
[email protected]
i @ t t i t
Strength IIImax 110 54
Strength
g IIImin 86 30
Strength Vmax 115 77
Strength Vmini 91 53
Service Imax 91 61
Service Imax 91 61
85 87
Summary Biography
g p y
• LRFD provisions similar to AISC and ACI • Attended U.S. Coast Guard Academyy
• BSCE from Purdue University
• Beware of other AASHTO versions. • 31 years of bridge design
– Over 500 bridges
• Statics
St ti are statics.
t ti Basic
B i equations
ti still
till – Reinforced Concrete, Prestressed Concrete, Steel Beam and
work. Girder, Timber
– Highway,
Highway Railroad,
Railroad Pedestrian
• Loads and Factors are specific to • Co-wrote INDOT’s LRFD Bridge Manual
AASHTO. • PE in Indiana, Ohio, Kentucky and Michigan
• Project Manager for American Structurepoint, Inc.
• Examples available on FHWA website.
86 88
Further Information Lever Rule
2’
16k
• http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/bridge/lrfd/examples.htm
p g g p
– Prestressed Concrete Girder Superstructure Example
– Steel Girder Superstructure Example
– Based on 2nd Edition and Interims through 2002
• A number of sections have changed in the Code between 2002 and
2006 so be careful using this.
Find reaction on exterior girder about

• http://www.aisc.org/contentNSBA.aspx?id=20244 first interior girder.
– National Steel Bridge Alliance Steel Beam and Girder Examples
Assumes pinned connection at first
– Based on 3rd Edition and Interims through 2005 interior girder.
89 91
Reinforcing Steel Cover Lever Rule

11’-9”
16k
• Be aware of this table
since many of the
R1 R2
clearances are greater 9’ 9”
9’-9” 2’
than those in ACI.
• R1 is a pinned connection
– Therefore moment @ R1 = 0
• Sum moments about R1
• 0ft-k = 16k * 11.75’ – R2 * 9.75’
• R2 = 16k * 1111.75
75’ / 9.75
9 75’ = 19
19.3
3ft-k
90 92
Gravity Loads
Terry Weigel
Phone # : 502.445.8266
Webinar Buildings
Presentation
Buildings
Content
Gravity loads Building 1 – high-rise - symmetrical – no
Dead load inherent eccentricity – dead, roof
Roof live load live, floor live, snow, wind, seismic
Floor live load – roof and floor live load reduction
Snow load Building 2 – low rise – large inherent
Live load reduction eccentricity – seismic torsion,
Roof live load wind load MWFRS and C&C
Floor live load
Load combinations
2 4
Building 1
Building 1 Slabs span N-S Floor Plan
Ten-story
Plan dimensions 75 ft x 125 ft
Bay dimensions 25 ft x 25 ft
12 ft story height
5-ft high parapet
Steel moment resisting in both directions
Roof dead load – 10.2 psf
Floor dead load – 60 psf
Unreduced roof live load – 20 psf
Unreduced floor live load – 60 psf
5 7
Building 1 Building 2
Location near Louisville, KY
Three-story
Story height - 16 ft
Plan - 80 ft x 160 ft
Gravity frames
Shear walls and moment resisting frame
Concrete roof and floor slabs
Dead loads are 60 psf, 90 psf and 100
psf for the roof, third level and
second level, respectively
Roof live load is 16 psf
8
Building 2 Dead Load
“Dead loads consist of the weight of all
materials of construction incorporated
into the building including, but not limited
to walls, floors, roofs, ceilings, stairways,
built-in partitions, finishes, cladding, and
other similarly incorporated architectural
and structural items, and fixed service
equipment including the weight of cranes.”
9 11
ASCE 7-05 Chapter 3

ASCE 7-05 Chapter 4
Dead Load, Soil Loads and
Live Loads
Hydrostatic Pressure
(IBC Section 1607)
(IBC Section 1606 – Dead Load)
10 12
Live Load Roof Live Load
“A load produced by the use and occupancy “A load on a roof produced (1) during
of the building or other structure that maintenance by workers, equipment, and
does not include construction or materials and (2) during the life of the
environmental loads, such as wind load, structure by movable objects, such as
snow load, rain load, earthquake load, flood planters or other similar small decorative
load, or dead load.” appurtenances that are not occupancy
related.”
Does not include snow or rain, which are
treated separately
13 15
ASCE 7-05 Table 4-1
Live Load Reduction
14 16
Live Load Element Factor
ASCE
7-05 Element KLL
Interior columns 4
Table
Floor Live Load Reduction 4-2
Exterior columns without cantilever slabs
Edge columns with cantilever slabs
4
3
ASCE 7-05 Section 4.8 Corner columns with cantilever slabs

Edge beams without cantilever slabs
2
2
(IBC Sections 1607.9)

Interior beams 2
All other members not identified 1
including:
Edge beams with cantilever slabs
Cantilever beams
One-way slabs
Two-way slabs
Members without provisions for continuous
shear transfer normal to their span
17 19
Floor Live Load Reduction

ASCE 7-05
Equation 4-1
at least 400 ft2
L = Lo 0.25 +
15 Roof Live Load Reduction
K LL AT
ASCE 7-05 Section 4.9
Lo unreduced live load per ft 2
L reduced live load per ft 2 (IBC Section 1607.11.2)
K LL live load element factor Table 4-2
AT tributary area in ft 2 doesn't include roof for columns
L 0.5 Lo for members supporting one floor
L 0.4 Lo for members supporting two or more floors
18 20
Roof Live Load Reduction Roof Live Load Reduction
Ordinary pitched, flat and curved roofs
are permitted to be design for a reduced 1 for F 4
live load R2 = 1.2 − 0.05F for 4 < F < 12
In structures where scaffolding is used 0.6 for F 12

F = 1 for flat roof
for maintenance and repair operations, use
F = number of inches rise per foot for pitched roof
of reduced live load less than that given
F = rise-to-span ratio multiplied by 32 for arch or dome roof
by Equation 4-2 requires approval of the
authority having jurisdiction. Roof live load
may not be taken as less than 12 psf in
these structures
Roof live load reduction applies to , not
or 21 23
Roof Live Load Reduction

Lr = Lo R1 R2
ASCE 7-05 12 Lr 20
Equation 4-2 R1 , R2 reduction factors
R1 accounts for tributary area
R2 accounts for roof slope Live Load Reduction Example
1 for AT 200 ft 2
Building 1
R1 = 1.2 − 0.001AT for 200 ft 2 < AT < 600 ft 2
0.6 for AT 600 ft 2
22 24
Floor Beam Live Load
Beam Tributary Area
Reduction Element KLL
Interior columns 4
Exterior columns without cantilever slabs 4
Edge columns with cantilever slabs 3
Corner columns with cantilever slabs 2
Beams on Line 1 and 4 Edge beams without cantilever slabs 2
Interior beams 2
All other members not identified 1
15
L = Lo 0.25 + including:
Edge beams with cantilever slabs
K LL AT Cantilever beams
One-way slabs
Two-way slabs
AT 156 ft 2 Members without provisions for continuous
K LL 2
K LL AT = 312 ft 2 < 400 ft 2
∴ No reduction permitted
25 27
Roof Beam Live Load Floor Beam Live Load

Reduction Reduction
Beams on Lines 1 and 4 Other beams
Lr = Lo R1 R2 15
L = Lo 0.25 +
AT = 156 ft 2 < 200 ft 2 K LL AT
R1 = 1 Other beams K LL 2
F = 1; R2 = 1 Lr = Lo R1 R2 AT 313 ft 2
Lr = 20 psf 1 1 AT = 313 ft 2 < 600 ft 2 K LL AT = 626 ft 2 > 400 ft 2
= 20 psf R1 = 1.2 − 0.001AT = 1.2 − 0.001 313 ft 2 15
L = 20 psf 0.25 + = 17.0 psf > 0.5Lo
= 0.887 2 313 ft 2
F = 1; R2 = 1
∴ use 17.0 psf
Lr = 20 psf 0.887 1 = 17.7 psf
26 28
Roof Column Live Load
Column Tributary Area
Reduction
Perimeter columns
Lr = Lo R1 R2
AT = 313 ft 2 > 200 ft 2
R1 = 1.2 − 0.001 313 ft 2 = 0.887
F = 1; R2 = 1
Lr = 20 psf 0.887 1 = 17.7 psf
29 31
Roof Column Live Load

Columns Supporting 8th Floor
Reduction
Interior columns
Corner columns
Lr = Lo R1 R2 15
L = Lo 0.25 +
K LL AT
Interior columns AT = 156 ft 2 < 200 ft 2 Element KLL
Lr = Lo R1 R2 R1 = 1
Interior columns
Exterior columns without cantilever slabs
4
4
AT = 3 625 ft 2 = 1875 ft 2
Edge columns with cantilever slabs 3
AT = 625 ft 2 > 600 ft 2 F = 1; R2 = 1 K LL = 4
Corner columns with cantilever slabs 2
Edge beams without cantilever slabs 2
R1 = 0.6 Lr = 20 psf 1 1 = 20 psf Interior beams 2
15
F = 1; R2 = 1
All other members not identified
including:
1
L = 60 psf 0.25 +
Edge beams with cantilever slabs 4 1875 ft 2
Lr = 20 psf 0.6 1 Cantilever beams
One-way slabs
Two-way slabs = 25.4 psf
= 12 psf > 0.5 Lo = 0.5 20 psf = 10 psf Members without provisions for continuous
25.4 psf > 0.4 Lo = 0.4 60 psf
Absolute minimum roof live load is 12 psf, so Ok
= 24 psf
30 32
Reduced Live Load –
Columns Supporting 8th Floor
Perimeter Columns
Corner columns
Column Live load Live load Reduced
15 Tributary area
Supporting reduction reduction live load
L = Lo 0.25 + Floor
(AT - ft2)
(unlimited) (limited) (L - psf)
K LL AT
Roof 313 **** 0.888 17.8
K LL = 4 10 312.5 0.674 0.674 40.5
9 625 0.550 0.550 33.0
AT = 3 156 ft 2 = 469 ft 2
8 938 0.495 0.495 29.7
7 1250 0.462 0.462 27.7
15 6 1563 0.440 0.440 26.4
L = 60 psf 0.25 + = 35.8 psf > 0.4 Lo
5 1875 0.423 0.423 25.4
4 469 ft 2
4 2188 0.410 0.410 24.6
3 2500 0.400 0.400 24.0
2 2813 0.391 0.400 24.0
33 35
Reduced Live Load – Interior Reduced Live Load – Corner

Columns Columns
Column Live load Live load Column Live load Live load Reduced
Tributary Reduced live Tributary
Supporting reduction reduction Supporting reduction reduction live load
area (AT - ft2) load (L - psf) area (AT - ft2)
Floor (unlimited) (limited) Floor (unlimited) (limited) (L - psf)
Roof 625 **** 0.600 12 Roof 156 **** 1.000 20
10 625 0.550 0.550 33.0 10 156 0.850 0.850 51.0
9 1250 0.462 0.462 27.7 9 313 0.674 0.674 40.5
8 1875 0.423 0.423 25.4 8 469 0.596 0.596 35.8
7 2500 0.400 0.4 24 7 625 0.550 0.550 33.0
6 3125 0.384 0.4 24 6 781 0.518 0.518 31.1
5 3750 0.372 0.4 24 5 938 0.495 0.495 29.7
4 4375 0.363 0.4 24 4 1094 0.477 0.477 28.6
3 5000 0.356 0.4 24 3 1250 0.462 0.462 27.7
2 5625 0.3500 0.4 24 2 1406 0.450 0.450 27.0
34 36
Snow Load Methodology
Determine the ground snow load (Section
7.2)
ASCE 7-05 Chapter 7 Generate the flat roof snow load
Snow Loads considering:
roof exposure (Section 7.3)
(IBC Section 1608 – incorporates roof thermal condition (Section
ASCE 7-05 by reference) 7.3.2)
occupancy and function (Section 7.3.3)
Consider the roof slope (Section 7.4)
Consider partial loading (Section 7.5)
37 39
Snow Load Methodology

Consider unbalanced loading (Section 7.6)
Consider drifting (Sections 7.7 and 7.8)
Consider sliding snow (Section 7.9)
Consider load from rain on ice (Section
Snow Loads Methodology 7.10)
Consider ponding (Section 7.11)
Consider existing roofs (Section 7.12)
Consider other roof and sites (Section 7.13)
38 40
Snow Load – Terminology and
Snow Load
Definitions
Sloped roof snow load Flat roof snow load
pg ground snow load - psf, Figure 7-1 ps Cs p f pf 0.7Ce Ct Ipg
pf flat roof snow load - psf Cs warm roof or Ce exposure factor, Table 7-2
ps sloped roof snow load - psf cold roof slope factor Ct thermal factor, Table 7-3
Ce exposure factor, Table 7-2 Ct 1 warm roof I importance factor, Table 7-4
Cs slope factor, Figure 7-2 Ct > 1 cold roof pg ground snow load, Figure 7-1
Ct thermal factor, Table 7-3
I importance factor, Table 7-4
snow density = 0.13 pg + 14 30 pcf
41 43
Snow Load – Terminology and Figure 7-1

Definitions ASCE
Flat roof slope 5o 7-05
Low-rise roof
Monoslope slope < 15o Ground
Hip and gable slope less than the larger of - Snow
2.38o 1 2 on 12 or 70 W + 0.5
Curved slope of vertical angle from eave to crown Load ( )
less than 10o
W horizontal distance from eave to ridge, ft
42 44
ASCE 7-05 Table 7-2, ASCE 7-05 Table 7-4,
Terrain Category Fully Exposed Partially Exposed Sheltered
Building I
B* 0.9 1.0 1.2 Category*
C* 0.9 1.0 1.1 I 0.8
D* 0.8 0.9 1.0 II 1.0
Above the 0.7 0.8 N/A III 1.1
treeline in wind
IV 1.2
swept
mountainous
areas
*Building categories defined in Chapter 1
In Alaska, in areas 0.7 0.8 N/A
where trees do
not exist within a
2-mile radius of
the site
*Terrain categories defined in Chapter 6 45 47
ASCE 7-05 Table 7-3,

Thermal Condition Ct
All structures except as indicated below 1.0
Structures kept just above freezing and others with cold, 1.1
ventilated roofs in which the thermal resistance (R-value)
between the ventilated space and the heated space exceeds
25o F× h× ft2/Btu Roof Slope Factors
Unheated structures and structures intentionally kept below 1.2
freezing
Continuously heated greenhouses with a roof having a 0.85
thermal resistance (R-value) less than 2.0o F× h× ft2/Btu
46 48
Warm Roof Slope Factor Cold Roof Slope Factor
Cold roof slope factor
Warm roof slope factor
Ct = 1.1 and unobstructed slippery surface
Ct 1.0
Cs use dashed line in Figure 7.2b
Unobstructed slippery surface
Other roofs with Ct = 1.1
allows snow to slide off eaves
Cs use solid line in Figure 7.2b
Non-ventilated, R 30 Fo h ft 2 /Btu
Ventilated, R 20 Fo h ft 2 /Btu Ct = 1.2 and unobstructed slippery surface
Cs use dashed line in Figure 7-2a Cs use dashed line in Figure 7.2c
Otherwise, use solid line Other roofs with Ct = 1.2
Cs use solid line in Figure 7.2c
49 51
ASCE 7-05 Figure 7-2a ASCE 7-05 Figure 7-2b

5o 10o
30o
All other surfaces 37.5o All other surfaces
70o
Unobstructed slippery surfaces

Warm roof Unobstructed slippery surfaces
with R 30 for unventilated
Ct 1.0 Cold roof
roofs and R 20 for ventilated
roofs
Ct = 1.1
50 52
ASCE 7-05 Figure 7-2c
All other surfaces

o o
15 45
Balanced and Unbalanced Loading
70o
Unobstructed slippery surfaces Cold roof

Ct = 1.2
53 55
Other Roof Slope Factor Figure 7-5 –

AISC
Curved roof slope factor 7-05
Slope > 70o , Cs = 0 no snow For hip and gable roof
Roof slope factor for multiple folded plate, unbalanced loads need
sawtooth and barrel vault roofs not be considered if:
Cs = 1 no reduction in snow load > 70o
or
< larger of 2.38o
70
and + 0.5
W
54 56
Partial Loading Snow Drift
57 59
Continuous Beam Loading Snow Drift Definitions

hc clear height from top of balanced snow load to
(1) closest point on adjacent upper roof,
Support will
(2) top of parapet, or
not
(3) top of a projection on the roof, ft
be present hd height of snow drift, ft
if w width of snow drift, ft
cantilever lu length of the roof upwind of the drift, ft
58 60
Snow Drift Snow Drift
Wind shadow of (1) the higher portion of For leeward drift, determine using
the same structure (2) adjacent Figure 7-9 and length of upper roof
structures or terrain features
For windward drift, determine using
Leeward and windward drift Figure 7-9 and length of lower roof.
Take equal to ¾ of value
Triangular drift surcharge superimposed determined from Figure 7-9
on balanced snow load
The larger of the two values of is used
Drift surcharge not required if / < in the design
0.2
61 63
ASCE 7-05 Figure 7-7 Snow Drift

If the value determined on the previous
slide is less than or equal to , take
equal to 4 and use the full value
of determined from Figure 7-9
If the value determined on the previous
slide is greater than , take equal
to 4( ) and take the drift
height equal to
Drift width shall not be greater 8
64
Snow Drift ASCE 7-05 Figure 7-9
If is longer than roof length, truncate
= 600 ft
the drift at the roof edge, do not set hd = 0.43 3
u
4 pg + 10 − 15
u
it equal to zero u = 400 ft
Parapet drift provisions consider windward u = 200 ft

drift only
u = 100 ft
The height of drift at a parapet is taken = 50 ft
u
as 3/4 the value read from Figure
7-9. Take equal to the length of u = 25 ft
the roof upwind from the parapet

65
ASCE 7-05 Figure 7-8

pd = hd
= 0.13 pg + 14 30 psf
ps
hb =
Snow Load Examples
68
Snow Load Example 1 Snow Load Example 1
Consider an apartment building located in pg = 35 psf
Sloped roof snow load
Boston, Massachusetts. Its unventilated = 0.13 35 psf + 14 = 18.6 pcf
ps = C s p f
gable roof has a slope of 6-on-12. The Ce = 1
Roof slope = 26.6o
building length is 150 ft and the eave to Ct = 1
Cs = 1 Figure 7-2a
ridge distance, , is 35 ft. Determine the I =1
ps = 24.5 psf
balanced and unbalanced design snow load Flat roof snow load
for this building. Use terrain category pf 0.7 1 1 1 35 psf = 24.5 psf
and partially exposed roof. Assume the max(1 2 on 12, 70 35 + 0.5) = 2.5o
roof shingles do not permit snow to slide Roof slope = 26.6o > 2.5o
off the roof. ∴ Minimum flat roof load does not apply
Use 24.5 psf
69 71
Figure 7-1 Snow Load Example 1

ASCE
7-05
Ground pg = 35 psf
All other surfaces
Snow
Load (pg)
26.6o
Warm roof
Ct 1.0
70 72
Roof slope = 26.6o > 2.5o 12
S= =2
∴ Unbalanced snow load must be considered 6
hd 2.14 ft 18.6 pcf
u = W = 35 ft Drift surcharge intensity = = = 28.1 psf
S 2
hd = 0.43 3
u
4 pg + 10 − 15 = 0.43 3 35 ft 4 35 psf + 10 − 15
8 S hd
Or from Figure 7-9 for pg = 35 psf and = 35 ft Horizontal extent of drift surcharge =
u 3
hd 2.14 ft 8 2 2.14 ft
= = 8.06 ft
3
Rain on snow surcharge need not be considered because pg > 20 psf
73 75

= 600 ft Note load is applied to
u
horizontal projection
u = 400 ft
u = 200 ft
u = 100 ft
= 35 ft
= 50 ft
u
u
2.14 ft
u = 25 ft
35 psf
76
Calculate the snow load for the roof of
Drift at parapet
Building 1, wind blowing in the N-S
u = 75 ft
direction. Use a ground snow load of 40 hd 0.75 3.2 ft = 2.40 ft Figure 7-9
psf. The roof is heated and unventilated.
hd < hc ∴ w = 4hd = 4 2.4 ft = 9.6 ft
pd = hd = 2.40 ft 19.2 pcf = 46.1 psf
77 79

Ce = 1 Table 7-2
Ct = 1 Table 7-3
I = 1 Table 7-4
pg = 40 psf
p f = 0.7Ce Ct Ipg = 0.7 1 1 1 40 psf = 28 psf
= 0.13 40 psf + 14 = 19.2 pcf
hb = p f = 28 psf 19.2 pcf = 1.46 ft
hc = 5 ft − 1.46 ft = 3.54 ft
hc hb = 3.54 ft 1.46 ft = 2.42 > 0.2 ∴ drift must be considered
78 80
Snow Load Example 2
Load Combinations
81 83
Snow Load Example 2 Load Combinations

Load combinations are found in Chapter 2
of ASCE 7 and Chapter 16 of IBC
Load combinations apply to load effects

(axial force, shear, moment) not loads
(dead, live, earthquake)
82 84
ASCE7 SD Load Combinations Load Combinations
ASCE Chapter 2 – SD - Section 2.3 Each load combination represents a
IBC Chapter 16 – preference each LC number situation where one of the loads is at its
with 16 to get IBC LC numbers maximum or minimum lifetime value and
1 1.4 D + F the other loads are at their respective
2 1.2( D + F + T ) + 1.6 L + H + 0.5 Lr or S or R “arbitrary point in time”(APT) values.
3 1.2 D + 1.6 Lr or S or R + L or 0.8W LC2
4 1.2 D + 1.6W + L + 0.5 Lr or S or R 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5 Lr or S or R
5 1.2 D + 1.0 E + L + 0.2S L is at its maximum lifetime value
6 0.9 D + 1.6W + 1.6H
D and Lr or S or R are at APT values
7 0.9 D + 1.0 E + 1.6H
85 87
ASCE 7 Load Combinations Load Combinations

In ASCE 7-05, for combinations (3), (4) and (5) the
• = dead load load factor on is 1. Except for garages or areas
occupied as places of public assembly, when taken
• = floor live load from Table 4-1 is less than or equal to 100 psf, the
load factor on in these combinations may be taken
• = roof live load as 0.5. In Steel Construction Manual, the same load
• = snow load factor in those combinations is given as 0.5, and a
footnote describes situations where it must be taken
• = rainwater load as 1.
• = wind load In , for those combinations the load factor on is
represented as , where takes a value (either 0.5
• = earthquake load or 1) consistent with ASCE 7-05 provisions.
86 88
Load Combination Example
Correct procedure
Load Combination Example MD =

1.0 k ft 20 ft
2
= 50 k ft
(correct result – wrong

8
2
1.5 k ft 20 ft
ML = = 75 k ft
procedure) 8
1.4 50 k ft = 70 k ft
1.2(50 k ft) + 1.6 75 k ft = 180 k ft controls
89 91
Load Combinations Load Combinations

A 20-ft-long simply supported beam is Load combinations involving or require
subjected to a dead load of 1 k/ft and a special attention
live load of 1.5 k/ft. Determine the
maximum moment for which this beam In the context of a plane frame, wind load
must be designed. can act from right to left or left to right
Correct result but technically incorrect
In the context of a plane frame,
procedure
1.4 1k ft = 1.4 k ft earthquake load can act horizontally from
1.2(1k ft) + 1.6 1.5 k ft = 3.6 k ft controls right to left or left to right and vertically
3.6 k ft 20 ft
2 up or down
M = = 180 k ft
8
90 92
Earthquake Load IBC Earthquake
E = Eh + Ev LC-5 IBC has two additional load combinations
involving earthquake load, applicable to
E = Eh − Ev LC-7
both ASD and SD:
Eh = QE
16-22 1.2 D + f1 L + Em
QE horizontal earthquake effect
16-23 0.9D + Em
redundancy factor whose value depends Em as defined in ASCE 7-05
on lateral load resisting system, = 1 or 1.3
Ev vertical load effect = 0.2 S DS D These load combinations trigger when
required by IBC Chapters 18 through 23
93 95
Earthquake Load
When use of system overstrength factor is required:
E = Em = Emh + Ev LC-5
E = Em = Emh − Ev LC-7
Emh = Ω oQE Ωo ASCE 7 Table 12.2-1 Load Combinations Example
Ωo system overstrength factor
Ev vertical load effect = 0.2 S DS D
94 96
Load Combinations Load Combinations
Using the analysis Example Axial load
1 1.4D = 1.4 115 k = 161 k Example
results given on
the next slide, 2 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr = 1.2 115 k + 1.6 17.9 k + 0.5 2.81 k = 168 k
evaluate the ASCE 3a 1.2D + 1.6Lr + L = 1.2 115 k + 1.6 2.81 k + 1 17.9 k = 160 k
7-05 load 3b 1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W = 1.2 115 k + 1.6 2.81 k + 0.8 8.38 k
combinations for = 149 k
the right column 3c 1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W = 1.2 115 k + 1.6 2.81 k + 0.8 −8.38 k
using: = 136 k
4a 1.2D + 1.6W + L + 0.5Lr = 1.2 115 k + 1.6 8.38 k + 1 17.9 k
+ 0.5 2.81 k = 171 k
4b 1.2D + 1.6W + L + 0.5Lr = 1.2 115 k + 1.6 −8.38 k + 1 17.9 k
+ 0.5 2.81 k = 144 k
6a 0.9D + 1.6W = 0.9 115 k + 1.6 8.38 k = 117 k
6b 0.9D + 1.6W = 0.9 115 k + 1.6 −8.38 k = 90.1 k
97 99
Load Combinations
Load Combinations Example Example
Shear
Results from frame analysis –
first story column on right 1 1.4D = 1.4 12.7 k = 17.8 k
2 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr = 1.2 12.7 k + 1.6 1.96 k + 0.5 0.40 k = 18.6 k
3a 1.2D + 1.6Lr + L = 1.2 12.7 k + 1.6 0.40 k + 1 1.96 k = 17.8 k
Load Axial Shear Moment 3b 1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W = 1.2 12.7 k + 1.6 0.40 k + 0.8 5.21 k
(k) (k) (k-ft) = 20.0 k
D 115 12.7 112
4 1.2D + 1.6W + L + 0.5Lr = 1.2 12.7 k + 1.6 5.21 k + 1 1.96 k
L 17.9 1.96 17.4
+ 0.5 0.40 k = 25.7 k
Lr 2.81 0.40 3.57
6 0.9D + 1.6W = 0.9 12.7 k + 1.6 5.21 k = 19.8 k
E 47.9 34.5 474
W 8.38 5.21 70.7
98 100
Load Combinations
Example Load Combinations Example
Moment
1 1.4D = 1.4 112 k ft = 157 k ft LC 7, IBC 16-23
2 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr = 1.2 112 k ft + 1.6 17.4 k ft + 0.5 3.57 k ft 0.9 − 0.2S DS D + Ω o QE
= 164 k ft Axial
3a 1.2D + 1.6Lr + L = 1.2 112 k ft + 1.6 3.57 k ft + 1 17.4 k ft = 158 k ft
0.9 − 0.2 1 115 k + 2.5 −47.9 k = −39.3 k (tension)
3b 1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W = 1.2 112 k ft + 1.6 3.57 k ft + 0.8 70.7 k ft
Shear
= 197 k ft
4 1.2D + 1.6W + L + 0.5Lr = 1.2 112 k ft + 1.6 70.7 k ft + 1 17.4 k ft
0.9 − 0.2 1 12.7 k + 2.5 34.5 k = 95.1 k
+ 0.5 3.57 k ft = 267 k ft Moment
6 0.9D + 1.6W = 0.9 112 k ft + 1.6 70.7 k ft = 214 k ft 0.9 − 0.2 1 112k ft + 2.5 474k ft = 1263 k ft
101 103
Load Combinations Example Load Combinations Example

Earthquake Column must be designed to resist
Ωo > Load Moment
Axial Force (k) Shear (k)
LC 5, IBC 16-22 Combination (k-ft)
1.2 + 0.2 S DS D + L + Ω o QE 1 161 17.8 157

2 168 18.6 164
Axial
3a 160 17.8 158
1.2 + 0.2 1 115 + 1.0 17.9 + 2.5 47.9 = 299 k
3b 149 20.0 197
Shear 4a 171 25.7 267
1.2 + 0.2 1 12.7 + 1.0 1.96 + 2.5 34.5 = 106 k 4b 144 25.7 267
5, 16-22 299 106 1359
Moment
6a 117 19.8 214
1.2 + 0.2 1 112 + 1.0 17.4 + 2.5 474 = 1359 k ft
6b 90.1 19.8 214
7, 16-23 -39.3 95.1 1263
102 104
Content of Presentation
Seismic loads
Building period
Equivalent lateral force procedure
Thank You Examples
Wind loads
Questions? MWFRS
C&C
Examples
105

Lateral Loads
Terry Weigel
Phone # : 502.445.8266
Webinar�Buildings
E mail: [email protected]
3
Webinar Buildings Building 1
Building 1 – high-rise - symmetrical – no Located in an area similar to Charleston,
inherent eccentricity – dead, roof SC
live, floor live, snow, wind seismic – Wind exposure category C, partially
roof and floor live load reduction exposed
Building 2 – low rise – large inherent Seismic design category D
eccentricity – seismic torsion Seismic soil site class C
4 6
Building 1 Building 1
Ten-story
Plan dimensions 75 ft x 125 ft
Bay dimensions 25 ft x 25 ft
12 ft story height
5-ft high parapet
Steel moment resisting in both directions
Roof dead load – 10.2 psf
Floor dead load – 60 psf
Unreduced roof live load – 20 psf
Unreduced floor live load – 60 psf
5
Building 1
Building 2
Slabs span N-S Floor Plan
8 10
Building 2 Building 2 –
Location near Louisville, KY Roof Plan
Three-story
Story height - 16 ft
Plan - 80 ft x 160 ft
Gravity frames
Shear walls and moment resisting frame
Concrete roof and floor slabs
Dead loads are 60 psf, 90 psf and 100
psf for the roof, third level and
second level, respectively
Roof live load is 16 psf
9 11
Methods of Lateral Load
Analysis
ASCE 7 05 Chapters 11, 12, 22 Equivalent lateral force procedure – ASCE
7-05 Section 12.8
Seismic Loads Modal response spectrum analysis - ASCE
(IBC Section 1613.1 incorporates 7-05 Section 12.9
ASCE 7 05 by reference – Seismic response history – ASCE 7-05
Chapter 16
excludes Chapter14 and Simplified alternate structural design for
Appendix 11A) simple bearing wall or building frame
systems - ASCE 7-05 Section 12.14
(not permitted in some jurisdictions)
12 14
Lateral Load Analysis Equivalent Lateral Force Procedure
13 15
2006 IBC / ASCE 7-05 Equivalent Lateral Force
Notation Procedure
W effective seismic weight V = CsW (ASCE 7 Eq. 12.8-1)
Cs seismic response coefficient S DS
Cs = (ASCE 7 Section 12.8.1.1)
I importance factor R I
R response modification coefficient S D1
0.044 IS DS Cs
Cd deflection amplification factor T R I
SS mapped MCE, 5 percent damped, spectral response (ASCE 7-05 Supplement No. 2 and ASCE 7-10)
acceleration parameter at short periods
S D1
S1 mapped MCE, 5 percent damped, spectral response 0.01 Cs (ASCE 7-05 before Supplement No. 2)
T R I
acceleration parameter at a period of 1 s
S D1
MCE maximum considered earthquake 0.03 Cs (2007 CBC)
T R I
16 18
2006 IBC / ASCE 7-05

ASCE 7-05 Table 12.2-1
Notation
S MS 5 percent damped, MCE spectral response
acceleration at short periods, adjusted for site class
SM 1 5 percent damped, MCE spectral response
acceleration at 1 s , adjusted for site class
S DS 5 percent damped, design spectral response acceleration
parameter at short periods
S D1 5 percent damped, design spectral response acceleration
parameter at at a period of 1 s
Mixed systems different directions

Mixed systems same direction
17 19
ASCE 7-05 ASCE 7-05 Table 11.4-1
Figure 22-1
(Page 210)
or
http://earthquake.
usgs.gov/hazards/
designmaps/
20
Equivalent Lateral Force ASCE 7-05 Table 11.4-2

Procedure
S M 1 = Fv S1
S MS = Fa S S
2
S D1 = SM 1
3
2
S DS = S MS
3
Fa and Fv taken from ASCE 7-05 Tables 11.4-1 and 11.4-2,
2007 CBC and IBC 2006
Tables 1613.(A).5.3(1) and 1613.(A).5.3(2)
21
Approximate Fundamental
Period
Moment resisting frames (ASCE 7-05 Eq. 12.8-7):
Ta = Ct hnx
- height, in ft, above the base to the highest
Building Period level of the structure
Alternate - For moment resisting systems made
entirely of steel or concrete, less than 12
stories in height and each story height is less
than 10 ft (ASCE 7-05 Eq. 12.8-8):
Ta = 0.1N
N number of stories
24 26
Fundamental Period ASCE 7-05 Table 12.8-2

ASCE 7-05 Section 12.8.2 (page 129) – “The Moment-resisting frame systems in which
fundamental period of the structure, , in the
the frames resist 100% of the required
direction under consideration shall be
seismic force and are not enclosed or
established using the structural properties
and deformational characteristics of the adjoined by components that are more
resisting elements in a properly substantiated rigid and will prevent the frames from
analysis. The fundamental period, shall not deflecting where subjected to seismic
exceed the product of the coefficient for forces:
upper limit on calculated period ( ) from Structure Type Ct x
Steel moment resisting frames 0.028 0.80
Table 12.8-1 and the approximate fundamental
Concrete moment resisting frames 0.016 0.90
period, determined in accordance with
Eccentrically braced steel frames 0.030 0.75
Section 12.8.2.1.” All other structural systems 0.020 0.75
25 27
Period
Concrete or masonry shear wall structures Limit on period T
(ASCE 7-05 Eqs. 12.8-9 and 12.8-10):
T CuTa
0.0019
Ta = hn Design Spectral Response Acceleration Cu
CW Coefficient Parameter at 1 s, SD1
2 >= 0.4 1.4
x
100 hn Ai 0.3 1.4
CW = 2 0.2 1.5
AB i =1 hi h
1 + 0.83 i 0.15 1.6
Di <=0.1 1.7
28 30
Period
AB area of the base of the structure, ft 2
Ai web area of shear wall "i", ft 2
Di length of shear wall "i", ft
hi height of shear wall "i", ft Building Period Example Problems
hn height of above the base of the
highest level of the structure, ft
x number of shear walls in the building
effective in resisting lateral forces in the
direction under consideration
29 31
Approximate Building Period
Example – Building 1
Compute the approximate period of Building 1 if
the material is reinforced concrete rather
than steel
ASCE 7-05 Eq. 12.8-7
Building 1 Ta = Ct hnx
0.9
Ta = 0.016 10 ft 10 = 1.009 s
32 34
Approximate Building Period Approximate Building Period

Example – Building 1 Example – Building 1
For the steel frame example done previously,
Compute the approximate period of Building 1
compute the value of that would be
permitted by ASCE 7-05 if the period
ASCE 7-05 Eq. 12.8-7
computed by an analysis is (a) 1.515 s and
Ta = Ct hnx (b) 1.929 s. = 0.3240.
0.8
Ta = 0.028 12 ft 10 = 1.290 s Part (a)
From Table 12.8-1, Cu = 1.4
T = 1.515 s < 1.4 1.290 s = 1.806 s
Use T = 1.515 s
33 35
Approximate Building Period Approximate Building Period
Example – Building 1 Example – Building 2
For the steel frame example done previously, Calculate the approximate
compute the value of that would be natural period in the
permitted by ASCE 7-05 if the period horizontal direction for the
computed by an analysis is (a) 1.515 s and
ASCE 7-05 Eq. 12.8-9 building shown in the figure.
(b) 1.929 s. = 0.3240. The shear walls are 8 in.
0.0019
Ta = hn thick, made of concrete.
Cw
Part (b) 2
T = 1.929 s > 1.4 1.290 s = 1.806 s 100 x hn Ai

CW = 2
AB i =1 hi h
Use T = 1.806 s 1 + 0.83 i
Di
36 38
Approximate
Building
Period
Example
Building 2
37 39
Example
All walls in the horizontal direction have the
same web area, length and height.
8 in 20 ft Equivalent Lateral Force Method

Ai = = 13.3 ft 2
12in ft Examples
Di = 20 ft
hn = hi = 48 ft; hn hi = 1
40 42

Example
100 13.3 ft 2
Equivalent Lateral Force Method
2
CW = 3 1 2
= 0.0539
160 ft 80 ft 48 ft
1 + 0.83
20 ft Example – Building 1
0.0019
Ta = 48 ft = 0.393 s
0.0539
41 43
Equivalent Lateral Force
Use the equivalent force method to
determine the base shear for Building 1.
Allocate the base shear to each of the
story levels and then allocate the story
loads to individual frames. Use = 3.5 and
= 1. Assume that the earthquake acts NS.
44

Building perimeter = 2 75 ft + 125 ft = 400 ft
Building area = 75 ft 125 ft = 9375 ft 2
Cladding weight = 400 ft 9.5 stories 12 ft 77 psf 1000 k lb = 3511 k
Parapet weight = 5 ft 400 ft 40 psf 1000 k lb = 80 k
Approximate frame weight = 915 k
Roof dead load = 9375 ft 2 10.2 psf = 95.6 k
Floor dead load = 9375 ft 2 9 stories 60 psf = 5062 k
W = 3511 k + 80 k + 915 k + 95.6 k + 5062 k = 9664 k
W also includes weight of demountable partitions , 25% of live load in areas
used for storage, operating weight of permenant equipment and snow loads
under certain conditions.
45
Spectral accelerations (Zipcode 29401 or
ASCE 7-05 Figures 22-1 and 22-2)
S S = 1.433
S1 = 0.355
Adjustment for site conditions (ASCE Tables 11.4-1 and 11.4-2) Vertical Force Distribution –
Fa = 1.0
Fv = 1.445 by interpolation
Building 1
S MS = Fa S S = 1.433
S M 1 = Fv S1 = 0.5130
2
S DS = S MS = 0.962
3
2
S D1 = S M 1 = 0.342
3
48 50

Vertical Force Distribution
T = Ta = 1.290 s
ASCE Section 12.8.3
S DS 0.962
Cs = = = 0.275 Fx = CvxV (Eq. 12.8-11)
R I 3.5 1
wx hxk
0.044 1 0.962 Cs
S D1 Cvx = (Eq. 12.8-12)
T R I w hk
i i i
0.342 k = 1 for structures with a period less than or equal to 0.5 s

0.0423 Cs = 0.0757 k = 2 for structures with a period at least equal to 2.5 s
1.290 s 3.5 1
Use linear interpolation between 1 and 2 for other period values
Cs = 0.0757
V = 0.0757 9664 k = 731.6 k
49 51
Equivalent Story
ASCE Section 12.8.3 Lateral Loads
Fx = CvxV (Eq. 12.8-11)
Cvx =
wx hxk
(Eq. 12.8-12)
Force
w hk
i i i
T = 1.290 s
Example
1.290 s - 0.5 s
k = 1+ 2 - 1 = 1.395
2.5 s - 0.5 s
Weight of one story of cladding = 400 ft 12 ft 77 psf 1000 lb k
= 369.6 k
Dead load assigned to roof =
95.6 k + 80 k + 369.6 k 2 + 915 k 10 = 451.9 k
Dead load assigned to floors other than roof
= 9375 ft 2 60 psf 1000 lb k + 369.6 k + 915 k 10 = 1024 k
52 54
1.395 1.395 1.395

12 ft + 24 ft + 36 ft +
1.395 1.395 1.395 1.395
i
wi hik = 1024 k 48 ft + 60 ft + 72 ft + + 451.9 k 120 ft
1.395 1.395 1.395
84 ft + 96 ft + 108 ft
= 3357305 k ft
1.395
1024 k 12 ft
Cv 2 = = 0.00976
3357305 k ft
1024 k 84 ft
1.395
Horizontal Force Distribution –
Cv 8 =
3357305 k ft
= 0.147
Building 1
Equivalent
1.395
451.9 k 120 ft
Cvr = = 0.107
3357305 k ft
F2 = 0.00976 731.6 k = 7.14 k
F8 = 0.147 731.6 k = 107.5 k
Lateral
Fr = 0.107 731.6 k = 78.3 k Force
Example 53 55
Building 1 Roof Seismic
Equivalent Seismic Loads
Loads
56 58
Equivalent Building 1 Roof Equivalent

Lateral Seismic Loads
Distribution to roof
Direct load per frame = 78.3 k 6 = 13.05 k
Force
Accidental eccentricity = 0.05 125 ft = 6.25 ft Example
Torsion = 6.25 ft 78.3 k = 489.4 k ft
Load to Frame A = 13.05 k + 489.4 k ft 62.5 ft 13, 750 = 15.28 k
Load to Frame F = 13.05 k - 489.4 k ft 62.5 ft 13, 750 = 10.83 k
Load to Frame B = 13.05 k + 489.4 k ft 37.5 ft 13, 750 = 14.39 k
Load to Frame E = 13.05 k - 489.4 k ft 37.5 ft 13, 750 = 11.72 k
Load to Frame C = 13.05 k + 489.4 k ft 12.5 ft 13, 750 = 13.50 k
Load to Frame D = 13.05 k - 489.4 k ft 12.5 ft 13, 750 = 12.61 k
Loads to Frame 1 and 2 = 489.4 k ft 37.5 ft 13, 750 = 1.33 k
57 59
Equivalent
Lateral
Distribution to eighth floor Force
Direct load per frame = 107.9 k 6 = 17.98 k
Torsion = 6.25 ft 107.9 k = 674.4 k ft Example
Load to Frame A = 13.05 k + 674.4 k ft 62.5 ft 13, 750 = 21.04 k Equivalent Lateral Force Method
Load to Frame F = 13.05 k - 674.4 k ft 62.5 ft 13, 750 = 14.91 k
Load to Frame B = 13.05 k + 674.4 k ft 37.5 ft 13, 750 = 19.82 k
Load to Frame E = 13.05 k - 674.4 k ft 37.5 ft 13, 750 = 16.14 k
Load to Frame C = 13.05 k + 674.4 k ft 12.5 ft 13, 750 = 18.59 k
Load to Frame D = 13.05 k - 674.4 k ft 12.5 ft 13, 750 = 17.36 k
Loads to Frame 1 and 2 = 674.4 k ft 37.5 ft 13, 750 = 1.84 k
60 62
Building 1 Eighth Floor Equivalent Lateral Force

Equivalent Seismic Loads Example – Building 2
For the level between the third floor and the
roof, determine the force in each of the
lateral force resisting elements in the building
shown on the next slide. Dead loads are
60 psf, 90 psf and 100 psf for the roof,
third level and second level, respectively.
The shear wall elements are special
reinforced concrete shear walls ( = 5).
Use = 1.
61 63
Calculate the load tributary to each story of the frame
A = 160 ft 80 ft = 12,800 ft 2
Equivalent w2 =
12,800 ft 2 100 psf + 4 20 ft 16 ft 70 psf
1000 lb/k
= 1370 k
Lateral w3 =
12,800 ft 2 90 psf + 4 20 ft 16 ft 70 psf
= 1240 k
Force 12,800 ft 2
1000 lb/k
60 psf + 4 20 ft 8 ft 70 psf
wr = = 813 k
Example – 1000 lb/k
Building 2
64 66

Wall weight = 4 20 ft 16 ft + 16 ft + 8 ft 70 psf
= 224, 000 lb = 224 k
160 ft 80 ft 60 + 90 + 100 psf
W= + 224 k = 3420 k
T = Ta = 0.393 s
1000 lb/k
Vertical Force Distribution –
S DS = 1
S D1 = 0.52
Building 2
S DS 1
Cs = = = 0.2
R I 51
0.52
0.03 Cs = 0.265
0.393 s 5 1
Cs = 0.2
V = 0.2 3420 k = 684 k
65 67
Vertical Force Distribution
ASCE Section 12.8.3
Fx = CvxV (Eq. 12.8-11)
wx hxk
Cvx =
Horizontal Force Distribution –
(Eq. 12.8-12)
w hk
i i i
k = 1 for structures with a period less than or equal to 0.5 s

k = 2 for structures with a period at least equal to 2.5 s Building 2
Use linear interpolation between 1 and 2 for other period values
68 70
Equivalent Equivalent Lateral Force

Example
ASCE Section 12.8.3
Fx = CvxV (Eq. 12.8-11) Lateral
x y Kx Ky Kx *y Ky *x
Force
wx hxk
Cvx = (Eq. 12.8-12)
w hk Wall / Frame
i i i
k = 1 (for a period less than or equal to 0.5 s)

w h k = 1370 k 16 ft + 1240 k 32 ft +
i i i
Example Line A
ft
0
ft
70 0 20
ft
0
ft
0
813 k 48 ft = 101, 000 k ft Line I 160 40 0 0.65 0 104
Line 1 1 30 0 20 0 0 0
1370 k 16 ft
Cv 2 = = 0.217 Story Loads Line 1 2 130 0 20 0 0 0
101, 000 k ft Line 5 10 80 20 0 1600 0
1240 k 32 ft Story C vx Load (k) S 60 20.7 1600 104
Cv 3 = = 0.393
101, 000 k ft 2nd 0.217 148 x cr 5.02 ft
813 k 48 ft
Cvr = = 0.386 3rd 0.393 269 Kyx
ycr 26.7 ft
101, 000 k ft 104
xcr = = = 5.02
F2 = 0.217 684 k = 148 k Roof 0.386 264 Ky 20.7
Total 681 ycr =
Kx y
=
1600
= 26.7
69
Kx 60 71
Equivalent xcm =
160 ft
2
= 80 ft
Wall Locations Relative to CR
Lateral ycm =
80 ft
= 40 ft
2
Force eix = 80 ft - 5.02 ft = 75.0 ft
Example eiy = 40 ft - 26.7 ft = 13.3 ft

eax = 0.05 160 ft = 8 ft
eay = 0.05 80 ft = 4 ft
264 k 75.0 ft + 8 ft =21,900 k ft
Eccentricites and Torsion, V = 264 k

Inherent + Inherent
Inherent Accidental Torsion + Torsion
Accidental Accidental
(ft) (ft) (ft) (ft) (k ft) (k ft)
x 75 8 83 67 21900 17700
y 13.3 4 17.3 9.3 4570 2460
72 74
CM and J= K x d y2 + K y d x2
K
Equivalent
CR Direct shear = Story force
K Lateral
Kd
Torsional shear = Torsional moment
J Force
Example
20
264 k = 255 k
20.7
-100 ft
21900 k ft = -21.5 k
102,000 ft 2
3rd Floor to Roof Level Distribution, V = 264 k

Kxdy or 2 2 Torsional
Kx Ky dx dy Kx *dy Ky*dx Direct Shear Total Shear
Wall / Frame Kydx Shear
2 2
(ft) (ft) (ft) (ft ) (ft ) (k) (k) (k)
Line A 0 20 5.02 43.3 100 0 504 255 21.5 255
Line I 0 0.65 155 13.3 101 0 15600 8.29 21.7 30
Line 1 1 20 0 25 26.7 534 14300 0 0 115 115
Line 1 2 20 0 125 26.7 534 14300 0 0 115 115
Line 5 20 0 4.98 53.3 1070 56800 0 0 230 230
J 102000 263
73 75
Equivalent
Lateral
Include torsional shear only if it Force
increases total shear
Example
Definitions
3rd Floor to Roof Level Distribution, V = 264 k
Kxdy or 2 2 Torsional
Kx Ky dx dy Kx *dy Ky*dx Direct Shear Total Shear
Wall / Frame Kydx Shear
2 2
(ft) (ft) (ft) (ft ) (ft ) (k) (k) (k)
Line A 0 20 5.02 43.3 100 0 504 255 21.5 255
Line I 0 0.65 155 13.3 101 0 15600 8.29 21.7 30
Line 1 1 20 0 25 26.7 534 14300 0 0 115 115
Line 1 2 20 0 125 26.7 534 14300 0 0 115 115
Line 5 20 0 4.98 53.3 1070 56800 0 0 230 230
J 102000 263
76 78
MWFRS
ASCE 7 05 Chapter 6 Main wind force resisting system (MWFRS)
- An assemblage of structural elements
Wind Loads assigned to provide support and
(IBC Section 1609.1.1 stability for the overall structure. The
system generally receives wind loading
incorporates ASCE 7 05 by from more than one surface.
reference)
77 79
Components and Cladding
Basic Wind Speed (V)
(C&C)
Three-second gust speed at 33 ft (10 m)
Components and Cladding - elements of above the ground in Exposure C as
the building envelope that do not qualify determined in accordance with
as part of the MWFRS ASCE 7-05 Section 6.5.4.
Examples – roof decking, roof trusses,
girts, steel wall panels, masonry walls
80 82
ASCE 7-05
Element Classification
Figure 6-1
Some elements may comprise MWRFS for Basic
one loading and comprise C&C for another
loading (for example, a masonry wall) Wind
Speed ( )
81 83
Simplified Procedure
Net pressure only – constant over height
Internal and external pressure are not
explicitly considered
Chapter 6 Methods Relatively simple buildings (low-rise,
rectangular, diaphragm buildings)
Enclosed buildings
Single factor ( ) to account for height
and exposure
84 86
Methods Method 2 – Low-rise

Method 1 – Simplified Procedure Internal and external pressure are
Method 2 – Analytical Procedure
Pressure evaluated at mean roof height
Low-rise buildings (h < 60 ft)
Buildings of any height Pressures are constant over the height of
all elements
Method 3 – Wind Tunnel Procedure
Uses references corners
G and Cp are not separated (GCp)
85 87
Building Limitations -
Method 2 – All Heights
MWFRS
Internal and external pressure are Simple diaphragm building
Low-rise
Pressure evaluated at mean roof height
for leeward walls, side-walls and roof Enclosed and conforms to wind-borne
Pressure varies with height on windward debris provisions
wall Regularly shaped
Uses four loading cases
G and Cp are considered separately
88 90
MWFRS
Not flexible
No response characteristics to produce
cross wind loading, vortex shedding,
Method 1 – Simplified galloping or flutter
Procedure Not located where channeling effects or
buffeting in the wake of upwind
structures
Flat roof or gable or hip roof flatter than
45 degrees
89 91
MWFRS
Exempted from torsional load cases, or
Torsional load cases do not control wind

design
Provisions for MWFRS
92 94
Building Limitations – C&C Simplified Design Pressure

ps = K zt IpS 30
Mean roof height less than 60 ft ps net of internal and external pressure
Regularly shaped K zt p = K factor

topographic
s Ip
zt S 30
I building importance factor
No response characteristics to produce pS 30 simplified wind pressure, Exposure B,
at height of 30 ft and I = 1.0
cross wind loading, vortex shedding,
factor accounting for different exposure
galloping or flutter and height conditions
Flat roof or a gable roof flatter than 45 Zones and obtained from Figure 6.2
degrees, or a hip roof flatter than 27
Minimum pressure +10 psf Zones
degrees
with 0 psf in Zones
93 95
Loads applied on the
horizontal or Figure
Adjustment Factor, vertical projection 6-2
Mean Roof Exposure
Height (ft) B C D
15 1.00 1.21 1.47
20 1.00 1.29 1.55
25 1.00 1.35 1.61
30 1.00 1.40 1.66
35 1.05 1.45 1.70
40 1.09 1.49 1.74
45 1.12 1.53 1.78
50 1.16 1.56 1.81
55 1.19 1.59 1.84
60 1.22 1.62 1.87
96 98
Loads applied on the

Figure horizontal or
6-2 vertical projection
Provisions for C&C
97 99
Method 1 – Design
Simplified Design Pressure Procedure
pnet = K zt Ipnet 30
Determine the basic wind speed ( = 90
pnet net of internal and external pressure
mph)
K zt p = Kfactor
topographic
s Ip
zt S 30
I building importance factor Determine the building importance factor
pnet 30 simplified wind pressure, Exposure B, ( = 1)
at height of 30 ft and I = 1.0
factor accounting for different exposure
Determine the exposure category ( )
and height conditions Determine the height and exposure
Zones and obtained from Figure 6.3 adjustment factor ( = 1.14)
Minimum pressure +10 psf for positive =1

pressure and -10 psf for negative pressure
100 102
Basic
Wind
Speed
Method 1 – Example – Building

2
101 103
Figure 6-2
A B C D E F G H
12.8 6.7 8.5 4.0 15.4 8.8 10.7 6.8
MWFRS
104 106
Figure 6-2 Adjustment Factor,

Mean Roof Exposure
Height (ft) B C D
15 1.00 1.21 1.47
20 1.00 1.29 1.55
25 1.00 1.35 1.61
30 1.00 1.40 1.66
=
35 1.05 1.45 1.70
40 1.09 1.49 1.74
45 1.12 1.53 1.78
50 1.16 1.56 1.81
55 1.19 1.59 1.84
60 1.22 1.62 1.87
105 107
Design Pressures - MWFRS
Design Pressures - MWFRS
Design Pressure ps = K zt IpS 30
pS30 ps
Zone
(psf) (psf) = 1.14
A 12.8 14.6
K zt = 1
B 6.7 7.64
C 8.5 9.69 I =1
D 4.0 4.56
E 15.4 17.6
F 8.8 10.0
G 10.7 12.2
H 6.8 7.75
108 110
Minimum Design Pressures

Calculation of ‘ ’
- MWFRS
10% of least horizontal dimension =
0.10 80 ft = 8 ft
0.4h = 0.4 48 ft = 19.2 ft
but not less than
4% of least horizontal dimension =
0.04 80 ft = 3.2 ft
3 ft
\ a = 8 ft
109 111
ASCE 7-05
Figure
6-3
Flat roof
Zone legend
C&C
Interior zones –
Roofs – Zone 1
Walls Zone 4
112 114
Building 2 –
ASCE 7-05 Figure 6-3
Roof Plan
113 115
Effective Wind Area Effective Wind Area –
Roof Deck
“The area used to determine . For
component and cladding elements, the Span = 10 ft
effective wind area in Figs. 6-11 through 6- 10 ft
17 and Fig. 6-19 is the span length Width = = 3.33 ft
3
multiplied by an effective width that need
Effective wind area = 10 ft 3.33 ft = 33.3 ft 2
not be less than one-third the span length.
For cladding fasteners, the effective wind
area shall not be greater than the area
that is tributary to an individual fastener.”
116 118
Effective Wind Area – Effective Wind Area -

Roof Joists Walls
Roof joists span the 80 ft dimension
Assume wall clading spans between floors = 16 ft
and are spaced at 10 ft
Span = 16 ft
Tributary area, interior joist = 10 ft 80 ft = 800 ft 2
16 ft
Span = 80 ft Width for effective wind area calculation = = 5.33 ft
3
Effective width = tributary width = 10 ft
Effective wind area = 16 ft 5.33 = 85.3 ft 2
80 ft
but need not be less than = 26.7 ft
3
Use 26.7 ft
Effective wind area = 80 ft 26.7 ft = 2136 ft 2
117 119
Figure 6-3 – Roof Joists Figure 6.3 - Walls
120 122
Design Pressures – Roof

Figure 6-3 – Roof Deck
Joists
p net = K zt Ip net 30
Design Pressure I =1
pnet 30 pnet 30
pnet pnet K zt = 1
(positive (negative
Zone (positive (negative
psf) psf)
psf) psf) = 1.14
1 4.70 13.3 10 (5.36) 15.16

2 4.70 15.8 10 (5.36) 18.01
3 4.70 15.8 10 (5.36) 18.01
121 123
Design Pressures – Roof
Design Loads – Roof Joists
Deck
pnet = K zt Ipnet 30 Load Combination 1
pnet 30 pnet 30
pnet pnet K zt = 1 1.4 D = 1.4 60 psf = 84.0 psf
(positive (negative
Zone (positive (negative Exterior
psf) psf)
psf) psf)
= 1.14
84.0 psf 5 ft = 420 lb ft
1 5.38 13.98 10 (6.13) 15.94
2 5.38 20.29 10 (6.13) 23.13 Interior
3 5.38 26.78 10 (6.18) 30.53
84.0 psf 10 ft = 840 lb ft
124 126
Design Pressures – Walls Design Loads – Roof Joists

pnet = K zt Ipnet 30 Load Combination 2
1.2 D + 1.6 L + 0.5 Lr or S or R
pnet 30 pnet 30
pnet pnet K zt = 1
Zone (positive (negative
(positive (negative = 1.2 60 psf + 0.5 16 psf = 80.0 psf
psf) psf)
psf) psf)
= 1.14 Exterior
4 12.58 13.81 14.34 15.74
80.0 psf 5 ft = 400 lb ft
5 12.58 15.51 14.34 17.68
Interior
80.0 psf 10 ft = 800 lb ft
125 127
Roof Joist Zones Design Loads – Roof Joists
All but first interior
Load Combination 4
1.2 D + 0.5 Lr or S or R + 1.6W

= 1.2 60 psf + 0.5 16 psf + 1.6 10 psf
= 96.0 psf
Exterior
96.0 psf 5 ft = 480 lb ft
Interior
96.0 psf 10 ft = 960 lb ft
128 130
Design Loads – Roof Joists Design Loads – Roof Joists

Load Combination 3 Load Combination 5
1.2 D + 1.6 Lr or S or R + 0.8W

1.2 D + E + L 1.2 D
= 1.2 60 psf + 1.6 16 psf + 0.8 10 psf Load Combination 7
= 105.6 psf
Exterior 0.9 D + E + L 0.9 D
105.6 psf 5 ft = 528 lb ft
Interior
105.6 psf 10 ft = 1050 lb ft
129 131
Controlling Load – Wind
Design Loads – Roof Joists
Down
0.9 D + 1.6W Load Combination 6 LC 3 controls for downward load (includes
All interior joists other than the first interior downward wind)
joists lie in Zones 1 and 2
Zone 1 (interior zone)
0.9 60 psf + 1.6 -15.16 psf 10 ft = 297.4 lb/ft
Zone 2 (end zone)
0.9 60 psf + 1.6 -18.01 psf 10 ft = 251.8 lb/ft
Note: load acts downward due to high roof dead load.
If the dead load is 15 psf instead of 60 psf, net load
acts upward (suction).
132 134
Controlling Load – Wind Up

Design Loads – Roof Joists LC 6 controls for upward load (includes wind)
– all interior joist except first
Load Combination 6
0.9 D + 1.6W
Exterior lies in Zones 2 and 3 - negative pressure is
the same for both -18.01 psf
0.9 60 psf + 1.6 -18.01 psf 5 ft = 125.9 lb/ft
Loads are down – therefore, LC 3

133
controls for design of joists 135
Controlling Load – Wind Up
LC 6 controls for upward load (includes Bridge Design
wind) – exterior joist
Mike Wenning ,PE, F.ASCE

Phone # : 317-547-5580
Loads are down – therefore, LC 3

controls for design of joists 136
Topics
• Introduction
• Beam Flexural Design
Thank you • Fatigue
Questions? • Deflections
2
137
Basic Information Load Factors and Combinations
• STRENGTH I
• AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Load combination relating to the normal vehicular use without
wind.
– 5th Edition, 2010 • STRENGTH II
– Combination relating to the use of the bridge by special design
– 6th Edition released in Feb. 2012 vehicles and permit vehicles
• STRENGTH III
– Beware of other versions – Combination relating to the bridge exposed to wind velocity
exceeding 55 mph.
• Strengths always in ksi • STRENGTH IV
– Combination relating to very high dead to live load force effect
ratios. Typically spans > 200’.
• STRENGTH V
– Combination relating to normal vehicular use of the bridge with
wind of 55 mph velocity.
3 5
Basic Information Load Factors and Combinations

• Primary AASHTO Code Information • SERVICE I
– Combination relating to the normal operational use of the bridge
– Chapter 6 - Steel Structures with a 55 mph wind and all loads taken at their nominal values.
– Used for deflections and settlement calculations
• SERVICE II
• Outline for superstructure design steps – Load combination intended to control yielding and permanent
deformation of steel structures.
given in Appendix C6. – Design of slip critical bolted connections.
• FATIGUE
– Fatigue and fracture load combination relating to
repetitive gravitational vehicular live load and dynamic
responses under a single design truck
4 6
Load Factors and Combinations Resistance Factor
Typical Strength Design Practice per AISC Manual Given in AASHTO 6.5.4.2
“For components not traditionally governed by wind
force effects, the Strengths III and V Load
Combinations should not govern. Unless
Strengths II and IV as indicated above are needed,
for a typical multi-girder highway overpass the
Strength I Load Combination will generally be the
only combination requiring design calculations.”
7 9
Factored Force Effect Typical Sections

General Equation (3.4.1):
100’-0” 100’-0”
200’-0”
Q= i iQi � øR
i = Load Modifier per Article 1.3.2

Qi = Force Effects
i = Load Factors (Table 1 and 2)
ø = Resistance Factor 8”
R = Nominal Resistance
8 10
Typical Sections Web Geometry
Midspan Over Support
• Web Thickness
– w/o longitudinal stiffeners
– D/tw < 150 Eq. 6.10.2.1.1-1
14” x ¾” 16” x 1½”
48” x ½” 48” x ½” – With longitudinal stiffeners

– D/tw < 300 Eq. 6.10.2.1.2-1
16” x 1½” 16” x 1½”
9’-9”
11 13
Typical Sections Web Geometry

• Givens: • Web Thickness
• Fy = 50 ksi • 48”/0.5” = 96 < 150 Therefore OK
– Es = 29,000 ksi AASHTO 6.4.1
• f’c = 4 ksi
– Ec = 3,605 ksi AASHTO 5.4.2.4
• D = R = I = 1.0
• Wearing Surface = 0.5”
• Future Wearing Surface = 0.035 ksf
• Analyze w/o longitudinal stiffners
12 14
Flange Geometry Flange Geometry
• bf / 2tf < 12.0 Eq. 6.10.2.2-1 bf / 2tf = 14” / (2 * 0.75”) = 9.3 < 12.0
– Prevents the flange from distortion due to = 16” / (2 * 1.5”) = 5.3 < 12.0
welding.
bf > D/6.0
• bf > D/6.0 Eq. 6.10.2.2-2
14” > 48”/6.0 = 8”
– Flanges below this limit have less flexural and
shear resistance than equations indicate. tf > 1.1tw
• tf > 1.1tw Eq. 6.10.2.2-3 0.75” > 1.1 * 0.5” = 0.55”
– Ensures that some restraint will be provided 1.50” > 1.1 * 0.5” = 0.55”
by the flanges against web shear buckling. Therefore OK
15 17
Flange Geometry Flange Geometry

• 0.1 < Iyc / Iyt < 10 Eq. 6.10.2.2-4 • 0.1 < Iyc / Iyt < 10 Eq. 6.10.2.2-4
– Iyc = moment of inertia of compression flange – For Section over Support Iyc / Iyt = 1.0
about the vertical axis in the plane of the web. Therefore OK
– Iyt = moment of inertia of tension flange about – For Midspan Section
the vertical axis in the plane of the web. Iyc = tw * bw3 / 12 = 0.75”(14”)3 / 12 = 171.5 in4
Iyt = 1.5”(16”)3 / 12 = 512.0 in4
– A section outside this limit acts more like a tee Iyc / Iyt = 171.5 / 512.0 = 0.35
section than an I. 0.1 < 0.35 < 10 Therefore OK
16 18
Section Properties Section Properties
Compute Section Properties over Support Compute Composite Section Properties at Midspan
2 2 2 2
Member d (in) w (in) A (in ) D (in) AD AD Io I Member d (in) w (in) A (in ) D (in) AD AD Io I
Bott Flg 1.5 16 24 0.75 18 13.5 4.5 18 Bott Flg 1.5 16 24 0.75 18 13.5 4.5 18
Web 48 0.5 24 25.5 612 15606 4608 20,214 Web 48 0.5 24 25.5 612 15606 4608 20,214
Top Flg 1.5 16 24 50.25 1206 60601.5 4.5 60,606 Top Flg 0.75 14 10.5 49.875 523.6875 26118.91 0.492188 26,119
Total 72 1836 80,838 Slab 7.5 14.63 109.725 55 6034.875 331918.1 514.3359 332,432
x (AD) = (46,818) Total 168.225 7188.563 378,784
4 x (AD) = (307,180)
x = AD / A = 25.5 inch 34,020 in
4
x = AD / A = 42.73 inch 71,603 in
Effective Slab Width 9.75’ * 12 = 117” AASHTO 4.6.2.6.1

D measured from bottom of member.
x = center of gravity measured from bottom w = 117” / n = 117 / 8.0 = 14.63”
chord.
19 21
Section Properties Section Properties

Compute Noncomposite Section Properties at Compute Composite Section Properties at Midspan
Midspan Member d (in) w (in)
2
A (in ) D (in) AD AD
2
Io I
2 2
Member d (in) w (in) A (in ) D (in) AD AD Io I Bott Flg 1.5 16 24 0.75 18 13.5 4.5 18
Bott Flg 1.5 16 24 0.75 18 13.5 4.5 18 Web 48 0.5 24 25.5 612 15606 4608 20,214
Web 48 0.5 24 25.5 612 15606 4608 20,214 Top Flg 0.75 14 10.5 49.875 523.6875 26118.91 0.492188 26,119
Top Flg 0.75 14 10.5 49.875 523.6875 26118.91 0.492188 26,119 Slab 7.5 4.75 35.625 55 1959.375 107765.6 166.9922 107,933
Total 58.5 1153.688 46,351 Total 94.125 3113.063 154,284
x (AD) = (22,752) x (AD) = (102,961)
4 4
x = AD / A = 19.72115 inch 23,599 in x = AD / A = 33.07 inch 51,324 in
D measured from bottom of member. For long term dead loads use 3n per AASHTO 6.10.1.1.1b
x = center of gravity measured from bottom
w = 114” / 3n = 114 / 24.0 = 4.75”
chord.
20 22
Section Properties Loads
Noncomposite at Midspan Rails = 2 * 0.570 klf / 5 girders = 0.228 klf
Sb = 23,599 in4 / 19.72” = 1196.7 in3 Also medians, sidewalks, etc.
St = 23,599 in4 / (50.25” - 19.72”) = 773.0 in3
Composite DC = 0.228 klf
Composite at Midspan (n=8)
Sb = 71,603 in4 / 42.73” = 1675.7 in3
St = 71,603 in4 / (50.25” – 42.73”) = 9521.7 in3 FWS = 0.035 ksf * 44’ / 5 girders = 0.308 klf
Composite at Midspan (n=24) Also other future dead loads.
Sb = 51,324 in4 / 33.07” = 1552.0 in3 Composite DW = 0.305 klf
St = 51,324 in4 / (50.25” – 33.07”) = 2987.4 in3
23 25
Loads Loads
Dead Loads Live loads consist of HL-93 which is a combination
of lane load and either Truck or Tandem loading.
Deck = 9.75’ * 0.67’ * 0.150 kcf = 0.980
AASHTO 3.6.1.2
Fillet = 1.17’ * 0.08’ * 0.150 kcf = 0.014 90% of two design trucks used for negative
Beam = (16” * 1.5” + 48” * 0.5” + moments over supports.
15” * 1.13” ave)/144 * 0.490 kcf = 0.221 Loads determined by linear analysis (or influence
Misc Steel = 10% * 0.221 = 0.022 lines) which were described in Bridge Loads
session.
Noncomposite DC = 1.237 klf
This results in reactions/moments/shears per lane
depending on influence lines used.
24 26
Loads Live Load Distribution
Check the range of applicability
Distribution factors are then computed per
AASHTO 4.6.2.2. 3.5 ≤ S ≤ 16.0
S = 9.75 ft OK
4.5 ≤ ts ≤ 12.0
We will compute factors at Midspan. ts = 8.0 in OK
20 ≤ L ≤ 240
L = 100 ft OK
Nb 4
Nb = 5 OK
10,000 ≤ Kg ≤ 7,000,000
27 29

Compute Kg at Midspan
Kg = n(I + A eg2)
n= EB / ED = 29,000/3605 = 8
where:
I = moment of inertia of beam (in.4)
eg = distance between the centers of gravity of the beam
and deck (in.)
A = area of the beam (in.2)
Kg = 8(71,603 in4 + 58.5 in2 * (55.0”-42.73”)2)
= 543,300 in4 within range therefore OK
28 30
Unfactored/Undistributed
Moments
Span 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
DCnc 0 377 639 783 812 722 518 196 242 796 1467
DCcomp 0 75 126 156 161 144 193 38 39 129 238
DW 0 61 105 127 132 118 85 32 48 158 292
=0.06 + (9.75/14)0.4(9.75/100)0.3[643,300/(12(100)(8)3)]0.1 +LL+IM 0 800 1356 1683 1827 1792 1599 1234 728 271 0
LL+IM 0 107 212 319 425 531 638 744 914 1183 1910
= 0.06 + (0.87)(0.50)(1.00) = 0.50
Therefore 1 beam carries 0.50 lanes of LL All moments in ft-kips.
IM = 33% of LL for this case.
Do not convert units, already included in equations.
31 33
Strength I Moment
at 0.4 Point
LL+IM = 1.75 * 1827 * 0.64 = 2046 ft-kip
DCnon = 1.25 * (812) = 1015 ft-kip
=0.075 + (9.75/9.5)0.6(9.75/100)0.2[643,300/(12(100)(8)3)]0.1
DCcomp = 1.25 * (161) = 201 ft-kip
DW = 1.5 * 132 = 198 ft-kip
= 0.075 + (1.02)(0.63)(1.00) = 0.64
Since 0.64 greater than 0.50, 0.64 governs for design Mu = 3460 ft-kip
32 34
Check Capacity per 6.10.1.1.1 Check Capacity per 6.10.1.1.1
Check Bottom Flange
Fyt = 50ksi =1015’k * 12/ 1196.7 in3 + (201’k +
198’k) * 12 / 1552.0 in3 + MAD * 12 / 1675.7 in3
MAD = (50 ksi - 10.18 ksi - 3.09 ksi) * 1675.7 / 12

= 5129’k
My = 1015’k + 201’k + 198’k + 5129’k = 6543’k
35 37
Check Capacity per 6.10.1.1.1 Check Capacity per 6.10.1.1.1

Check Top Flange
Fyt = 50ksi =1015’k * 12/ 773.0 in3 + (201’k +
198’k) * 12 / 2987.4 in3 + MAD * 12 / 9521.7 in3
MAD = (50 ksi – 15.76 ksi - 1.60 ksi) * 9521.7 / 12

= 25,899’k
My = 1015’k + 201’k + 198’k + 25,899’k = 27,313’k
36 38
Check Capacity per 6.10.1.1.1 Plastic Moment of Inertia
6543 < 27,313 therefore use Fy = 6543’k
R= 6543’k = 1.0 * 6543’k > 3460’k
Therefore OK
39 41
Plastic Moment of Inertia Plastic Moment of Inertia

Ps=0.85f’cbsts=0.85*4*114”*7.5” = 2907k
Pc= Fycbctc = 50*14”*0.75” = 525k
Pw= Fywbwtw = 50*0.5”*48” = 1200k
Pt= Fytbttt = 50*16”*1.5” = 1200k
Ignore reinforcing and fillet, conservative
Ps + Pc > Pw + Pt Y = (0.75/2)[(1200 + 1200 -2907)/525 + 1] = 0.01”
MP = (525/2*0.75)[0.01”2 + (0.75”-0.01”)2] +
PNA in top flange 2907k * (.01” + 7.5”/2) + 1200k * (0.74” + 48”/2) +
1200k * (0.74”+48”+1.5”/2) = 100,198/12 = 8350 ft-kip
40 42
Check for Compact Section Check for Compact Section
Fyf = 50 ksi < 70 ksi AASHTO 6.10.6.2.2
43 45
Check for Compact Section Check for Compact Section

6.10.2.1.1 checked on slide 14.
Check Dp < 0.1Dt 6.10.7.1.2
In positive moment area PNA in top flange,
therefore Dcp = 0 and eq. 6.10.6.2.2-1 satisfied.
Check web at int. support per eq. 6.10.6.2.3-1.

Symmetric Section. Dp = 7.5” + 0.01” = 7.51”
Dcp = 48”/2 = 24” Dt = 1.5” + 48” + 0.75” + 1” + 7.5” = 58.75”
2 * 24” /0.5” = 96 0.1 * 58.75” = 5.87” < 7.51”
5.7 * sqrt(29,000 ksi / 50 ksi) = 137” Therefore…
Therefore neg. moment section is also compact.
44 46
Check for Compact Section Steel Fatigue
• Similar to AISC Code
• Number of Cycles by calculation
Mn = 8350’k (1.07 – 0.7 * 7.51” / 58.75”) = 8187’k
• Illustrative Examples Figure 6.6.1.2.3-1
• Fatigue Category from Table 6.6.1.2.3-1
Since there’s no lateral bending for the straight
girders, the left side of equation 6.10.7.1.1-1 • Allowable Fatigue Thresholds Table
simplifies to only the maximum moment. 6.6.1.2.5-3
8187’k > 3460’k therefore OK

47 49
Chapter 6 Appendices Steel Fatigue

• App. A & B – Alternate design methods to • 3.6.1.4 Fatigue Load
increase allowable capacity. – Special Fatigue Truck is one design truck with
a constant spacing of 30.0 ft. between the
• App. C – Quick Reference Outline of Basic 32.0-kip axles with IM = 15%.
Steel Superstructure Steps w/ Code Refs. – No lane component
– Includes Flow Charts
• App. D – Fundamental Calculations

– Includes Plastic Moment
14’ 30’
48 50
Steel Fatigue Steel Fatigue
The frequency of the fatigue load shall be taken as the
single-lane average daily truck traffic (ADTTSL). This
frequency shall be applied to all components of the
bridge.
In the absence of better information, the single-lane
average daily truck traffic shall be taken as:
ADTTSL = p × ADTT (3.6.1.4.2-1)
where:
ADTT = the number of trucks per day in one direction
averaged over the design life
51 53
NAcomp
ff = Mr*c/I
Mr = moment range
c = dist from NA
to point considered
52 54
FIGURE 6.6.1.2.3-1 Illustrative Examples
Nominal Fatigue Resistance (6.6.1.2.5)
( F)n = (A/N)1/3
N = (365)(75)n(ADTT)SL
where:
A = constant taken from Table 1 (ksi3)
n = number of stress range cycles per truck
passage taken from Table 2
(ADTT)SL= single-lane ADTT as specified in
Article 3.6.1.4
( F)TH = constant-amplitude fatigue threshold
taken from Table 3 (ksi)
55 57

From FIGURE 6.6.1.2.3-1 Detail
Categories
56 58
Steel Fatigue Solution 1
(ADTT)SL= 0.85 * 1500 = 1275 vpd
N = (365)(75)(1.0)(1275) = 34.9 x 106
( F)n = (A/N)1/3
= (44.0 x 108 / 34.9 x 106)1/3
= 5.01 ksi
Therefore use 5.0 ksi allowable
59 61
Problem 1 Problem No 2
Find the Nominal Fatigue Resistance for a Design Data:
gusset plate welded to a 120’ simple span Ic = 12,215 in4
Cb = 26.15”
girder web.
MDL = -93 ft-kip NAcomp
ADTT = 1500 vpd MLL+IM = 307 ft-kip

MLL+IM = -149 ft-kip
2 lanes available to trucks
What is the critical fatigue stress at the end of the gusset
plate?
(A) 7.63 ksi (C) 4.27 ksi
(B) 6.34 ksi (D) 4.41 ksi
60 62
Solution 2 Splice Design
Problem No 6 Assume:
Noncomposite design
(B) Moment Range = 307 - -149 = 456 ft-k Fy = 50 ksi
Resistance factor, f = 1.0
ff = Mr*c/I Strength I design
= 456 ft-k * 12”/ft * 14.15” / 12,215 in4 Compute:

The minimum factored flexural
= 6.34 ksi resistance for the splice
W36x135 W36x170
design.
63 65
Splice Design Splice Design
Span 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Strength I Moment at 0.8 Point
DCnc 0 377 639 783 812 722 518 196 242 796 1467 LL+IM = 1.75 * 914 * 0.64 = 1024 ft-kip
DCcomp 0 75 126 156 161 144 193 38 39 129 238
DW 0 61 105 127 132 118 85 32 48 158 292 DCnon = 1.25 * (242) = 303 ft-kip
+LL+IM 0 800 1356 1683 1827 1792 1599 1234 728 271 0
LL+IM 0 107 212 319 425 531 638 744 914 1183 1910 DCcomp = 1.25 * (39) = 49 ft-kip
DW = 1.5 * 48 = 72 ft-kip
Unfactored/Undistributed Moments
All moments in ft-kips.
IM = 33% of LL for this case.
Mu = 1448 ft-kip
64 66
Splice Design Deflection
AASHTO 6.13.1 •AASHTO 2.5.2.6.2
Except as specified otherwise, connections and splices for – Criteria optional except for orthotropic,
primary members shall be designed at the strength limit metal decks or 3-sided box structures.
state for not less than the larger of: – Deflection due to service live load plus
• The average of the flexural moment-induced stress, impact shall not exceed 1/800 of the
shear, or axial force due to the factored loadings at the span (1/1000 with sidewalks).
point of splice or connection and the factored flexural, – When investigating the maximum
shear, or axial resistance of the member or element at absolute deflection for straight girder
the same point, or systems, all design lanes should be
• 75 percent of the factored flexural, shear, or axial loaded, and all supporting components
resistance of the member or element. should be assumed to deflect equally;
67 69
Splice Design Deflection

Use the smaller of the two sections. • AASHTO 2.5.2.6.2
W36 x 135 has Sx = 439 in3 – For composite design, the stiffness of the
design cross-section used to determine the
Mrx = f * Fy * Sx deflection should include the entire width of
= 1.0 * 50 ksi * 439 in3 / 12 = 1829’k the roadway and the structurally continuous
portions of the railings, sidewalks, and median
Average = (1448’k + 1829’k)/2 = 1639’k barriers;
75% Mrx = 0.75 * 1829’k = 1372’k – The live load portion of Load Combination
Service I should be used, including the
dynamic load allowance, IM;
Therefore, design for 1639’k
68 70
Deflection Summary
• AASHTO 3.6.1.3.2
• LRFD provisions similar to AISC and ACI
– deflection should be taken as the larger of:
• That resulting from the design truck alone, or • Beware of other AASHTO versions.
• That resulting from 25 percent of the design truck • Statics are statics. Basic equations still
taken together with the design lane load work.
Problem 3 • Loads and Factors are specific to
A 120’ long single span bridge is computed to have AASHTO.
1.51” of deflection using all the beams acting together. • Examples available on FHWA website.
Does this meet AASHTO requirements for a bridge
carrying only traffic?
For a bridge carrying pedestrians? 71 73
Deflection
Questions???
Solution 3
Michael Wenning, PE, F.ASCE
Allowable deflection = Span / 800 [email protected]
(120’ * 12”/’) / 800 = 1.80” > 1.51 OK
With Pedestrians = Span / 1000

(120’ * 12”/’) / 1000 = 1.44” < 1.51 NG
72 74
Biography Load Combinations
• Attended U.S. Coast Guard Academy
• BSCE from Purdue University
• 31 years of bridge design
– Over 500 bridges
– Reinforced Concrete, Prestressed Concrete, Steel Beam and
Girder, Timber
– Highway, Railroad, Pedestrian
• Co-wrote INDOT’s LRFD Bridge Manual
• PE in Indiana, Ohio, Kentucky and Michigan
• Project Manager for American Structurepoint, Inc.
75 Table 3.4.1-1 77
Further Information Load Combinations

• http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/bridge/lrfd/examples.htm
– Prestressed Concrete Girder Superstructure Example
– Steel Girder Superstructure Example
– Based on 2nd Edition and Interims through 2002
• A number of sections have changed in the Code between 2002 and
2010 so be careful using this.
• http://www.aisc.org/contentNSBA.aspx?id=20244
– National Steel Bridge Alliance Steel Beam and Girder Examples
– Based on 3rd Edition and Interims through 2005
76 78
Table 3.4.1-2
Seismic Design
Terry Weigel
Phone # : 502.445.8266
Load Combinations
Contents of Presentation Load Combinations

• Load combinations Load combinations involving W or E require
• Redundancy and system special attention
overstrength factor In the context of a plane frame, wind load can act
• Seismic design category (SDC) from right to left or left to right
• Shear wall stiffness
In the context of a plane frame, earthquake load
• Diaphragms can act horizontally from right to left or left to
• Irregularities right and vertically up or down
• Drift
• Out of plane forces
2 4
• Steel end plate connections
Earthquake Load System Overstrength
E = Eh + Ev LC-5 System overstrength is the ratio of the
E = Eh - Ev LC-7 lateral forces that cause the formation of
Eh = QE a full yield mechanism in the structure to
QE horizontal earthquake effect the lateral forces that cause first yielding.
It is represented by the symbol Wo.
redundancy factor whose value depends
on lateral load resisting system, = 1 or 1.3
Ev vertical load effect = 0.2S DS D
5 7
Earthquake Load
When use of system overstrength factor is required:
E = Em = Emh + Ev LC-5
E = Em = Emh - Ev LC-7
Emh = W o QE W o ASCE 7 Table 12.2-1
Redundancy Factor
Wo system overstrength factor
Ev vertical load effect = 0.2 S DS D
6 8
Redundancy Factor Redundancy Factor
The value of the redundancy factor ( ) is taken as For structures assigned to Seismic Design
1 under any of the following conditions: Category D, E, or F, shall equal 1.3 unless
one of the following two conditions is met,
1. Structures assigned to Seismic Design whereby is permitted to be taken as 1.0.
Category B or C. a. Each story resisting more than 35 percent of
2. Drift calculation and P delta effects. the base shear in the direction of interest shall
3. Design of nonstructural components. comply with Table 12.3 3.
4. Design of nonbuilding structures that are
not similar to buildings.
9 11
Redundancy Factor Redundancy Factor

5. Design of collector elements, splices, and b. Structures that are regular in plan at all levels
their connections for which the load provided that the seismic force–resisting
combinations with overstrength factor of systems consist of at least two bays of
Section 12.4.3.2 are used. seismic force–resisting perimeter framing
6. Design of members or connections where on each side of the structure in each
orthogonal direction at each story resisting
the load combinations with overstrength of
more than 35 percent of the base shear.
Section 12.4.3.2 are required for design.
The number of bays for a shear wall shall
7. Diaphragm loads determined using Eq. be calculated as the length of shear wall
12.10 1. divided by the story height or two times
8. Structures with damping systems designed in the length of shear wall divided by the
accordance Section 18. story height for lightframed construction.
10 12
Example�Building�where� =�1
Lateral Force Resisting�� Requirement
Element
Shear Walls or Wall Removal of a shear wall or wall pier with a
Pier with a height to height to length ratio greater than 1.0 within
length ratio of greater any story, or collector connections thereto,
than 1.0 would not result in more than a 33% reduction
in story strength, nor does the resulting system
have an extreme torsional irregularity
(horizontal structural irregularity Type 1b).
Cantilever columns Loss of moment resistance at the base
connections of any single cantilever column
would not result in more than a 33% reduction
in story strength, nor does the resulting system
have an extreme torsional irregularity
(horizontal structural irregularity Type 1b).
Other No requirements
13 15

Lateral Force Resisting�� Requirement
Element
Braced frames Removal of an individual brace, or connection
thereto, would not result in more than a 33%
ASCE 7 05
reduction in story strength, nor does the
resulting system have an extreme torsional
irregularity (horizontal structural irregularity
Occupancy Category, Seismic
Moment frames
Type 1b).
Loss of moment resistance at the
Design Category and Importance
beam to column connections at both ends of a
single beam would not result in more than a
Factor
33% reduction in story strength, nor does the
resulting system have an extreme torsional
irregularity (horizontal structural irregularity Type
1b).
14 16
Occupancy and Seismic Design Occupancy Category
Category (SDC) ASCE 7-05 Table 1-1
“OCCUPANCY: The purpose for which a building Nature�of�Occupancy Occupancy�
Category
or other structure, or part thereof, is used or Buildings that represent a low hazard to human I
life in the event of failure
intended to be used.” All buildings and structures not represented in II
Occupancy Categories I, III and IV
“Seismic Design Category: A classification Buildings and other structures that represent a III
assigned to a structure based on its Occupancy substantial hazard to human life in the event of
failure.
Category and the severity of the design Buildings and other structures not included in
Occupancy Category IV containing
earthquake ground motion at the site as defined sufficient quantities of toxic or explosive
substances to be dangerous to the public if
in Section 11.4.” released.
Buildings and other structures designated as IV
essential facilities.
17 19
Importance Factor (I) Importance Factor
“IMPORTANCE FACTOR: A factor assigned to ASCE 7-05 Table 11.5-1

each structure according to its Occupancy Occupancy�Category I
I or II 1
Category as prescribed in Section 11.5.1.” III 1.25
IV 1.5
18 20
Seismic Design Category
Occupancy Category
Value of SDS
I or II III IV
SDS < 0.167
0.167 <= SDS < 0.33
A
B
A
B
A
C
Shear Wall Stiffness
0.33 <= SDS < 0.50 C C D
0.50 <= SDS D D D
21 23
Seismic Design Category Webinar

Building 2
Occupancy Category
Value of SD1
I or II III IV
SD1 < 0.067 A A A
0.067 <= SDS < 0.133 B B C
0.133 <= SDS < 0.20 C C D
0.20 <= SDS D D D
22 24
Shear Wall Stiffness Shear Wall Stiffness
The stiffness of a cantilever shear wall is given by: The relative stiffness at the roof
Et level, just below the 3’-4” parapet
K=
h
3
h is:
4 +3 h = 14.0 ft + 3 9.333 ft = 42 ft
l l l = 29 ft
l length of the wall in the direction being considered 1
h height of the wall at the level being considered K= 3
= 0.0607
42 ft 42 ft
4 +3
E modulus of elasticity 29 ft 29 ft
t wall thickness Because the values are
The definition of stiffness here is the force required to relative, they may be
deflect the wall a unit distance at the level h. The first adjusted to any set of
Level Relative Stiffness values that might be more
term in the expression in the denominator is related to the
Second 0.5268 8.865 convenient with which to
flexural rigidity of the wall and the second term is related Third 0.2224 3.667
to its shear rigidity. work, as has been done in
Fourth 0.1010 1.813 the last column of the
Roof 0.0607 1
table.
Shear Wall Stiffness

For walls having the same modulus and thickness, a relative
value is usually sufficient:
1
K= 3
h h
4 +3
Lateral Load Analysis

l l
28
Methods of Lateral Load Analysis Flexible vs Rigid Diaphragms
• Equivalent lateral force procedure – ASCE 7 05
Section 12.8 • Flexible diaphragms – wood or steel decks
without concrete – load distributed to lateral
• Modal response spectrum analysis ASCE 7 05
load resisting elements in proportion to
Section 12.9
tributary area – diaphragm does not transfer
• Seismic response history – ASCE 7 05 Chapter torsion
16
• Rigid diaphragms – concrete slabs – load
• Simplified alternate structural design for distributed to lateral load resisting elements in
simple bearing wall or building frame systems proportion to relative stiffness – diaphragm
ASCE 7 05 Section 12.14 (not in some will transfer torsion
jurisdictions)
29 31
Flexible Diaphragm
Diaphragms
30 32
Diaphragms – ASCE 7 05 Section
Flexible Diaphragm
12.10
• Design for both bending and shear resulting
from design forces
• At discontinuities (eg, openings, reentrant
corners), diaphragm must be capable of
dissipation or transfer of edge (chord) forces,
as well as other applicable forces
• Diaphragm forces to be resisted are those
indicated by the design, but not less than . . .
33 35
Diaphragms – ASCE 7 05 Equation

Rigid Diaphragm
12.10 1
n
Fi
Fpx = i =x
n
wpx
wi
i=x
Fpx diaphragm design force at level x

Fi design force at level i
wi weight tributary to level i
wpx weight tributary to the diaphragm at level x
34 36
Diaphragms – ASCE 7 05 Equation Diaphragms – ASCE 7 05 Equation
12.10 1 12.10 1
• The diaphragm design force need not exceed • =1 for inertial forces calculated using
0.4SDSIwpx Equation 12.10 1
• The diaphragm design force can not be less • = same as structure for transfer forces
than 0.2SDSIwpx • Requirements of Section 12.3.3.4 also apply
• Transfer forces due to offsets must be added (increase in forces due to horizontal and
• Redundancy factor ( ) applies to design of vertical irregularities)
diaphragm for structures assigned to SDC D, E, • Collector elements must be provided to
F transfer forces to elements resisting those
forces
37 39
Transfer Forces Collector Elements
38 40
Diaphragms – ASCE 7 05 Equation
Diaphragm Design Force Example
12.10 1
• For structures assigned to SDC C, D, E or F, For Webinar Building 2, determine the
collector elements, splices and connections to minimum force to be used for design of the
resisting elements must be designed to resist diaphragm on the third floor. Investigate load
load effects indicated by load combinations combination 5 and assign the building
to SDC D.
using the system overstrength factor
41 43
Webinar
Building 2
42 44
Diaphragm Design Force Example Diaphragm Design Force Example
Fp3 0.4SDS Iwp3 = 0.4 1.0 1.0 1240 k
LC 5
= 496 k; 322.8 k < 496 k Ok
E = QE
Fp3 0.2SDS Iwp3 = 0.2 1.0 1.0 1240 k
= 1 inertial force
= 248 k; 322.8 k > 248 k Ok
Loads assigned to roof and 3rd floor are 264 k
Fp3 = 322.8 k > 269 k \ Design force = 322.8 k
and 269 k, respectively
QE = 1 269.1 k + 264.6 k = 533.7 k Note: if this building has a torsional or an
extreme torsional irregularity, forces have
to be increase by 25%.
45 47

r
Fi
Fp3 = i =3
r
wp3
wi
i =3
wp3 = 90 psf 160 ft 80 ft + 89.6 k = 1240 k Effects of Irregularities

r
wi = 60 psf + 90 psf 160 ft 80 ft + 89.6 k + 44.8 k
i =3
= 2050 k
533.7 k
Fp3 = 1240 k = 322.8 k
2050 k
46 48
Horizontal Structural Irregularity Horizontal Structural Irregularity
Table 12.3 1 ASCE 7 05 Table 12.3 1 ASCE 7 05
Type Irregularity Type and Description Type Irregularity Type and Description
1a Torsional irregularity Maximum story drift, computed
including accidental torsion, at one end of the structure 2 Reentrant Corner Irregularity Both plan projections of the
transverse to an axis is more than 1.2 times the average of the structure beyond a reentrant corner are greater than 15% of
story drifts at the two ends of the structure. Torsional the plan dimension of the structure in the given direction.
irregularity requirements apply only to structures in which the
diaphragms are rigid or semirigid. 3 Diaphragm Discontinuity Irregularity there are diaphragms
with abrupt discontinuities or variations in stiffness, including
1b Extreme Torsional irregularity Maximum story drift, computed those having cutout or open areas greater than 50% of the
including accidental torsion, at one end of the structure gross enclosed diaphragm area, or changes in effective
transverse to an axis is more than 1.4 times the average of the diaphragm stiffness of more than 50% from one story to the
story drifts at the two ends of the structure. Extreme torsional next
irregularity requirements apply only to structures in which the
diaphragms are rigid or semirigid.
49 51
Torsional Reentrant
Irregularity Corner
(H 1a or Irregularity
H 1b) (H 2)
50 52
Diaphragm Discontinuity (H 3) Out of Plane
Offset (H 4)
53 55
Non parallel
Horizontal Structural Irregularity
Shear Walls (H 5)
Table 12.3 1 ASCE 7 05
Type Irregularity Type and Description
4 Out of Plane Offsets Irregularity there are discontinuities in a

lateral force resistance path, such as out of plane offsets of the
vertical elements.
5 Nonparallel Systems Irregularity the vertical lateral force
resisting elements are not parallel to or symmetric about the
major orthogonal axes of the seismic force–resisting system.
54 56
Vertical Structural Irregularity Vertical Structural Irregularity
Table 12.3 2 ASCE 7 05 Table 12.3 2 ASCE 7 05
Type Irregularity Type and Description Type Irregularity Type and Description
1a Stiffness Soft Story Irregularity there is a story in which the 2 Weight (Mass) Irregularity the effective mass of any story is
lateral stiffness is less than 70% of that in the story above or less more than 150% of the effective mass of an adjacent story. A
than 80% of the average stiffness of the three stories above. roof that is lighter than the floor below need not be considered.
1b Stiffness Extreme Soft Story Irregularity there is a story in 3 Vertical Geometric Irregularity the horizontal dimension of the
which the lateral stiffness is less than 60% of that in the story seismic force–resisting system in any story is more than 130% of
above or less than 70% of the average stiffness of the three that in an adjacent story.
stories above.
57 59
Stiffness Soft Story Mass Irregularity (V 2)

Irregularity
(V 1a or V1b)
58 60
Vertical
Lateral Force Resisting Element In
Geometric
plane Discontinuity (V 4)
Irregularity (V 3)
61 63
Vertical Structural Irregularity

Table 12.3 2 ASCE 7 05 Weak Story Irregularity (V 5)
Type Irregularity Type and Description
4 In Plane Discontinuity in Vertical Lateral Force Resisting
Element Irregularity – an in plane offset of the lateral force
resisting elements is greater than the length of those elements
or there exists a reduction in stiffness of the resisting element in
the story below.
5a Discontinuity in Lateral Strength–Weak Story Irregularity the
story lateral strength is less than 80% of that in the story above.
The story lateral strength is the total lateral strength of all
seismic resisting elements sharing the story shear for the
direction under consideration.
5b Discontinuity in Lateral Strength–Extreme Weak Story
Irregularity story lateral strength is less than 65% of that in the
story above. The story strength is the total strength of all
seismic resisting elements sharing the story shear for the
direction under consideration. 62 64
Limitations and Additional Limitations and Additional
Requirements for Systems with Requirements for Systems with
Irregularities (ASCE 7 05 Section 12.3.3) Irregularities (ASCE 7 05 Section
12.3.3)
• Structures assigned to SDC E or F, with Type • Structures assigned to SDC D, E or F having
1b horizontal or Type 1b, 5a or 5b vertical Types 1a, 1b, 2, 3 or 4 horizontal irregularities
irregularities are not permitted or Type 4 vertical irregularity shall have design
• Structures assigned to SDC D with Type 5b forces increased by 25 percent for connection
vertical irregularity are not permitted of diaphragms to vertical elements and to
• Structures with Type 5b vertical irregularity collectors, and for connection of collectors to
shall not be over two stories or 30 ft in height vertical elements
65 67
Limitations and Additional Limitations and Additional

Requirements for Systems with Requirements for Systems with
Irregularities (ASCE 7 05 Section Irregularities (ASCE 7 05 Section
12.3.3) 12.3.3)
• Columns, beams, trusses or slabs supporting • In structures assigned to SDC D, E or F having
discontinuous walls or frames of structures Types 1a, 1b, 2, 3 or 4 horizontal irregularities
having Type 4 horizontal or Type 4 vertical or Type 4 vertical irregularity, collectors and
irregularity shall have design strength to resist their connections shall also be designed for
the maximumaxial force in accordance with the 25 percent force increase, unless they are
load combinations with the system designed for load effects resulting from load
overstrength factor ( o) combinations using the system overstrength
66
factor ( o) 68
Allowable Drift – Table 12.12 1
ASCE 7 05
Structure OC�I�or� OC�III OV�IV
II
Structures, other than masonry shear wall 0.025hsx 0.020hsx 0.015hsx
structures, four stories or less with
Drift interior walls, partitions, ceilings and exterior

wall systems that have been
designed to accommodate the story drifts
Masonry cantilever shear wall structures 0.010hsx 0.010hsx 0.010hsx
Other masonry shear wall structures 0.007hsx 0.007hsx 0.007hsx
All other structures 0.020hsx 0.015hsx 0.010hsx
hsx story height below level x
69 71
Drift
Cd xe
x =
I
Drift is calculated
Section 12.8.6
based on the
Drift Example
respective
displacements of
the center of
mass of the
stories.
70 72
Drift Example
Story deflections for Webinar Building 2 are
calculated using elastic analysis. The
calculated roof-level deflection is 1.07 in. and
the deflection at the third story level is 0.61 in.
Determine if the corresponding roof drift
Out of Plane Forces
complies with the limitation of the ASCE 7-05
provisions.
73 75
Drift Example Design for Out of Plane Force

Cd
x = xe
• ASCE 7 05 Section 12.11
I
Cd = 5 • Section 12.11.1 Design for Out of Plane Forces
5 1.07 in - 0.61 in • Section 12.11.2 – Anchorage of Concrete or Masonry
x = = 2.30 in
1 Walls (IBC 1604.8)
Using OC II
• Section 12.11.2.1 Minimum anchorage forces for
Drift limit at roof level = 0.020hsx =
concrete and masonry structural walls to flexible
0.020 16 ft 12 in ft = 3.84 in
diaphragms
The drift is within limits
• Section 12.11.1.2 – Additional requirements for
If the structure is designed to accomodate drift,
diaphragms in structures assigned to SDC C through F
the limit would be 0.025hsx
74 76
Design for Out of Plane Force OOP Wall Example
Section 12.11.1 Structural walls and
anchorages must be designed for a force Determine the design force acting on an eight
normal to the wall surface of: in. masonry wall, which has a weight of
approximately 70 psf of wall surface. Then
0.4 S DS I times the wall weight
determine the minimum anchor force
but not less than 0.1 times the wall weight
required to connect the wall to its supporting
floor. The wall is part of a building where it has
been determined that SDS = 1 and I = 1. The
story to story height is 12 ft and the wall will
be anchored horizontally to the floors at 6 ft
77
intervals. 79
Design for Out of Plane Force OOP Wall Example

12.11.2 Anchorage of concrete or masonry structural
walls – design for at least: Determine the design wall pressure:
1) Anchorage force determined when the force
from Section 12.11.1 is applied to the wall 0.4SDS IW = 0.4 1 1 70 psf = 28 psf controls
2) 400SDSI lb/ft 0.1 70 psf = 7 psf
3) 280 lb/ft
4) Wall must be designed resist bending between
The wall must be designed for an out of
anchors when anchor spacing exceeds 4 ft plane pressure of 28 psf.
78 80
OOP Wall Example Seismic Steel Design References
Determine the load on an anchor:
1. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings,
28 psf 12 ft = 336 lb/ft ANSI/AISC 360 05, AISC, Chicago, Il.
400 S DS I = 400 1 1 = 400 lb/ft controls
280 lb/ft 2. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings,
ANSI/AISC 341 05, AISC, Chicago, Il.
400 lb/ft 6 ft = 2400 lb anchor force
3.Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate

Because anchors are spaced at a Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications,
distance greater than four feet, the ANSI/AISC 358 05, AISC, Chicago, Il.
wall must be designed to resist
bending between the anchors (not
done in this example)
81 83
Extended Moment End Plate

Example
25-ft-long W21x68 beams are to be
connected to a W14x145 exterior column
Seismic Design of Extended End using an extended end plate connections.
From the ASCE 7-05 load combinations the
Plate Connections critical moment and shear are 350 k-ft (Mu)
45 k, respectively. The gravity load shear
determined from the load combination 1.2D +
L + 0.2S is 25 k. The required axial strength
of the column is Pu = 600 k.
82 84
Extended Moment End Plate Differences Between Seismic and
Example Non seismic Design
The connection will be used in a seismic 7. For non seismic applications, design is
application (R = 8 - SMF). All steel is ASTM required only for the moment resulting
A992. ASTM A325-N fully tensioned bolts from load combinations (Mu = 350 k ft)
are to be used and welds will be made with 8. For seismic design, the design must be
E70 electrodes. for the full nominal flexural strength of
the beam (Mu not used)
9. More stringent compactness required
must be met
85 87
Differences Between Seismic and Beam Requirements for Four Bolt

Non seismic Design Extended End Plate Connections
ANSI/AISC 358 05
1. Additional references must be followed
Four Bolt Unstiffened Four Bolt Stiffened
2. Fully tightened bolts must be used
3. Because of possible moment reversal, Parameter Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum
(in) (in) (in) (in)
the same number of bolts must be used d 55 25 24 13 3/4
top and bottom tbf 3/4 3/8 3/4 3/8
4. In certain areas CJP welds are required bbf 9 1/4 6 9 6
5. No W section is prequalified for a four For unstiffened connections: very heavy W24 sections qualify
bolt unstiffened connection to meet depth requirement but have flanges that are too
wide. Reasonable weight W27 sections qualify to meet depth
6. A four bolt stiffened connection must be requirement but all have flanges that are too wide. W21x68
used can be used in a stiffened connection
86 88
Four Bolt Stiffened Extended End Section and Material Properties
Plate
Connection Column data
Beam data Ac = 42.7 in 2 Material data
d b = 21.1 in d c = 14.8 in Fy ,b ,c = 50 ksi
t wb = 0.430 in t wc = 0.680 in Fu ,b ,c = 65 ksi
b fb = 8.27 in b fc = 15.5 in Fy , pl = 50 ksi
t fb = 0.685 in t fc = 1.09 in Fu , pl = 65 ksi
kb = 1.19 in kc = 1.69 in
1 h tw = 16.8 in Bolt data
Workable gage = 5- in c
2 1 Ft = 90 ksi
Z xb = 160 in 3 Workable gage = 5- in
2
Z xc = 260 in 3
89 91
Steel Moment Resisting Frames Beam / Column / Connection

ASCE 7 05 Limitations
Note: the symbol is used to represent both beam depth
and bolt diameter. The meaning of the symbol applies
System R Cd Comment should be clear from the context.
o
Ordinary Steel Moment 3.5 3 3 Minimum level of

Frame (OMF) ductility in SDC D
or higher Sections 6.3 to 6.6 AISC 358-05
Intermediate Steel Moment 4.5 4 3 Design may be 13.75 < db = 21.1 < 24
Frame (IMF) governed by drift 3 8 < t fb = 0.685 < 3 4
Special Steel Moment Frame 8 5 1/2 3 Design may be
(SMF) governed by drift 6 < b fb = 8.27 < 9
Lb db 7 SMF ; 25 in 12 in ft 21.1 in = 14.2
dc d b ; 14.7 in < 21.1 in
90 92
Beam / Column / Connection Beam / Column / Connection
Limitations Limitations
Table I-8-1 - AISC 341-05 E 29000
1.49 = 1.49 = 35.9
Ustiffened elements Fy 50
b fb 2t fb = 8.27 in 2 0.685 in = 6.04 < = 0.3 E Fy E 29000
ps
1.12 2.33 - Ca = 1.12 2.33 - 0.313 = 54.5 > 35.9
= 0.3 29000 ksi 50 ksi = 7.23 Ok Fy 50
b fc 2t fc = 15.5 in 2 1.09 in = 7.11 < 0.3 E Fy = 7.23 Ok ps = 54.5 > 16.8 Ok
Stiffened elements
hb = db - 2kb = 21.1 in - 2 1.19 in = 18.7 in
hb twb = 18.7 in 0.430 in = 43.4 < ps = 2.45 E Fy = 59.0 Ok
93 95
Beam / Column / Connection Beam / Column / Connection

Limitations Limitations
Section 9.6 - AISC 341-05
M *pc
Table I-8-1 - AISC 341-05 > 1.0
M *pb
P
Ca = u
b Py
M *pc = Z c Fyc - Puc Ac
b Py = 0.9 Fy Ac = 0.9 50 ksi 42.7 in 2 = 1920 k = 2 260 in 3 50 ksi - 600 k 42.7 in 2 = 18, 700 in k
Pu 600 k M *pb = 1.1Ry Fyb Z b + M uv
Ca = = = 0.313 > 0.125
b Py 1920 k
= 1.1 1.1 50 ksi 160 in 3 + 97.4 k 10.6 in
hc = d c - 2kc = 14.8 in - 2 1.69 in = 11.4 in
= 10, 700 in k
hc twc = 11.4 in 0.680 in = 16.8 *
M 18,700 in k
= = 1.75 Ok
pc
E E *
ps = 1.12 2.33 - Ca 1.49 M pb 10.700 in k
Fy Fy
94 96
Connection Design Moment
Section 6.10 AISC 358-05
M f = M pe + Vu S h
Vu = 2M pe L' + Vgravity
Fy + Fu 50 ksi + 65 ksi
Beam Side C pr =
2 Fy
1.2 =
2 50 ksi
= 1.15 1.2
M pe = C pr Ry Fy Z xb = 1.15 1.1 50 ksi 160 in 3 = 10,120 k in

= 843 k ft
Location of plastic hinge
S h = min db 2,3b fb = min 21.1 in 2,3 8.27 in = 10.6 in
L' = 12 in ft 25 ft - 2 10.6 in = 279 in = 23.3 ft
97 99
Beam Plastic Hinge Location Connection Design Moment

Vgravity taken from 1.2 D + L + 0.2 S = 25 k
Required shear resistance
2M pe 2 843 k ft
Vu = '
+ Vgravity = + 25 k = 97.4 k
L 23.3 ft
M f = M pe + Vu Sh
M f = 10,120 k in + 97.4 k 10.6 in = 11,150 k in = 929 k ft
Versus from 892 k ft AISC 341-05 - difference in strain
hardening factor 1.1 (AISC 341-05) versus C pr (AISC 358-05)
98 100
Geometric Design Data Select Bolt Diameter
bp = b fb + 1 in = 8.27 in + 1 in = 9.27 in; Use bp = 9.25 in
g = 5.5 in Required bolt diameter
p fi = 2 in M f = 11,150 k in
p fo = 2 in
2M f 2 11,150 k in
5 db ,reqd = =
d e = 1 in n Ft h0 + h1 0.90 90 ksi 22.8 in + 18.1 in
8
= 1.46 in
t fb 0.685 in
h0 = db + p fo - = 21.1 in + 2 in - = 22.8 in Try db = 1 - 1/ 2 in
2 2
t fb 0.685 in Minimum p f = 1 + 3 4 = 1.75 in < 2 in Ok
h1 = db - t fb - p fi - = 21.1 in - 0.685 in - 2 in - = 18.1 in
2 2
101 103
Select End Plate Thickness

Geometric Design Data End plate yield line mechanism parameter
1 1
s= bp g = 9.25 in 5.5 in = 3.57 in > p fi = 2.0
2 2
If p fi > s, use p fi = s
\ Use p fi = 2.0
Case 1 - d e = 1 - 5 8 in < s = 3.57 in
bp 1 1 1 1
Yp = h1 + + h0 + +
2 p fi s 2 s p fo
2
h1 p fi + s + h0 d e + p fo =
g
9.25 in 1 1 1 1
18.1 in + + 22.8 in + +
2 2 in 3.57 in 3.57 in 2 2 in
2
18.1 in 2 in + 3.57 in + 22.8 in 1.625 in + 3.57 in = 200.9
102 5.5 in 104
AISC 358 05 Shear
Areas
107
Select End Plate Thickness Flexure Check End

Required end plate thickness
Plate
t p ,reqd =
1.11M f Thickness –
d Fy , plYp
Shear
1.11 11,150 k in
= = 1.11 in
1 50 ksi 200.9 Factored beam flange force
1 Mf 11,150 k in
Try t p = 1 - in Ffu = = = 546 k
4 d b - t fb 21.1 in - 0.685 in
Shear yielding in the extended part of the end plate
d Rn = d 0.6 Fy , pl b pt p
= 1 0.6 50 ksi 9.25 in 1.25 in = 346.9 k
Ffu
= 273 k < 346.9 k Ok
106 2 108
Check End Plate Thickness Shear Stiffener Design
Shear rupture in the extended part of the end plate

1 Section 6.10 AISC 358-05
An = bp - 2 db + t p = 9.25 - 2 1.5 in + 0.125 in 1.25 in 1
8 -in stiffener, Fy = 50 ksi
2
= 7.5 in 2
hst 6.28 in E
Rn = 0.90 0.6 Fu , pl An = 0.90 0.6 65 ksi 7.5 in 2 = 263.3 k = = 12.56 0.56 = 13.49
n ts 0.5 in Fys
Ffu
= 273 k < 263.3 k Ok
2
1
Use t p = 1 - in
4
109 111
Stiffener Design Compression Bolt Shear Rupture

Section 6.9.4 AISC 358-05 Capacity
Fyb 50 ksi
ts ,min = twb = 0.430 in = 0.430 in
Fyc 50 ksi
Vu = 97.4 k
7 1
Use " or " 1.5 in
2
16 2 Rn = n Fv Ab = 0.90 4 48 ksi = 305 k
n n b
hst = 3.625 in 4
Lst =
hst
=
3.625 in
= 6.28 in 97.4 k < 305 k Ok
tan 30 tan 30
Use 6.5 in
Recompute Sh
S h = Lst + t p = 6.5 in + 1.25 in = 7.75 in
versus 10.6 in used previously
110 112
Bolt Bearing
Bolt Bearing / Tearout Capacity in
/ Tearout Endplate
Tearout - outer bolts
Lc = p fo + t fb + p fi - d b + 1 8 in
= 2.0 in + 0.685 in + 2.0 in - 1.5 in + 1 8 in = 3.06 in
Rn ,outer = 1.2 Lct p Fu , pl = 1.2 3.06 in 1.25 in 65 ksi = 298 k
293 k < 298 k
Rn ,outer = 293 k
Tearout - inner bolts
Lc is very long \ bearing controls
Rn ,inner = 293 k
ni + no n Rn = 4 0.9 293 k = 1050 k > 97.4 k Ok
113 115
Bolt Bearing / Tearout Capacity in Bolt Bearing / Tearout Capacity in

Endplate Column
n Rn = ni Rn inner
+ no Rn outer t fc = 1.09 in
ni = no = 2 Nominal bolt bearing strength - one bolt
Rn = 1.2 Lc t p Fu , pl 2.4dbt p Fu , pl 2.4dbt fc Fu ,c = 2.4 1.5 in 1.09 in 65 ksi = 255.1k bolt
1.2 Lc t p Fu , pl tearout strength Tearout not possible for outer bolts - bearing controls
2.4dbt p Fu , pl bearing strength Tearout possible for inner bolts
Nominal bolt bearing strength - one bolt Rn ,inner = 1.2 Lc t fc Fu ,c = 1.2 3.06 in 1.09 in 65 ksi = 260.2 k
2.4dbt p Fu , pl = 2.4 1.5 in 1.25 in 65 ksi = 293 k bolt Bearing controls for inner bolts
ni + no n Rn = 4 0.9 255.1 k = 918.4 k > 97.4 k Ok
114 116
Flexural Yielding in Column Flange
1 1
s= b fc g = 15.5 in 5.5 in = 4.62 in
2 2
Try an unstiffened column
c = p fo + t fb + p fi = 2 in + 0.685 in + 2 in = 4.69 in
b fc 1 1
Column Side Yc =
2
h1
s
+ h0
s
+
2 3c c c2 g
h1 s + + h0 s + + +
g 4 4 2 2
117 119
Flexural Yielding in Column Flange Flexural Yielding in Column Flange

15.5 in 1 1
Yc = 18.1 in + 22.8 in +
2 4.62 in 4.62 in
3 4.69 in
18.1 in 4.62 in + +
2 4 5.5 in
2
+ = 177
5.5 in 4.69 in 4.62 in 2
22.8 in 4.62 in + +
4 2
ASCE 358-05
118 120
Flexural Yielding in Column Flange Concentrated Force
on
1.11M f 1.11 11,150 k in
t fc ,reqd =
d FycYc
=
1 50 ksi 177
= 1.18 in
Column
1.18 in > 1.09 in - Stiffeners are required
Strength of unstiffened column flange
Flange
d M cf = d FycYct 2fc
2
d M cf = 1 50 ksi 177 1.09 in = 10,500 k in
M cf 10,500 k in
Rn = = = 514 k
d
21.1 in - 0.685 in
d
db - t fb
546 k - 514 k = 34.0 k tension
121 123
Flexural Yielding in Column Flange Column Local Web Yielding

For stiffened column
Assume pso = p fo and psi = p fi
Assume connection not at top of column Ct = 1
b fc 1 1 1 1
Yc = h1 + + h0 + + d Rn = d Ct 6kc + 2t p + tbf Fyc t wc
2 s psi s pso
d Rn = 1 1 6 1.69 in + 2 1.25 in + 0.685 in 50 ksi 0.680 in
2
h1 s + psi + h0 s + pso =
g = 453 k < F fu = 546 k
15.5 in 1 1 1 1 Stiffeners are required
18.1 in + + 22.8 in + +
2 4.62 in 2 in 4.62 in 2 in 546 k - 453 k = 93.0 k compression
2
18.1 in 4.62 in + 2 in + 22.8 in 4.62 in + 2 in = 326
5.5 in
1.11M f 1.11 11,150 k in
t fc ,reqd = = = 0.871 in
d FycYc 1 50 ksi 326
0.871 in < 1.09 in Ok
122 124
Column Web Buckling Column
This check needs be made only if beams frame into
Panel
column on two sides. Zone
h
h= twc = 16.8 0.680 in = 11.4 in
tw c
3 3
24twc EFyc 0.75 24 0.680 in 29000 ksi 50 ksi
Rn = =
h 11.4 in
= 598 k > Fuf = 546 k Section 9.3 - AISC 341
Stiffeners not required Minimum panel zone thickness
d z = db - 2t fb = 21.1 in - 2 0.685 in = 19.7 in
wz = d c - 2t fc = 14.8 in - 2 1.09 in = 12.6 in
d z + wz 19.7 in + 12.6 in
t wc = 0.645 in = = 0.359 in
90 90
125 127
Column Web Crippling Column Panel Zone

3 AISC 341-05 9.3
N twc EFyc t fc
Rn = 0.80twc
2
1+ 3 AISC 360-05 J10.6
dc t fc twc
Required shear strength
2
= 0.75 0.80 0.680 in Pc = Py = Fy Ac = 50 ksi 42.7 in 2 = 2135 k; 0.4Pc = 854 k
0.685 in 0.680 in
3
29000 ksi 50 ksi 1.09 in Pr = 600 k < 0.4Pc = 854 k
1+ 3
14.8 in 1.09 in 0.680 in 2M f 2 11,150 k in
Vr = - Vus = - 0 = 1507 k > 0.4 Pc = 854 k
= 437 k > Fuf = 546 k dc 14.8 in
Stiffeners are required v Rn = v 0.6 Fy d ct wc
546 k - 437 k = 109 k compression = 0.90 0.6 50 ksi 14.8 in 0.680 in
= 272 k
Doubler plates are required
1507 k - 272 k = 1240 k
126 128
ACCORDING TO THE NCEES WEB
SITE, THE EXAM WILL USE ACI 318
08.
Thank You
Questions? THIS PRESENTATION IS BASED ON
ACI 318 08.
129
SEISMIC REGIONS
Concrete Buildings • ACI 318 08 divides seismic design categories
(SDC) A – F.
• SDC is determined by the applicable local code
(1.1.9).
Richard A. Miller, PE, FPCI
Email:[email protected] • On an exam, the SDC would need to be specified.
• From 1.1.9, relationship between ACI 318 08 and
ACI 318 05:
• Categories A and B are Low Seismic Risk
• Category C is Moderate Seismic Risk
• Categories D – F are High Seismic Risk
ANALYSIS ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES
• 21.1.2 Applies to SDC B – F • Ordinary Moment Frames (21.1)
• This covers analysis and proportioning of – Used in SDC B (C 21.2).
structural members. – Satisfy ACI 318 Chapters 1 19, and 22.
– Satisfy 21.1.1.4 8 as applicable
– General items such as materials, splices, etc.
– Satisfy 21.2
– Specific requirements for OMFs
ANCHORING TO CONCRETE INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES

• Anchors resisting earthquake forces in SDC C, • Intermediate Moment Frames (21.3)
D, E or F MUST meet D.3.3 (21.1.8) – Used in SDC C (C21.1.1)
• D.3.3 discusses required anchor strength. – Satisfy ACI 318 Chapters 1 19 and 22.
– Satisfy Chapter 21.1.1.4 8
– Satisfy Chapter 21.3 on IMFs
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES
• Special Moment Frames • Reinforcing Steel (21.1.5)
– Used in SDC D F • Must be ASTM A706 (only has a Gr 60)
– Satisfy ACI 318 Chapters 1 19 and 22. • ASTM A615 GR 40 or 60 MAY be used IF
– Satisfy Chapter 21.1.1.4 8 – Actual yield strength from mill tests < fy +18 ksi
– Satisfy Chapters 21.1.2 8 (retests cannot exceed fy + 21 ksi).
– Satisfy Chapters 21.11, 21.12 and 21.13 – AND the fy,actual / fy,nominal < 1.25.
• Transverse steel (hoops, ties, stirrups)
specified yield strength (fyt) cannot exceed 100
ksi.

• Concrete strength fc’ > 3 ksi (21.1.4) • Mechanical Splices 21.1.6.
– Type 1
• Lightweight concrete fc’ < 5 ksi unless there is
• must develop 1.25fy (12.14.3.2)
experimental evidence that structural • May not be used within a distance 2d from the face of a
members made with that lightweight concrete column or beam or from sections where yielding may
have toughness and strength equal to occur due to inelastic displacement.
structural members made of normal weight – Type 2
concrete of the same strength (21.1.4.3) • must develop 1.25fy (12.14.3.2) and must develop the
tensile strength of the bar
• May be used anywhere
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES
• Welded splices (21.1.7) • Used for resisting various lateral loads. May
– must develop 1.25fy (12.14.3.4) only be used in SDC B (C21.2).
– May not be used within a distance 2d from the • Note that Chapter 21 does not place
face of a column or beam in a special moment restrictions on Pu for beams in an ordinary
frame or from sections where yielding may occur moment frame.
due to inelastic displacement.
– However, 10.3.4 says if Pu < 0.1f’cAg, then the
• Welding of stirrups, ties, inserts, etc. to limiting value of the extreme tensile steel strain is
longitudinal steel is forbidden! et > 0.004 for NONPRESTRESSED members.
TABLE R21.1.1 ACI 318 08 ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES

Component resisting Seismic Design Category
earthquake effect unless
noted A B C DF • Flexural Members
(none) (21.1.1.4) (21.1.1.5) (21.1.1.6)
Analysis and Design 21.1.2 21.1.2 21.1.2 – Must meet Section 10.5 (minimum reinforcement
Requirements 21.1.3
Materials None None 21.1.4 to 21.1.8
3 fc’bwd/fy > 200bwd/fy).
Frame Members 21.2 21.3 21.5, 21.6, 21.7 and 21.8 – Tensile strain at Mn: et > 0.004 if Pu < 0.1fcAg if non
Str. Walls and Coupling None None 21.9 prestressed.
Beams
Precast Str. Walls None None 21.4 21.4 (if permitted),21.10 – At each section, Mu< FMn
Str. Diaphragms and Trusses None None 21.11 • No requirement on relative positive and negative
Foundations None None 21.12 moment strengths at face of joint.
Members not proportioned None None 21.13
to resist EQ forces
• No requirement relative moment strength at any
Anchors None 21.1.8 21.1.8
section as compared to joint moment strength.
Must also satisfy Ch 1-19, except as modified by Ch 21. 22.10 applies in SDC D-F
ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES
• Flexural Members (continued) IN SDC B – Ch 21.2 applies:
– Must meet structural integrity requirements of 21.2.2.Beams must have 2 continuous bars on the top
Section 7.13 IF not EQ resistant or SDC A face and on the bottom face. These bars are developed
• At least 1/6 of the tension reinforcement required for negative at the face of the support.
moment at the support (2 bars min) shall be made continuous. It
shall be spliced near midspan.
21.2.3 Columns having a clear height less than or equal
• At least ¼ of the tension reinforcement required for positive
moment at midspan (2 bars min) shall be made continuous. It shall
to 5c1 shall be designed for shear according to 21.3.3
be spliced at/near the support. (intermediate moment frames).
• Use Class B, welded or mechanical splices (12.14.3).
• Bars must be enclosed by the corners of U stirrups with 135o hooks The term c1 is the dimension of the rectangular column, or
OR closed (hoop) stirrups. Perimeter beams must have closed equivalent rectangular column, capital or bracket in the
hoops or U stirrups with 135o hooks AND hairpins. direction of analysis.
21.2 does not apply to slab/column moment frames.
ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES

• Flexural Members (continued)
– No special requirements to encase splices in hoops
unless required by CH 12 (bond/dev length/splices).
– No added restrictions on the use of lap splices.
– For shear and torsion, meet the requirements of
Chapter 11.
– FOR FLEXURAL MEMBERS SUBJECT TO STRESS
Options for perimeter beams. For the REVERSALS provide closed stirrups around the
stirrups on the right, the 90o hook is always flexural reinforcement (7.11.2 and 7.11.3)
on the slab side.
ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES Intermediate Moment Frame
• Columns (compression members) • IMF Flexural Members and Columns
– There are no special rules for columns (except as – 21.3.3 – The design shear force shall be the
previously stated for 21.2) greater of:
– Columns must meet the requirements of Ch 10. – (a)The sum of the shear associated with the
development of the nominal moment strength at
– Columns MAY be “slender” and in a non sway or the end of the member + gravity load.
sway frame. In these cases, the requirements of – (b)The maximum shear from any load combination
10.12 or 10.13 must be met. (Ch 9) containing E, when E is twice that prescribed
• Beam Column Joints by the governing code for earthquake resistant
design.
– No special requirements. Meet 11.11.2 and 7.9.
Intermediate Moment Frame Intermediate Moment Frame

• Used in SDC C
• Meet Chaper 21.1.2 for analysis and
proportioning.
• Meet Chapter 21.3
Shear requirement 21.3.3 (a) for intermediate frame

beams. Assume that each joint develops Mn and calculate
the corresponding shear, Vu. Add to the FACTORED
gravity shear. Consider sidesway in BOTH directions.
w = 1.2D + 1.0L + 0.2S (the E part is calculated, above)
• IMF Flexural Members (21.3.4.1) – Required
Relative Moment Strengths:
– At the face of a joint Mn+ > Mn( ) /3
– At every section, provide Mn+ and Mn( ) > 1/5 of
the MAXIMUM Mn (either + or ) at the face of
either joint.
Here is the same rule for columns. Ln is the clear height.
Note that this also applies to OMFs when the column does
not meet the requirement that the 5c1 > Ln.

• IMF Flexural Members
• Flexural Members
– Transverse Reinforcement (21.3.4.2)
– 21.3.2 : If Pu < 0.1Agfc’ design as beam (21.3.4); if
• Hoops are required over a length equal to 2h from the
not, design as a column (21.3.5). face of the support toward midspan on both ends.
– Typical beam requirements: • Maximum hoop spacing is d/4; 8db; 24dh or 12 in. The
• Minimum reinforcement according to Section term db is longitudinal bar diameter and dh is the hoop
10.5 (3 fc’bwd/fy > 200bwd/fy) bar diameter. First hoop within 2 inches of the face of
support.
• Tensile strain at Mn: et > 0.004 if non
prestressed.
– Does not address structural integrity
requirements so 7.11.2 and 3 assumed.
• IMF Flexural Members (con’t) • Columns (21.3.5.2 to 4)
– Transverse Reinforcement (21.3.4.3) – Transverse reinforcement (non spiral)
• Where hoops are not required, provide stirrups • Define lo as the maximum of h, b, 1/6 clear span of the
throughout the entire member. Maximum spacing d/2. column or 18 in (21.3.5.2, e g)
– This provision is not specific about the stirrup type. Probably, • Within lo , the maximum spacing of transverse
the stirrup must be a hoop or a U with seismic (135o) hooks. reinforcement, so , is the minimum of 8db, 24dh, h/2,
b/2 or 12 in. (21.3.5.2). The first hoop < so from the
joint face (21.3.5.3).
• Outside lo , the maximum spacing of transverse
reinforcement, so , as specified in 7.10 and 11.4.5.1
(normal column rules)(21.3.5.4).
Intermediate Moment Frame

lo max of h, b, lc /6 or 18 in
• Columns (21.3.5) s0 min of 8db, 24db tie, h/2, b/2 or 12 in.
– A member is considered a column (subject to axial
s = h, b 16db, 48db,tie (7.10.5.3) but
load and flexure) if Pu > 0.1Agfc’. smax = d/2 or 24 in (11.4.5.1)
– It must meet all requirements for compression First tie within s0 of face.
members given in Ch 10 (normal rules for
Splice at slab/beam (normal splice)
columns).
– Columns must have:
• spiral reinforcement meeting 7.10.4
• OR Vertical bars and ties meeting 21.3.5.2 through
21.3.5.4, as applicable.
h
Intermediate Moment Frame

b
• See 21.3.5.6 for columns supporting

discontinuous stiff members (like walls).
• See 21.3.6 for two way slabs without beams.
Bar spacing and lateral support meeting 7.10.5.3
Intermediate Moment Frame SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES

• Columns (con’t) • Excellent reference: Seismic Design of
– Joint transverse reinforcing must meet 11.10. Reinforced Concrete Special Moment Frames:
– When loads cause transfer of moment, the A Guide for Practicing Engineers (NIST GRC 8
resulting shear must be considered. 917 1) Moehle, Hooper, Lubke.
– Joint reinforcing must meet equation 11 13. • Can download PDF on line.
bw s 50bw s
Av ,min = 0.75 fc '
fyt fyt
SPECIAL SEISMIC FRAME SPECIAL SEISMIC FRAME
PHILOSOPHY PHILOSOPHY
Seismic failure of frames occurs when plastic hinges form. Now consider the case where the frame sways to one side.
There are two basic ways a building can fail: We want the “failure” to be by the formation of a plastic
The hinges form in the columns (Story Mechanism) hinge at the joint. We DO NOT want shear failure because
The hinges form in the beams (Sway Mechanism) that is brittle. Note that the capacity is the negative
probable moment on one side and the positive probable
moment on the other.

We want the
hinges to form by
yielding the
BEAMS, so ACI
21.6.2
REQUIRES:
SMnc 1.2SMnb
Note that these are the NOMINAL moment strengths of the Shear in the beam comes from two places: the gravity
beams and columns. Note that Mnb must consider “T” loads and the lateral load moment (sidesway).
beam flanges (more on that later).
It is assumed that the end moments due to lateral load To prevent a shear failure before yielding the flexural
are the maximum moments the joint can handle, so we steel, the code requires that the MINIMUM design shear
would expect them to be Mn, but they are NOT. forces due to lateral loads be based on the “probable”
flexural strength of the joints. (21.5.4.1)

PHILOSOPHY PHILOSOPHY This is why ACI
limits the yield
strength of steel
in seismic frames.
A706 specifies a
limited fy. If A615
is used, the test
yield strength is
limited to 1.25fy
Mpr = Mn with fs = 1.25fy ( 1.25Mn)

Shear is a very brittle failure and the code wants to ASSURE
the joint yields in flexure (a ductile failure) before joint fails in That is: the probable moment is calculated using
shear. In reality, the yield strength of the flexural steel is
125% of the specified yield strength! Because “a”
NOT fy, but is actually GREATER THAN fy.
changes, it’s not 1.25 Mn. Also F = 1.0
SPECIAL SEISMIC FRAME SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES –
PHILOSOPHY FLEXURAL MEMBERS
• According to NIST GRC 8 917 1 : Spans are
usually 20 30 feet.
– Allows support of gravity and lateral loads without
overloading adjacent columns or joints.
• 21.5.1.2 – The clear span, ln, of a flexural
Mpr1 + Mpr2 wu member shall not be less than 4 times the
Ve = Vss Vg = n
Ve,analysis
n 2 effective depth.
ln is the clear span (face/face support) and wu is the • 21.5.1.1 Factored axial load, Pu, may not
FACTORED gravity loads. exceed Agf’c/10 (if it does, design as a column).
w = 1.2D + 1.0L + 0.2S (note, this load combination in CH
9 includes E, but that is calculated from Mpr)
21.5.1.3 – The width of the member, bw

NOTE: shall not be less than the smaller of 10 in
or 0.3h, where h is the overall depth of
the beam.
You MUST 21.5.1.4 – The width of the member shall
consider not exceed the smaller of:
sidesway in bw + 2c2
both directions
bw + 1.5c1
and design for
c2 is the width of the supporting member
the highest and c1 is the width of the supporting
shear!!!!! member in the other direction.
21.5.1.4 is shown in the figure from ACI

318-08.
Remember, the longitudinal reinforcement at the left end could be

different from the right end!
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES –
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
• Flexural members must meet Mu< FMn at all
sections.
• At a JOINT, the positive moment capacity, Mn+
must be at least 0.5Mn( ) ; the negative
moment capacity at the joint (21.5.2.2).
• In the span, the positive or negative moment
capacity at every section must be greater than
0.25Mn,max joint; the maximum moment
capacity, positive or negative, at the joint The requirements are summarized in this figure, adapted
(21.5.2.2). from NIST GRC 8-917-1.
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES – SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES –

FLEXURAL MEMBERS FLEXURAL MEMBERS
The maximum area of steel is:
Most concrete beams have slabs on top and they
3 fc 'bw d 200bw d are designed as “T” beams. ACI 8.12 defines
0.025bw d As > or effective flange widths for these members.
fy fy
Where bw is the web width and d is the effective depth. At the joints, the slab steel goes into tension when
This equation applies equally to the positive and negative there is negative moment. The ACI code does
moment steel. AT LEAST 2 BARS MUST BE CONTINUOUS NOT say how to handle this steel in seismic
THROUGH THE JOINT. (21.5.2.1) applications!
In some design examples, the steel within the effective Note: ACI 318
flange width is used to resist moments. says hoops
over a distance
of twice the
In others, ONLY the tensile steel in the web area is
member depth.
assumed effective. Some
references use
2d some 2h!
HOWEVER, ACI 21.6.2.2 REQUIRES the steel in the
effective flange width to be considered as tensile steel Adapted
when calculating Mnb for the RELATIVE strengths of the from
beams and columns! NIST
GRC 8-
917-1.
Requirements for transverse reinforcement in beams.
Stirrups have seismic hooks and follow regular spacing
rules. Hoops confine end and splice regions.

• 21.5.4.2 When calculating Vn within the Adapted
21.5.3.1 length (2h length at each end), from
NIST
assume that Vc = 0 when BOTH of the GRC 8-
917-1.
following occur:
– Earthquake induced shear force, Ve, calculated in
accordance with 21.5.4.1 represents ½ or more of
the maximum required strength within those
lengths 21.5.2.3 – Lap splices are not permitted within joints, within
2h from the face of the joint or where analysis indicates
– Pu < Agfc’ / 20 flexural yielding caused by inelastic lateral displacements.
Lap splices MUST be enclosed by spirals or hoops spaced
at no more than the smaller of d/4 or 4 inches.
Examples of overlapping hoops meeting 21.5.3.6.
The left uses closed hoops while the right consists
of overlapping stirrups with seismic hooks and a
Where needed, here are two options for “hoops” hairpin with a seismic hook at one end and a 90
(21.5.3.6). Where hoops are not required, the degree at the other. Except in spandrels, the 90
seismic stirrup with 135o hooks are required. degree hook should be alternated.
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES COLUMNS

• ACI 318 permits columns to be designed at 0.8fPu = 0.52Pu.
NISTGCR8 917 1 suggests this may be too high as column
performance is negatively affected by high axial load. It is
suggested that the column be designed near the balance
point (compression control limit). Also, the magnitude of
shear forces which develop when the beams develop hinges is
uncertain, but these forces are transferred to the column so
keeping the column axial forces low a good idea.
Where hoops are required, longitudinal bars must have

lateral support meeting 7.10.5.3. Rules from 21.5.3.6 are
illustrated.
COLUMNS COLUMNS 21.6.2.2
• A member is considered a column (subject to axial
load and flexure) if Pu > 0.1Agfc’. (21.5.1.1)
• Must meet all requirements of Ch 10.
• Shortest cross sectional dimension > 12 in. (21.6.1.1)
• Ratio of shortest to the perpendicular dimension > Remember: Mnb MUST include any slab reinforcing in the
0.4. (21.6.1.2) effective flange width! Effective flange width in tension is
• If the beam longitudinal steel extends through the defined as the same a flange width in compression (8.10).
Ln1 + Ln2 Ln1
beam/column joint, h > 20db where h is the beff = bw +
2
For “T” For T beams
beff = bw +
2
beams with
dimension parallel to the beam and db is the Span two
with an
Span
= overhang on = bw +
diameter of the largest bar (21.7.2.3) 4 overhanging one side only 12
= bw + 16hf flanges = bw + 6hf

COLUMNS 21.6.2.2 COLUMNS 21.6.2.2
Remember, columns
have axial loads and
axial load affects
column moment
capacity.
The strength of the columns must meet:
SMnc 1.2SMnb When checking this

requirement, Mnc
Note that column and beam moments are opposite!
must account for axial
Remember that you must consider sway both ways
load!
AND Mnb must include any slab reinforcing!
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES
Using the nominal
strength
COLUMNS MEETING 21.6.2.2
interaction • Area of longitudinal reinforcement
diagram for a
column, find the
– 0.01Ag < Ast < 0.06 Ag (21.6.3.1)
range of Mn – Different from normal column when upper limit is
corresponding to 8%.
the range of Pu .
• Welded splices (21.1.7) and mechanical splices
Note that 1.25fy is (21.1.6) permitted. Lap splices may only be
NOT used for this made in middle half of column and must be
diagram!!!
designed as tension lap splices. Lap splices
are enclosed with transverse reinforcing
conforming to 21.6.4.2 and 21.6.4.3.

COLUMNS COLUMNS MEETING 21.6.2.2
• If a column joint does NOT meet 21.6.2.2 • Transverse Reinforcement (21.6.4.4a):
(previous slides), ignore the lateral strength – If spiral or circular hoops
and stiffness when determining the strength
and stiffness of the structure, but the column fc ' A f'
s = 12 0.45 g - 1 c
must meet 21.13 (members not designed as fyt Ach fyt
part of the lateral load resisting system).
fyt = yield strength of spiral/circular hoop
Ag = gross column area
Acg = area of confined core (measure out-out of
transverse reinforcement).
COLUMNS MEETING 21.6.2.2 COLUMNS MEETING 21.6.2.2
• Transverse Reinforcement (21.6.4.4b) • Transverse reinforcement (21.6.4.3)
– The total cross sectional area of rectangular hoop • Maximum spacing OVER lo is the smallest of:
reinforcement, spaced at “s”, shall not be less – Minimum member dimension/4
than:
– 6db where db longitudinal bar diameter
sbc fc ' Ag
Ash = 0.3 -1 – s0
fyt Ach
sbc fc ' 14 - hx
Ash = 0.09
fyt
4" s0 = 4 + 6"
3
Ash and bc are directional. See next slide.

• The term lo is defined as (21.6.4.1):
– The depth of the member at the joint face or
where yielding is likely to occur.
– Clear span over 6
– 18 in.
Hoop and crosstie requirements.

• Outside of lo, the ties must meet 7.10 • Determination of Design Shear Force
• Outside of lo, space the ties the minimum of – ACI 318 21.6.5.1 requires the design shear force to
– 6db be the greater of Ve , factored shear force from
analysis, or the maximum shear force that can be
– 6 in
generated by using the maximum probable
– The distance required by 21.6.3.2 (enclosing moments at each end of the member associated
mechanical or welded splices) or 21.6.5 (shear with the range of factored axial loads.
strength in columns).
– The commentary amplifies these requirements.

Column transverse steel
requirements. First hoop s1/2 from
face of joint. Mpr is
determined from
c /6
the interaction
18in
0
diagram
h1 or h2 calculated at
6d b 125%fy for the
14 - hx range of
s0 4" s0 = 4 + 6"
s1 3 FACTORED
h1 / 4 axial load.
h2 / 4
6in Or as required to enclose a
s mechanical or welded splice or
6db as req’d for shear strength.
NISTGCR8-917-1 shows 3 methods of finding
The commentary to 21.6.5.1
the shear force; the design shear force is the
suggests that this is allowable.
maximum of the 3. The first is shear from
analysis. However, according to NISTGRC8-
917-1, this column moment
distribution above and below the joint
is indeterminate.

The second is the shear THE ACCEPTED METHOD:
from assuming the Distribute the moment based on
probable moments at the column stiffness:
end of the column (from
EI
the interaction diagram).
This is a recommended Mtop =
c top
Mpr1 + + Mpr2 (- )
method because it is EI EI
+
conservative and is the NISTGCR8-917-1 c c
top bot
maximum shear the suggests this is NOT
column could see. But the conservative! EI
forces may be larger than c
Mbot = bot
Mpr1 + + Mpr2 (- )
can be reasonably EI EI
accommodated. +
c top c bot
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES JOINTS
NISTGCR8-917-1 suggests this instead:
Joint shear often
controls column size.
Mpr ,avg
Ve = Vanalysis
Mu ,avg Start by drawing the
Where Mpr,avg is the average probable moment
FBD if the column.
strength of the beams (based on 125% yield)
and Mu,avg is the average design strength. Note that the column
Vanalysis is the shear from analysis.
is cut at ½ the story
This is NOT the accepted method and I would not height on each side
use it on an exam. It is provided FYI – for real c = c1
+ c2
+ hb of the joint
design cases and/or in case you see it in a design
2 2
example.

You must consider
21.6.5.2 - The transverse reinforcement over lo moments going both ways
shall be proportioned to resist Ve with Vc = 0 when (Mpr2 (-) and Mpr1+)
both of the following are true:
(a) The earthquake induced shear force, Ve > 0.5Vu

within lo AND
(b) Pu < 0.05Agfc’
hcol 1
Vcol = Mpr( -1) + Mpr+ 2 + Ve1 + Ve 2
2 c
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES JOINTS SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES JOINTS
21.7.4.1:
If the joint is confined on all Vn = 20 fc 'A j
four faces:
If the joint is confined on 3

Vn = 15 fc 'A j
faces or 2 opposite faces:
ACI318 does not
require that Tpr1
consider tensile
reinforcement in
the slab within All other cases: Vn = 12 fc 'A j
Vj = C pr 2 + Tpr 1 - Vcol the effective
flange width, but
some design For lightweight concrete, multiply the limits above
Vj = Tpr 2 + Tpr 1 - Vcol examples
recommend it. by 0.75.

21.7.4.1:
21.7.4.1 defines the shear area of the joint, Aj. • Members that frame into a joint provide
If the beam width is not smaller that the column: Aj = (bh)col
confinement IF the framing member covers at
If the beam is smaller than least ¾ of the face of the joint.
the column, the depth of
the joint is still h. The • Extensions of beams at least h beyond the
width is the smaller of joint face may be considered as confining
hcol + bbeam OR members if the extension meets:
hcol + 2x
where x is the smallest
– bw >0.3h>10in (21.5.1.3)
distance from the face of – Have minimum flexural reinforcing (21.5.2.1)
the beam to the face of the – Required hoops (21.5.3.2, 3 and 6)
column.
21.7.3.1: 21.7.3.3:
• Transverse Reinforcement • Transverse Reinforcement
– Provide transverse hoop reinforcement, the same – Longitudinal beam reinforcement outside the
as in the lo region (21.6.4.4a or b; 21.6.4.2,3 and7) column core shall be confined by transverse steel
in the joints unless the joint is confined by passing through the column that satisfies spacing
structural members (see next slide). requirements of 21.5.3.2, and requirements of
21.5.3.3 and 6.

21.7.3.2:
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH
• Transverse Reinforcement 21.7.5.For #3 - #11 bar, the development length
– If the joint is confined by structural members on for a standard, 90o hook in tension shall not be
all 4 sides and the member width is at least ¾ of less than the largest of:
the column width, the amount of hoop reinforcing
6 in
may be reduced by ½ and the spacing may be
increased to 6 inches. This is done within h of the dh = 8db
shallowest beam. fy db
65 fc '
Hook must be confined within the confined column
core!!!! It is good detailing to make the hook go all the
way through the column.
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH DEVELOPMENT LENGTH
• If a straight bar is terminated at a joint
For #3 - #11 bar, the development length for a
standard, 90o hook in tension IN LIGHTWEIGHT – It shall pass through the confined core of the
CONCRETE shall not be less than the largest of: column or boundary element
– Any part of ld outside of the confined core shall be
increased by 1.6.
7.5 in • Epoxy coated bars or hooks shall be multiplied
dh = 10db by the epoxy bar factors in 12.2.4 (straight
1.25fy db bar) 12.5.2 (hooks)
65 fc '

DEVELOPMENT LENGTH DEVELOPMENT LENGTH
• The development length, ld, for straight bar, • Epoxy bar factor 12.2.4 (straight bar)
#3 #11: – 1.2
– If the depth of the concrete poured in a single lift – 1.5 if the cover is less than 3db or the clear spacing
below the bar is 12 inches or less, 2.5ldh from the is less than 6db
previous two slides. • Epoxy bar factor 12.5.2 (hooks)
– If the depth of the concrete poured in a single lift
– 1.2
below the bar is greater than 12 inches, 3.25ldh
from the previous two slides.
DESIGN EXAMPLE DESIGN EXAMPLE
Consider the portion of • The following slide shows the results of
a building shown. This analysis for the beam.
is a PLAN VIEW.
• The analysis was performed according to
We want to design a ASCE 7. The seismic analysis looked at:
moment frame in the – North/South earthquake with 30% East/West
N/S direction. – East/West earthquake with 30% North/South
Given: Concrete: fc’ = 6000 psi. b1 = 0.75 • Because the analysis was done in this way, we
Steel: GR 60 A706 can design the N/S frame independently of
Note, if A615 is used, it must be tested to assure the yield is not too high! the E/W.
DESIGN EXAMPLE BEAM LOADS

• The DL is 1.3 k/ft on the beam.
A note on the calculations.
• The LL is 65 psf which translates to 0.812k/ft.
The calculation in this example were done in a • Assume the slab is a one way slab (because the
spreadsheet. The results shown are rounded off length is 2 or more times the width 9.5.3.2).
to the correct number of significant digits.
• The beam is on the upper story a building.
However, the spreadsheet carries a large Analysis shows some roof live load effect, Lr ,
number of decimal places through the but it is orders of magnitude less than other
calculations. Thus, if you try to duplicate the loads, so it was ignored.
calculations you might find slight differences due
• Wind and Earthquake forces were found from
to round-off.
ASCE 7.
BEAM LOADS AT SUPPORTS
Beam Tributary Areas
For a one way slab (this example), the tributary areas are
UNFACTORED
shown: Negative Shear Negative Shear
Moment Left Moment Right
Left k ft k Right k ft k
D (Dead) 75 16.5 68.8 16
L (Live) 39.1 10 42.9 10.3
Lr (Roof) 0 0 0 0
W (Wind +) 33.6 2.7 33.8 2.7
W (Wind ) 33.8 2.7 33.6 2.7
E (Seismic) 203 15.9 194.6 15.9
E (Seismic ) 194.6 15.9 203 15.9
Must consider +/- Wind and Sesimic.
Beam Tributary Areas APPLICABLE LOAD COMBINATIONS

Two way slabs:
• 1.4D
• 1.2D + 1.6L
If this had been a
two way slab, the • 1.2D +1.6W + 0.5L
tributary areas – May use 0.5 L because LL<100 psf (9.2.1 note a)
would have Here, the
looked like this. load is • 1.2D + 1.0E + 0.5L
triangular.
• 0.9D + 1.0E
• Other load combinations do not apply or
clearly do not control.
Shaded area is the tributary area on this beam.
Note the trapezoidal shape of the load. • Must consider +/ for Seismic (E) and Wind
200
150 Assume the beam will be 14 inches x 24 inches with

the reinforcing shown:
100 Note the use of the
50 #3 double hoop
0
1.4D and hairpin. This
1.2D+1.6L
0 5 10 15 20 25 1.2D+1.6W+0.5L
is to assure
50
1.2D+1.6W( )+0.5L confinement.
100 1.2D+0.5L+E( )
1.2D+E+0.5L
150
0.9D+E
Ch 21.5.1.3:
200 0.9D+E( ) bw > 10 in
>0.3h = 7.2 in
250
300 The column will be 18 x 18,

350 so the maximum bar
Length (ft)
diameter for bars through
the joint is 18/20 = 0.9 in.
Factored load moment diagrams from analysis #7 is largest allowed.
200
150
Negative Moment
100
50
First layer is 1” (clear) + 0.375 (hoop) + 0.875”/2 (bar) =
1.81”; dt = 24-1.81 = 22.2 in
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Second Layer is 1.81” + 1.25” (clear) + 0.875” (bar) = 3.93”
50
As = 6 * 0.6in2 = 3.60in2
100
3 0.6 1.81 + 3 0.6 3.93
150 d = 24 - = 21.12in
200
3.60
As fy 3.60in2 60ksi
250
a= = = 3.02
300
0.85 fc ' b 0.85 6ksi 14in
350 a 3.02
Length (ft) c= = = 4.03in
1 0.75
c 4.03
Moment envelope. Mu (-) = 312.4k-ft; Mu + = 132.8k-ft = = 0.182 < 0.375 Tension Controlled
dt 22.2
MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM STEEL
= 0.9 Tension controlled
a
21.5.2.1
Mn = As fy d - rmax = 0.025
2
3 fc ' 200 r is defined as As/b d where
3.02 rmin = > b is the COMPRESSION
Mn = 0.9 3.60in2 60ksi 21.12 - = 3812k - in fy fy FACE width and d is the
2 200 200 effective depth from
= = 0.0033 compression face to centroid
Mn = 317.7k - ft fy 60000 of all tensile steel.
Mu = 312.4k - ft < Mn OK 3 fc ' 3 6000

= = 0.004
fy 60000
Mu is from the moment envelope shown previously. 3.60in2
The section is adequate. 0.025 > rnegative = = 0.012 > 0.004
14in 21.12in
1.80in2
0.025 > rpositive = = 0.006 > 0.004
14in 22.2in
Positive Moment NEGATIVE PROBABLE MOMENT

The probable moment is found by assuming the steel
The positive moment at the support is 132.8 k-ft.
strength is 1.25fy and taking f=1. Since this a
BUT 21.5.2.2 requires that fMn(+) be at least 0.5 fMn(-) .
Tension controlled by inspection. probable moment and phi is assigned 1, we do not
need to check tension control.
As = 3 0.6in2 = 1.8in2 As = 3.60in2
d = 24 - 1.81 = 22.2in d = 21.12in
1.8in2 60ksi
a= = 1.51in As 1.25 fy 3.60in2 1.25 60ksi
0.85 6ksi 14in a= = = 3.78in
0.85 fc ' b 0.85 6ksi 14in
1.51in
Mn = 0.9 1.8in2 60ksi 22.2in - = 2084k - in 3.78in
2 Mpr = 3.60in2 1.25 60ksi 21.12in - = 5192k - in
Mn = 173.8k - ft > Mu = 132.8 k - ft 2
OK Mpr = 432.6k - ft
Mn+ = 173.8k - ft > 0.5 Mn(-) = 158.8k - ft NOTE – You can’t just multiply Mn by
1.25 because “a” changes, so the
moment arm changes.
NEGATIVE PROBABLE MOMENT BEAM SHEAR
Remember, at the joints, the slab steel goes into tension The controlling load case is:
when there is negative moment. The ACI code does
NOT say how to handle this steel in seismic 1.2D + 0.5L + 1.0 E
applications!
In this case, we will NOT consider the slab steel in We can use 0.5L because note (a) of 9.2.1
finding the negative Mpr for beam shear. This is allows it if this is not an area of public assembly,
consistent with several design examples in text books. a garage or L > 100 psf.
However, this is not a universally applied concept.
For E, we calculate the shear from the probable
However, there are places where we will be REQUIRED
moments.
to consider the slab steel.
POSITIVE PROBABLE MOMENT BEAM SHEAR

As = 1.80in2 The controlling load case is:
d = 22.2in
Uniform Gravity Load:
As 1.25 fy 1.8in2 1.25 60ksi
a= = = 1.90in 1.2D + 0.5L = 1.2 (1.3) + 0.5(0.812) = 1.97 k/ft
0.85 fc ' b 0.85 6ksi 14 in
1.90in Left
Mpr = 1.80in2 1.25 60ksi 22.2in - = 2869k - in
2 1.2MD + 0.5ML = 1.2 (75) + 0.5(39.1) = 109.6 k-ft
Mpr = 239.0k - ft
Right
1.2MD + 0.5ML = 1.2 (68.6) + 0.5(41.9) = 103.3 k-ft
BEAM SHEAR 21.5.4.1 BEAM SHEAR 21.5.3
Maximum spacing of hoops within 2h of the face.
smax = d/4 = 21.12/4 = 5.3 in.

= 8db = 8(7/8) = 7 in. Smallest Bar
=24dh = 24(3/8) = 9 in. Hoop Bar
#3 hoop has 4 bars across the shear plane,

so Av = 4(0.11in2)=0.44in2.
Try #3 hoops at 5 inches c/c (Eq’n 11-15):
A v fy d 0.44in2 60ksi 21.12in

432.6 + 239.0 k - ft Vs = = = 112k > 69.1k
Ve = = 26.9k s 5in
25ft
BEAM SHEAR BEAM SHEAR

Vu = 24.9k + 26.9k = 51.8k Minimum shear steel (Eq’n 11-13):
NOTE: In a
1 regular beam,
Ve = 26.9k > Vu = 25.9k 21.5.4.2 critical section is bw s 14in 5in
2 d/2 from face of A v ,min = 0.75 fc ' = 0.75 6000 = 0.067in2
fyh 60000psi Controls
support. Here,
\ Vc = 0 we must use 50b w s 50 14in 5in
face of support! A v ,min = = = 0.058in2
fyh 60000psi
Vu 51.8k A v = 0.44in2 > 0.067in2 OK
Vs,required = = = 69.1k
f 0.75
So #3 @ 5in over the first 2h = 48 inches.
8 6000 14 21.12 If not true,
8 fc 'bwd = = 183k > Vs resize the
Start first hoop s/2, from face. Use 2” from face and 11
1000 section!
11.5.7.9 hoops. This takes the stirrups 52” from the face on each
side (11 hoops create 10 spaces at 5 in each).
BEAM SHEAR #7 CUTOFF
At 52 inches from the face: Can we cut off any of the #7 bars???
52in
Vu = 51.8k - 1.97k / ft = 43.3k
12in/ ft Try to cut off the lower #7 bars.
2 6000 14in 21.12in For the three remaining bars we just
Vc = 2 fc 'b wd = = 45.8k
1000 have the same section as positive
43.3 - 0.75 45.8 moment:
Vs,req = = 11.9k < 4 fc 'bw d = 92k Seismic Stirrup
0.75 This is a
d theoretical fMn = 173.8 k-ft
smax = 10in < 24in 11.5.5.1 section. Bars are
2 needed to hold
0.22in2 60ksi 21.12in #7s in place. Controlling load combination is
Vs = = 27.9k > 11.9k 1.2D+0.5L+1.0E (from M diagrams).
10in
So outside of 2h from the face, we can use Vc (21.5.4.2)
At 4 ft from face, Mu = 165.4 k-ft.
and #3 seismic stirrups with 10 inch spacing.
Beam Shear #7 CUTOFF

200
Outside of 2h* = 48 inches, use of
stirrups with seismic hooks is 150
permitted. In reality, this is 100
probably not a great detail. 50
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 1.2D+0.5L+E( )
50
Using the closed hoops and a 1.2D+E+0.5L
100 0.9D+E
hairpin, as shown, is probably a 0.9D+E( )
150
good idea as it gives you 165.4 k-ft
something to hang the bars on. 200 @ 4ft
Remember to alternate the 250
hairpin ends! 300
350
Length (ft)
* Some design examples use 2d.
#7 CUTOFF 12.2 #7 CUTOFF
There is confinement on top, so Bars must extend ld from point of max. moment and d or
we need Ktr (or take Ktr = 0) . Ktr 12db past point where no longer needed (48 inches from
is the area of stirrup that crosses face of support).
plane of splitting, n is number of
bars on this plane. Consider the Since d> 12db we can cut off three #7 bars at:
horizontal crack:
Atr fyt 48in + d
K tr = 48in+21.12in = 69.1 in
1500sn
0.22in 2 60000 psi
> 27.5in.
K tr =
1500 10in 3bars
K tr = 0.29 So cut off at least 69.1 inches from face of support
You must also consider the vertical crack shown. However,
Av = 0.11 in2 and n = 1, so Ktr is larger and does not control.
#7 CUTOFF #7 CUTOFF
The term cb is the smaller of the distance from the center of a bar to the
nearest surface or ½ the c/c distance between bars. But we are in a tensile zone. At 69.1 inches from the support
1 7 Vu = 40.5k. fVn =0.75(43.8+27.5)= 53.5 k.
cb = 1 + .375 + = 1.81in controls
2 8
1 7 Since Vu > 0.67 fVn, we need binder stirrups (We are allowed
14 - 2 1 + 0.375 - 2 0.75 fVn >Vu > 0.67 fVn if the continuing flexural
1 2 8
cb = = 2.59in reinforcement provides double the area required at the cut off
2 2spaces
point; but it doesn’t). Art. 12.10.5
Top bar y t = 1.3 (cb+Ktr)/db = 2.4;
it must be less than
3 fy y t y e l 2.5! To meet this requirement without binder stirrups, we need the
d = db
40 c + K tr cut-off point to be where Vu < 0.67 fVn (12.10.5) and that is 90
fc ' b
db inches from the face of the support. Then, we need to extend
3 60000 1.3 1 1 the bar d past the cut off.
d = 0.875 = 27.5in
40 1.81 + .29
6000 The cut off point will be 8.1 feet from face + d 1.9 ft;
0.875
extend 10 ft from face of support.
BEAM SPLICE COLUMN
The splice cannot be within 2h of The columns are 10 feet long (clear span).
the face (21.5.2.3) and must have From analysis, the column loads are as shown. The
hoops as shown at d/4<4 in. moments have been magnified for slenderness effects.
s = 4 inches controls. P kips M k ft

2
A sh fyh 0.44in 60000psi D 88 8.1
K tr = = = 1.47
1500sn 1500 4in 3bars
L 36 10.1
The only Y for the top #7 cb = 1.81in
is the top bar factor = Lr 13 1.5
cb + K tr
1.3. = 3.74 > 2.5 W 3.6 103
db
For the bottom #7, take
out the top bar factor . 3 60000 1.3 E 50 340
d = 0.875 = 26.4in
35
40 6000 2.5
= 27in
d
1.3 1.3 26.4 35in Class B Splice
COLUMN
The applicable load combinations are the same as
for the beam. The controlling combinations are:
1.2D+0.5L+E = 174 k
0.9D-E = 29.2 k
1.2D+0.5L+E = 345 k-ft

0.9D-E = 333 k-ft
Note: In this case, our maximum moments

correspond to our max and min P values. If this
was not true, we would need P with max moment.
COLUMN COLUMN
First – find the plastic centroid. This is where the load
“P” must be placed such that there is no moment.
The entire cross section is
stressed to 0.85fc’ and the
steel is assumed to have a
stress of fy. Find P (next slide).
Next, sum the moments. For a
rectangular column:
h
Px = 0.85fc ' A c + SA s fy d
2
Use an 18 x 18 column with 12 #9 bars. The ties are #4 If the column is symmetrical, the
bars. Check 21.6.3.1: rg = 12(1)/182 = 0.037; this is plastic centroid is at the geometric
between 0.01 and 0.06 as required. centroid.
COLUMN COLUMN
Now we have to construct 3 separate interactions
diagrams. First, we must construct the nominal Now, find Pn. Assume the entire cross section is stressed
interaction diagram with fy = 60 ksi. Then, we reduce that to to 0.85fc’ and the steel is assumed to have a stress of
by phi to get the design interaction diagram. Finally, we fy.
recalculate the nominal diagram with 1.25fy = 75 ksi to get
the probable interaction diagram.
3000
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
P = 0.85 6ksi 324in2 - 12in2 + 12in2 60ksi = 2311k
Moment (k ft)
COLUMN COLUMN
For the rest of the diagram, Sample Calculation
Use c = 10
1) Set the extreme compressive
a = b1c = 0.75 10 = 7.5in < h
strain = 0.003
2) Assume a value of “c”. Fc = 0.85 6ksi 7.5in 18in = 689k
3) a = b1c < h 16
es4 = 0.003 - 1 = 0.0018
4) Using similar triangles, find 10
the strain in each layer of fs4 = 29000ksi(0.0018) = 52.2ksi
steel.
5) Steel stress, fs = Eses < fy 11.3
es3 = 0.003 - 1 = 0.00039
6) Sum the forces to get P 10
7) Sum the moments about the fs3 = 29000ksi(0.00039) = 11.3ksi
plastic centroid to get M.
8) Repeat
COLUMN COLUMN
Sample Calculation
c (in) es4 P kips M k ft Comment Use c = 10
18 0.0003 1690 357 c=h 6.7
es2 = 0.003 - 1 = -0.001
16 0 1495 423 Zero tension 10
12 +0.001 1040 528 Tens Steel 30ksi fs2 = 29000ksi(-0.001) = -29ksi
9.4 +0.0021 660 590 Balanced 2.0
es1 = 0.003 - 1 = -0.0024
6 +0.005 261 522 Tens Control 10
4.2 +0.008 0 423 Pure Bending es1 > ey = 0.0021
fs1 = -60ksi
COLUMN COLUMN
Sample Calculation 2500
Use c = 10. (Moments are summed 2000
about the plastic centroid or you

must include P in the calculation.) 1500
(note: technically, you should subtract out 1000
the steel from the concrete area, but it only

makes about 2% difference!) 500
P = 689k + 4 60 + 2 29 - 2 11.3 - 4 52.2 = 756k 0

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
7.5 Moment k ft
M = -689 - 9 - 4 60 2.0 - 9 - 2 29 6.7 - 9

2 Here are the interaction diagrams. The points represent
+2 11.3 11.3 - 9 + 4 52.2 16 - 9 maximum and minimum P with associated moments; 174k,
M = 6944k - in = 578k - ft 345 k-ft and 30k, 333 k-ft. Both are within the reduced
curve, so the column is adequate.
COLUMN COLUMN
Now reduce by the phi factor: Now, we must determine if the column strength is 6/5 of
the beam strength. First we need the nominal beam
Pmax = 0.8 Pn = 0.52Pn for tied columns. strength (use fy), but we MUST include the steel in the
Pmax = 0.52(2311k) = 1295 k slab.
For values of extreme tensile steel < y f = 0.65 The flange width is the smallest of:
For values of extreme tensile steel > 0.005 f = 0.9 Span/4 = 25ft (12)/4 = 75 inches controls
c/c distance between beams = 12.5 ft = 150 in
Interpolate in between b + 16 hf = 14in + 16(6in) = 110 in
The slab has #3 @ 12 so there are 6 bars in the slab

(picture on next slide).
2500
COLUMN 2000
1500
1000
500
P=174k
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
So find “d” for the negative moment section. Assume the #3 bars are at 3 P=30k Moment k ft
inches from the top:

Using the NOMINAL interaction diagram, find M for the
6(0.11in 2 ) 3in + 3 0.6in 2 1.81in + 3 0.6in 2 3.93in maximum P (174k) and the minimum P (30 k).
y bs =
0.66in 2 + 3.60in 2
y bs = 2.89in Use the smallest moment (434 k ft @ 30k).
d = 24 - 2.89 21.1in
COLUMN COLUMN
So the nominal strength of the beams is:
0.66 + 3.60 in 2 60ksi

a= = 3.58in
0.85 6ksi 14in
3.58
Mn( - ) = 4.26in 2 60ksi 21.1 - = 4935k - in
2
Mn( - ) = 411.3k - ft
173.8 The positive moment section capacity
Mn( + ) = = 193k - ft
0.9 was found previously.
SMnb = 604k - ft
SMnc 1.2 604k - ft = 725k - ft
1.2SMnb = 725k-ft < SMnc = 868 k-ft OK
COLUMN COLUMN
Now for shear: We must construct the PROBABLE The term hx is the maximum
interaction diagram for the column. We assume fy = spacing of the cross ties < 14in.
1.25(60)=75 ksi. Note that we cannot just multiply the
nominal by 1.25 – the steel strength increases, not the 21.6.4.2:
concrete. 14 - hx
3000 so = 4 + = 6.7in
Probable fy = 75 ksi 3
2500
Nominal fy = 60 ksi Maximum spacing:

2000
Design, Nominal
reduced by F
1500
so = 6.7 in
1000
lo = clear span/6 b/4 or h/4 = 18/4 = 4.5 in
500 = 120in/6 = 20 in 6db = 6(1.125) = 6.75
or h or b = 18 in
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
or 18 in min Use 4 inch spacing over at
Moment�(k ft)
20 in controls. least lo =20 and at splice.
COLUMN COLUMN
3000
Minimum tie area (21.6.4.1). Ach

is the core out-to-out of ties.
2500
2000
Ach = 18 - 2 18 - 2 = 256in2
1500
Ag = 182 = 324in2
bc 1 = bc 2 = 18 - 2 - 0.5 = 15.5in
1000
fc ' Ag
500
Ash min = 0.3sbc -1

0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 Definitions: fyt Ach
Moment�(k ft)
6 324
Ash min = 0.3 4 15.5 - 1 = 0.50in2
60 256
The probable interaction diagram is constructed using
f' 6
the same method as the nominal, but uses 1.25 fy. Ash min = 0.09 sbc c = 0.09 4 15.5 = 0.56in2
The maximum possible probable moment is 627 k-ft., but fyt 60
21.4.5.1 says “over the range of Pu”. The largest Ash , provided = 0.80in2 OK
moment is for Pu = 174k, Mpr is approximately 565 k-ft.
COLUMN COLUMN
Mpr max.
2 565k - ft
Ve = = 113k corresponding to Next, you would have to repeat
10 ft range of Pu
previously found this calculation at the joint above
Pmin = 30k < 0.05 Ag fc ' = 97k as 565 k-ft. (for the top column) and below (for
Vc = 0 the bottom column).
stirrups = # 4@4
0.8 in2 60ksi 15.9in For the sake of illustration,
Vs = 0.75 = 143k
4 in assume the moment at the bottom
Vc + Vs = 143k > Ve = 113k of the lower column is 330 k-ft
21.6.5.2 requires Vc taken = 0 within lo when So Ve = (302+330)/10 = 63.2 k

Ve > 0.5Vu and Pu<0.05Agfc’.
The stirrup calculation is done the
Ve must be > factored Vanalysis
same as before, but the smaller V
Ve constant so #4 @ 4 throughout column. allows a larger stirrup spacing
outside of lo.
COLUMN COLUMN
There is an alternative: Recall Column Splice Length;
that the sum of the beam 21.6.3.2 requires ties according to 21.6.4.2 and
moments was
3 (see previous calc for lo ties). Ties at 4 in:
193+411 = 604 k-ft.
60000 psi 0.8in2 fy Ah
This can be distributed according Ktr = = =2
1500 4in 4bars 1500sn
EI
to the relative stiffness of the
columns, as shown in the formula cb = 2.1in
Mtop =
c top
Mpr1 + + Mpr2 (-)
All values of Y
EI EI to the left. Ktr + cb 2 + 2.1 and l = 1.
+ = = 3.6 > 2.5
c top c bot db 1.125
EI If the columns above and below
3 60000 1
Mbot =
c bot
Mpr1 + + Mpr2 (-)
the beam have the same stiffness: d = 1.125 = 26in
EI
+
EI 40 6000 2.5
c top c bot
McolT = McolB = 604/2 = 302 k-ft. Class B d = 1.3 26 = 34in
COLUMN JOINT COLUMN JOINT
To determine joint shear, we use
the probable moments including
the slab. The beam shears are
from beam design. The sum of
the probable beam moments is
604 k-ft and the beam shear was
26.9 k.
h 1
Vcol = Mpr(-1) + Mpr+ 2 + Ve1 + Ve 2 col Vj = 351k
2 c
10 10 Aj = 18 18 = 324in2
c = + 2 + = 12 ft hcol = 1.5 ft
2 2 Vn = 20 6000 324 = 502000 pounds
1.5 1
Vcol = 604k - ft + 2 26.9 = 53.7k Vn = 0.75 502k = 377k > 351k
2 12
COLUMN JOINT
ACI 318 does not require
considering the slab steel,
but some designers do.
Tpr 1 = 3.60in2 75ksi = 270k

Tpr 2 = 1.80in2 75ksi = 135k
Vj = 270 + 135 - 54 = 351k
21.5.3: The joint is h = 18 in long. The width is:
Smallest of b+h = 14+18 = 22 in (b is beam width)
b+2x = 14+2+2 = 18 in
(x is the shortest distance from the edge of the beam to
the column face.)
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH 21.5.4
BASIC THEORY
60000 0.875 • Steel cable (tendon/strand) or bar is placed under
dh = = 10.5in > 8db = 7 > 6in tension and held.
65 6000
• The tendon or bar is attached to a concrete member
d = 2.5 10.5 = 26in through bond or by an anchor.
d ,topbar = 3.25 10.5 = 33.9in • The bar or tendon is released and it attempts to return
to its original length, but can’t because it is attached to
So at the end of the building, the hooks must be the concrete. It remains under some tension.
embedded 10.5 inches into the columns. • The tension in the steel then must be equilibrated by
compression in the concrete.
The bars going through the interior columns must • This “pre compression” delays cracking in the concrete
have the development lengths shown; 26 inches structure.
bottom bars, 34 inches top bar.
P.E. Structural Exam Review: BASIC THEORY
Prestressed Concrete • Prestressing DELAYS cracking by increasing the
cracking moment/load capacity.
• Usually, the member does NOT crack under
service level loads.
Richard A. Miller, PE, FPCI
Email:[email protected] • Prestressing does not appreciably affect the
ultimate strength (Mn).
• An excellent video on prestressed beam
fabrication can be found at the
Prestressed/Precast Concrete Institute web site
(pci.org) under education/free resources.
BRIDGE VS. BUILDING
BASIC THEORY
• Flexural stresses in concrete and steel must be • The design methodology for bridges and
checked at the time the prestressing force is buildings is almost identical.
applied to the concrete (Release Stage).
• After application of the prestressing force, the • Often, the same, or similar, equations are
system will lose some of the prestressing force used for bridge and building members.
(loss of prestressing) and this must be calculated. • Most of the difference is in determination of
– The system shortens elastically on application of loads, load distributions and load effects.
prestressing
– Concrete shortens due to creep and shrinkage
– Steel relaxes
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE Types of Prestressed Concrete

BASIC THEORY Pretensioned
• The system must be checked for flexural • Pretensioned
stresses under service level loads, after – 7 wire strand is anchored
to end supports.
accounting for loss of prestressing force. – Concrete is cast around
• The system must be checked under factored the strand.
loads – When the concrete
reaches strength, the
– Flexure strand is cut releasing
– Shear the prestressing.
– Development length – Force is transferred
through bond.
– Bearing, etc.
Types of Prestressed Concrete Prestressing Strand
• Post tensioned
– The concrete (precast or • 7 wire – helically wrapped.
cast in place) is cast with a
duct. • Strength: GR 250 = 250 ksi or GR 270 = 270 ksi
– Strand or bar is run through • Stress Relieved (less common) or Low Relaxation
the duct.
(more common)
– When the concrete reaches
strength, the bar/strand is • Common Diameters: 3/8”, ½”, ½” special, 0.6”.
tensioned and anchored.
Force is transferred by the • Ep = 28500 ksi due to helical wrap
anchor.
• Areas found in tables.
– The strand/bar may be
grouted (bonded) or left
unbonded. Tables with areas of strands can be found in the PCI
Design Handbook, prestressed concrete text books or
on the web from manufacturers.
Post tensioning vs. Pretensioning: APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS

• At transfer of prestressing force:
– Different allowable stresses for compression in the concrete
• Buildings:
and tension in the steel – ACI 318
– In post tensioned, there are limits on bearing stresses in the
concrete due to anchorage devices • Most chapters apply to both RC and Prestressed
• At service loads • CH 18 is specifically for Prestressed
– No difference between methods
– PCI Design Handbook (covers pretensioned)
• At ultimate load
– A different formula is used for the steel stress, fps, for if • Bridges
unbonded steel is used in post tensioned structures.
– No difference between methods, otherwise – AASHTO LRFD Specifications
• Prestressing force losses • Prestressed concrete is in Article 5
– There are some differences for each method
Definition of Section Types
THIS WEBINAR (ACI 10.3.4; AASHTO 5.7.2.1)
Strain in the extreme Type of Section
• Due to time limitations, only pretensioned can be tensile steel, t.
covered. t < fy/Es Compression Controlled
• Both building and bridge will be addressed. c/dt > 3/5*
• It is assumed that the participant knows how to 0.005 > t > fy/Es Transition
calculate the critical loads and load combinations. 3/8< c/dt < 3/5*
– Covered in a previous module. t > 0.005 Tension Controlled
c/dt < 3/8
• We will analyze a building beam.
– ACI 318 – 08 *For Grade 60 steel and prestressing steel, where fy/Es may be taken as 0.002.
– PCI Design Handbook, 6th Ed.
The same definition is used
• We will discuss what is different (and what does not) for both building and bridge.
when it is a bridge beam. The definition for prestressing
– AASHTO LRFD 5th Ed
steel is the same as for Grade
60 mild reinforcing.
The basic equation of prestressing (for both buildings and bridges):

IMPORTANT ACI DEFINITIONS
h = overall height of the section.

d = distance from compression face to centroid of ALL tensile steel.
dp = distance from compression face to centroid of prestressing The eccentric prestressing force causes both axial compression
steel ONLY. MAY BE LIMITED > 0.8h. and bending opposite to the applied forces. In cases where
dt = distance from compression face to centroid of extreme tensile the section can be considered elastic, the net stress is found
steel (mild or prestressed). from superposition. This equation applies at release of
e = distance from centroid of gross section to centroid of prestressing force and under service load.
prestressing steel, only. Called eccentricity.
CLASSES OF PRESTRESSED BEAMS
BASIC EQUATION OF PRESTRESSING
BUILDINGS
P Pec Mc • ACI 318
fc = – Class U – Uncracked. Service level tension cannot
Ag Ig Ig exceed 7.5( fc’).
fc = concrete stress (+ = comp; = tens). – Class C – Cracked. Service level tension exceeds
P = Total prestressing force after all loses 12 ( fc’).
e = eccentricity – Class T – Transition. Service level tension between
c= distance from neutral axis to extreme fiber. There may be 7.5 ( fc’) and 12 ( fc’).
different values of “c” for top and bottom! – Class based on service level tension using GROSS
M = moment from external forces section properties.
Ag = gross area • ACI 318 Section 18.3.3 and Table R18.3.3 (PCI
Ig = gross moment of inertia 4.2.2.1) provide the serviceability design
requirements for these classes.
For a simply supported beam, the top sign is for the top of the
beam and the bottom sign is for the bottom of the beam.
If the section is made composite by adding a slab later, the loads

must be separated based on whether they were applied to non Classes U and T
composite precast section or to the entire composite section.
This is not difficult, it just requires bookkeeping. The basic • We will analyze a Class U member, as those are
equation becomes: the most common.
• Class C members are rare.
P Pecnc Mc Mc • A Class T member is designed and analyzed
fc = EXACTLY the same as a Class U, with one
Anc Inc I nc I comp exception:
– A Class T member must have special deflection check
using a bilinear curve.
Where “nc” refers to the non composite section properties and – For Class T deflection, use ACI 9.5.4.2
the forces/moments applied to the non composite section and – See Section 4.8.3 of the PCI Design Handbook for
“comp” refers to the properties and moments applied to the information and an example!
composite section.
Here is our prestressed member. For The distance from the bottom of the
reference, it is an 12RB20 from Pg 2 42 beam to the centroid of strand, yb, is:
in the PCI Design Handbook, 6th Edition.
2strand 4in + 4strand 2in
yb = = 2.67in
The following would have to be given in 6strand
the problem statement: h
e= - y b = 10 - 2.67 = 7.33in
2
28 day (design) concrete strength: fc’ = 5000 psi
Concrete strength at release of prestressing force: fci’ = 4000 psi
A single strand is 0.153 in2. This is found in a table.
Prestressing steel: ASTM A416, 7 wire prestressing strand, Grade
Ap = 6(0.153) = 0.918 in2
270; Low Relaxation, ½” (Ap = 0.153 in2/strand).
Strength fpu = 270 ksi, fpy = 230 ksi The “initial pull” (force in the steel prior to transfer of prestress):
Nonprestressed steel: ASTM A615 Grade 60. Pi = 0.918in2(0.75)(270ksi) = 185.9 kips
Initial prestressing force in the strand LOADS/MOMENTS

= 0.75fpu = 0.75(270 ksi) = 202.5 ksi.
Load Type w (kips/ft) Mmax (k in)@ Midspan
This is the stress in the steel BEFORE release. This 25 ft. span c/c bearing
is not standard and would have to be given. Self Weight 0.25 234.4
DL 0.5 468.8
18.5.1 Limits on Prestressing Steel Stress: LL 1.2 1125
The beam is SIMPLY SUPPORTED. M=wL2/8
Due to jacking < 0.94fpy = 0.94(230) = 216 ksi L = 25 ft c/c bearing For prestressed beams, both the span
(c/c bearing) and the overall length are
< 0.8fpu Loverall = 27 ft – out to out. needed.
A = 240 in2
After transfer of prestressing < 0.82fpy = 188 ksi I = 8000 in4 = bh3/12
< 0.74fpu S = I/c = 800 in3 Note – this is a symmetrical beam. If
the beam is NOT symmetrical, there is
an St and an Sb. Be careful!
LOSS OF PRESTRESSING The elastic moduli are needed (ACI 8.5.1 for concrete). Note
that there are two; one for release and one for service level
As soon as the prestressing force is applied, creep, stresses. E is given for 145 pcf concrete.
shrinkage and relaxation cause the prestressing force
to start to drop. After a long time, this loss of The prestressing steel value is from the appendix of the PCI
prestressing force stabilizes. These losses are needed Design Handbook. It is less than 29000000 psi due to the helical
for various calculations wrap of the prestressing strand.
1.5
ACI 318 does not say how to calculate the loss of Eci = 33 145 4000 = 3600000psi
prestressing force, so the procedure in the PCI Design
1.5
Handbook 6th Ed. (Section 4 7 on Pg 4 84) is used. Ec = 33 145 5000 = 4030000psi
(6th ed. Is still standard for exam. Procedure is same in 7th ed.)
Ep = 28500000psi
LOSS OF PRESTRESSING Elastic Shortening

The losses are Elastic Shortening; Creep of the
concrete; Shrinkage of the concrete and Relaxation of When the steel is cut, it “springs” back, compressing the
the steel. These apply to both pre and post tensioned. concrete. Since the steel and concrete are bonded, the
steel shortens and loses stress.
Post tensioned also has anchorage set loss and loss This is elastic shortening.
due the friction when the tendons are pulled through
curved ducts. Equations for friction loss are in CH 18,
ACI 318; anchorage loss is from the manufacturer.
Losses are for SERVICE LOAD calculations.

UNFACTORED loads are used.
From the PCI Handbook, Kcir = 0.9. The term fcir is the concrete
Elastic Shortening stress at the centroid of the steel (y=e in My/I). The only load is
the beam’s own DL. Pi = 185.9 k and e = 7.33 in (found prev.).
This is the stress in concrete
Pi Pe 2
Me at the centroid of the steel 2
fcir = Kcir + i - g wl 2 0.25klf 27 ft
Ag Ig Ig at release. Kcir is an Mg = = 12in / ft = 273.4 k - in
8 8
empirical constant = 0.9.
Pi Pe 2
Me
fcir Since concrete and steel are fcir = K cir + i - g
c = =D p bonded, the change in steel
Ag Ig Ig
E ci
strain is equal to the concrete 185.9k 185.9k 7.33in
2
273.4k - in 7.33in
strain. fcir = 0.9 + -
ES = Dfp = E p D p
240in2 8000in4 8000in4
Elastic shortening is the
fcir = 1.57ksi
Ep change in steel stress. KES is
ES = K ES fcir an empirical constant = 1.
Eci
Normally, prestressed beams are cast longer than the Kes = 1.0 is from the PCI Design Handbook
center of bearing to center of bearing span to allow for Since this is
the width of bearing pads. THIS BEAM IS CAST 27 FEET normal wt.
Eci = 57000 4000 = 3600000 psi concrete, here is
LONG. an alternate Ec
E equation.
1) When calculating the stress when the prestressing is ES = K ES p fcir

released (release condition), it is usual to use overall
Eci
length; 27 feet in this case. 28500ksi
2) When calculating stresses under service or ultimate ES = 1.0 1.57ksi = 12.5ksi
loads, center of bearing to center of bearing span is
3600ksi
used; 25 feet in this case.
3) If overall length is NOT given, the c/c bearing can be For post tensioned structures, the ES equation above is valid if all tendons
used for the release condition; some example are tightened simultaneously. If they are tightened one at a time, ES
above is multiplied by (N 1)/2N; where N is the number of tendons. The
problems even use c/c bearing at release. following equations for CR, SH and RE work for post tensioning, too.
Because the prestressing force keeps a constant stress on the concrete, the Finally, steel under stress relaxes. The relaxation loss is:
concrete will creep. Creep shortens the beam and causes a loss of
prestressing. Additional DL moments mitigate these stresses, so they are
subtracted out. Self weight is already subtracted out of the fcir term. Again,
stress is found at y=e. The additional dead load is applied after the beam is in
RE = Kre - J ES + CR + SH C
place, so the c/c bearing (service load) span is used.
2 The values of Kre , J and C are found in the PCI Design Handbook
0.5klf 25 ft (Pgs 4 85/86). For Grade 270 low relaxation steel initially
Mdl = 12in / ft = 468.8k - in
8 stressed to 0.75fpu; Kre = 5000 psi, J = 0.04 and C = 1.0
M e 468.8k - in 7.33in
fcds = dl = = .43ksi RE = 5ksi - 0.04 12.5 + 16.4 + 5.4 1.0
I 8000in4
fcir - fcds Elastic strain in concrete from RE = 3.7ksi
sustained loads. The concrete is
CR = 2.0E p
Ec assumed 28 days old. Total = 12.5 + 16.4 + 5.4 + 3.7 = 38ksi
2 is the creep coefficient.
28500ksi 38ksi
CR = 2.0 1.57ksi - 0.43ksi = 16.4ksi 100% = 19%
4030ksi 0.75 270ksi
Thus, the stress in the strand after all losses is:

This shows the loss due to shrinkage of the concrete. The
volume to surface area ratio (V/S) is approximated by the area
to perimeter ratio. Relative Humidity varies; here it is taken as fse = 0.75fpu - loss = 0.75 270ksi - 38ksi = 164ksi
70%. There is a map in the PCI Design Handbook (pg 3 114)
which gives local RH values. P = 6 strand 0.153in2 164ksi = 150.5k
V This will be the stress in the strand after a long time.

SH = 8.2x10 -6 KshEp 1 - 0.06 100 - RH
S It is used to calculate service load behavior.
SH = 8.2x10 -6 1 28500ksi 1 - 0.06 3.75 100 - 70
Typical loss values are 15 30%, with 20% being average.
SH = 5.43ksi
When DESIGNING a prestressed beam, it is usual to
assume a 20% loss to estimate the number of strands
needed; then calculate the actual loss.
Service Load Allowable Stresses
Classes “U” and “T”
Service Load Stresses
Stress Allowable
• Sections 18.3 and 18.4 ACI 318 (Use gross section properties) ksi ksi
• Class U tension in the precompressed zone (bottom of the
Compression under all 1.53 3.00 OK
beam in this case):
loads
• 7.5 fc’ = 7.5(5000psi)0.5 = 530 psi
• Compression under all loads (to prevent fatigue): Compression under 0.13 2.25 OK
• 0.6fc’ = 0.6(5000 psi) = 3000 psi sustained load
• Compression under sustained load only (to control creep Tension 0.28 0.53 OK
deflections):
• 0.45fc’ = 0.45(5000 psi) = 2250 psi NOTE: If the number of strands is reduced to 5, the
• The compression limits also apply to Class “T”. Class “T” tensile allowable is exceeded. With 5 strands, the beam
tensile limit is 12 fc’ . could be designed as a Class “T” – as long as the pattern
• Service stress limits not applicable to Class “C”. can be made symmetrical.
This is a pretensioned beam. Stress from the strand is transferred

Check Service Load Stress to the concrete through bond over a distance called the “transfer
For all loads at midspan: length”. The transfer length, measured from the end of the beam
Remember, this beam is sym. is:
P Pe M I Yours may not be!
fc = S=
A S S c fse 164000psi
fc =
150.5k 150.5k 7.33in 234.4 + 468.8 + 1125 k - in tr = db = 0.5in = 27.3in
240in2 800in3 800in3 3000 3000psi
fc = 1.53ksi C top
Where db is the diameter of the strand.
fc = -0.28ksi = 0.28ksi T bottom
For sustained loads at midspan (only top is checked): It is assumed the prestressing force
varies linearly over the transfer length.
150.5k 150.5k 7.33in 234.4 + 468.8 k - in
fc = 2
- 3
+ See R12.9 ACI 318
240in 800in 800in3
fc = 0.13ksi C top
Service Load Stresses Ultimate Capacity
3.2
Compression allowable = 3 ksi

fps = stress in the prestressing steel at the ultimate condition
Linear reduction of prestressing force over transfer length
2.4 fpu = ultimate strength of the prestressing steel
Top Stress Bottom Stress fpy = yield strength of the prestressing steel
1.6 fc’ = concrete design strength
gp = prestressing steel constant
0.8 = .55 for fpy/fpu < 0.8 (prestressing bar)
= .4 for fpy/fpu < 0.85 (stress relieved strand)
0
= .28 for fpy/fpu < 0.9 (low relaxation strand)
0 5 10 15 20 25
b1 = the stress block constant for concrete
0.8
Tension allowable = 0.53 ksi = 0.85 for fc’ < 4000 psi
Length� feet
= 0.65 for fc’ > 8000 psi
This graph shows the stresses from applying all service loads are below the = interpolate in between
allowable along the entire beam. A similar graph would show top stress under
sustained service loads is below the allowable at all points. The stress does not go
to 0 at the supports because the beam overhangs by 1 foot.
Ultimate Capacity 18.7 Ultimate Capacity

Unlike reinforced concrete, the steel stress is not dp = effective depth of the
assumed at yield, but must be calculated. This equation Ap prestressing steel. (Prestressing
r p=
is valid if fse > 0.5fpu: bdp strand is never considered effective in
As compression so if there is strand on
gp d fpu r= the compression side, a strain
fps = fpu 1- rp + w - w' bd compatibility approach is needed –
b1 fc ' dp Careful, it’s A ' see PCI Handbook)
d, not d’ !! r' = s
bd
Ignore any compression steel if the following conditions are not met:
rf b = width of the compression face
w= y
fpu d fc '
rp + w - w' 0.17 d = effective depth to the tensile steel
fc ' dp r 'f
w' = y
and fc ' d’ = depth to non prestressed,
d' 0.15dp compression steel.
For prestressing steel, tension control, compression control and
Ultimate Capacity transition sections are defined the same as for Gr 60 rebar.
Tension control if t > 0.005. It was shown previously that this

Since there is no compression steel or mild tensile steel: condition is met if c/dt < 0.375.
a = 4.45in
dp = 17.3in g p = .28 b1 = 0.8 for fc ' = 5000psi
a 4.45in
c= = = 5.56in
gp fpu b1 0.8
fps = fpu 1 - rp c 5.56in
b1 fc ' = = 0.309 < 0.375
dt 18in
0.28 6 0.153in2 270ksi

fps = 270ksi 1 - e t = 0.003
dt
- 1 = 0.003
18
- 1 = 0.0067 > 0.005
0.80 12in 17.3in 5ksi OR:
c 5.55
fps = 247.4ksi The section is tension controlled so = 0.9.

Remember, dt is to the extreme tension steel, not the steel centroid.
Now check the ductility limit (minimum steel). ACI 318 (18.8.2)
Mn is calculated the same
way for both prestressed requires the ultimate moment to be AT LEAST 1.2 times the
and reinforced concrete. cracking moment (unless both Vn>2Vu AND Mn>2Mu).
The only difference is the
steel stress!! If this were FMn (1.2)Mcr
RC, fps would be replaced
by fy. P Pe
Ap fps 0.918in2 247.4ksi Mcr = Snc + + 7.5 fc'
a= = = 4.45in Class U, T or C is A S
0.85fc 'b 0.85 5ksi 12in only for service If the section is composite:
a loads. The Mn,
Mn = Ap fps d- F and ductility P Pe S
2 limit calculations Mcr = Sc (7.5 fc ' + + ) - Mdnc c - 1 Sc 7.5 fc '
4.45in apply to ALL Anc Snc Snc
Mn = 0.918in2 247.4ksi 17.3in - = 3423k - in classes!
2 Where Anc is the non composite area, Snc is the non composite
F Mn = 0.9 3423k - in = 3080k - in section modulus, Sc is the composite section modulus and Mdnc are
the moments applied only to the non composite section. P is the
F Mn > Mu = 2644k - in = 1.2 234.4 + 468.8 + 1.6 1125 OK
effective prestressing force at service load after all losses. This
Mu = 1.2MDL + 1.6MLL applies to ALL Classes.
OK IF F = 0.9!
Taking compression (+) and tension ( ) Release Stresses 18.4
FMn (1.2)Mcr
• Allowables:
P Pe M
-7.5 fc' = + - cr – Compression = 0.6fci’ = 0.6(4000 psi) = 2400 psi
A S S – Tension = 3 fci’ = 3 (4000) = 190 psi
150.5 kips (150.5 kips)(7.33 in) Mcr – Tension at the end of simply supported beam* =
-0.53 ksi = 2
+ 3
- 6 fci’ = 6 (4000) = 380 psi
240 in 800 in 800 in3
Mcr = 2024 kip in – Compression at the end of simply supported
beam* = 0.7fci’ = 2800 psi
(1.2)Mcr = (1.2)(2024 kip in) = 2429 kip in – If tension limit is exceeded, mild steel must be
FMn =3080 kip in > 2429 kip in OK added.
– If the compression limit is exceeded, harp or
debond strand.
.. * ACI does NOT define what constitutes “the end of a simply supported beam”.
Check Development Length Section

ACI 12.9
fse f -f Units for fse
ld = db + ps se db and fps are psi
3000 1000 for this
164000 247400 - 164000 equation.
ld = 0.5in + 0.5in = 69in
3000 1000
The prestressing strand must be embedded at least 69 inches = To control end stresses, designers sometimes drape (post
5.8 ft. from the point of maximum stress. The point of tensioned) or harp (pretensioned) strands. This changes the
maximum stress is midspan. Since the beam is 27 ft overall, prestressing moment by changing “e”
the distance from the end of the beam to midspan is 13.5ft, so
this requirement is met. Note that the strand now has a vertical component of force.
If the strand is “debonded” ( a bond breaker is used to lower This is far more common for bridge rather than buildings.
release stresses), development length is doubled (12.9.3).
Release Stresses
Release Stresses 2.5
Compression Allowable
• At release, the overall length of the beam is 2
used (27 feet for this example). 1.5

Bottom Stress
• The only applied load is self weight. end of transfer length
• Initial pull is 0.75fpu = 202.5 ksi 1
• It is assumed the only loss of prestressing 0.5
force = ES*. Tensile Allowable

– P = 6 strand(.153in2)(202.5ksi 12.5ksi)=174.4 k 0
0 5 10 15 20 25
• The prestressing force is linearly increased 0.5
over the transfer length from 0 at the end of Top Stress

the beam to P at the transfer length. 1
Length ft.
* Not in ACI. Some designers use 10% for the loss at release. Note the The bottom is OK, but the top is overstressed in tension. The stress goes to 0 at the
stress value of 174 ksi does not violate steel stress limits of 18.5.1. supports because the full beam length is used. End of transfer length is shown.
Release Stresses Release Stresses

Here is a sample calculation of stress at the midspan:
When the top is overstressed in tension, the code requires that
2
mild steel be added to the top of the beam to take the ENTIRE
0.25klf 27ft tensile force in the top of the beam. The COMMENTARY
Mg = 12in/ ft = 273.4k - in
8 suggests the steel may be stressed to no more than 0.6fy or 30
P Pe M ksi, which ever is less.
fc =
A S S
Top steel is calculated by remembering that the bending stress
174.4k 174.4k 7.33in 273.4k - in distribution is linear. Draw the bending stress distribution and
fc =
240in2 800in3 800in3 calculate the TENSILE FORCE from the stress diagram.
fc = -.529ksi = 0.529ksi T top
fc = 1.98ksi C bottom
Release Stresses SHEAR Given
The critical point is the end of the transfer length. The total • The shear envelope is shown on the previous slide.
tensile force is the VOLUME under the stress wedge: • If the section meets ACI 11.1.3 – critical section is h/2
from face of support for prestressed.
Top steel must be
– Support reaction in direction of applied shear.
provided to take
– No concentrated loads between face of support and
23.4kips of force. The critical secion.
commentary suggests – Loads applied to top.
a stress of 30 ksi (if Gr. • The term h/2 used because d can be small in a
60 is used) for crack prestressed beam with harped/draped strand.
control. • Assume beam sits on 12 in bearing pad, so face of
The top and bottom stresses are support is 6 in from center of bearing. Critical section
found from the previously shown 23.4k/30ksi = 0.78 in2; is 6+20/2 = 16 in from center of bearing.
graph.
use 3 #5 bars or 4 #4.
SHEAR Shear
FACTORED�SHEAR�ENVELOPE
40
• Shear strength for prestressed or non
35
V = 31.6 kips prestressed concrete is Vn=Vc + Vs + Vp
30
– Vc = shear strength of concrete
25 – Vs = shear strength of steel
Shear at 6.5 ft = 18.5 kips
20 – Vp = Vertical component of harped strand
15 • Vs is calculated the same as RC
10 CRITICAL SECTION FOR PRESTRESSED IS h/2
• VC for prestressed concrete has two methods;
5
FROM FACE OF SUPPORT. ASSUMING 12 IN
BEARING PAD, CRITICAL SECTION IS 16 IN – Vci and Vcw (11.4.3)
FROM CENTER OF BEARING. – Will not be covered due to lack of time.
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 – Simplified Vc (11.4.2)
LENGTH�(ft)
Shear Shear
The simplified Vc method (11.4.2) is shown: From analysis of the beam (using the factored DL of 0.9 klf and
factored LL of 1.92klf) at 6.5 feet from the center of the support:
' Vud p In non
Vc = 0.6 f + 700
c bw d prestressed Vu = 17 kips; Mu = 2035 k in This is the maximum FACTORED
Mu design, the much moment and the associated shear.
simpler:
Vud p Vu, max = 18.5 k This is the maximum factored shear (different
1.0 Vc = 2 ( fc’)bwd load case)
Mu
is used. bw = 12 inches
2 fc' bw d Vc 5 fc' bw d
In this equation, Mu is the maximum factored moment and Vu
is the shear associated with Mu at the section being analyzed.
The term bw is the web width. The term is for lightweight.
Shear Shear
The beam is divided into intervals, usually,
dp = 17.3 inches.
critical section, every 0.1L and any significant d = 17.3 in > 0.8h = 16 in
points, like a harp point. A shear analysis is
performed at each interval. NOTE, This provision uses both “d” and “dp”.
Provision 11.3.1 states that “d” does not need to be less than
Time does not permit multiple sections to be 0.8h. The term “d” is the distance from the extreme
analyzed. Rule of thumb: in a prestressed compression fiber to the tensile reinforcement – both
prestressed and non prestressed.
beam, the greatest demand for stirrups is
usually at 0.25L. A sample analysis at this The term dp is the distance from the extreme compression
section will be performed. This is approximately fiber to the all the PRESTRESSED reinforcement. This MAY be
taken less than 0.8h.
6.5 feet from the center of the support.
Shear Shear
Determine the minimum stirrup area required for a
Vud p prestressed beam (11.5.6):
Vc = 0.6 fc' + 700 bw d
Mu b ws 50bw s This is the same as
A v,min = 0.75 fc'
fy fy for a non
17k 17.3in 12in 17.3in
Vc = 0.6 1 5000 psi + 700 = 0.75 5000 psi
(12 in)(15 in)
= 0.16 in2 controls
prestressed beam.
2035k - in 1000 pound / k (60000 psi)
50bw s 50(12 in)(15 in)
Vc = 29.8k F Vc = 0.75 29.8 = 22.4k = = 0.15 in2
fy 60000 psi
Vud p The term = 0.75 for Aps fpu s d This applies
= 0.14 1.0 OK lightweight, 0.85 for sand OR Av,min = only to
Mu lightweight and 1 for
80 fy d bw
prestressed.
normal weight. See 8.4. (0.918 in2 )(270000 psi)(15 in) 17.3 in
2 fc' bw d = 29.4 k < 29.8k OK = = 0.05 in2 Use the smaller
80(60000 psi)(17.3 in) 12 in of these two
5 fc' bw d = 73.4k > 29.8k OK A v,min = 0.05 in2 @ 15 inches c/c
Shear Shear
1 The smallest stirrup is a #3, so #3 @ 15 inches would
FVc = 22.4k > Vu = 18.5k > FVc = 11.2k
2 be needed.
Minimum stirrups are needed. Maximum spacing is (11.5.5):
For Vs 4 fc' bw d Non prestressed If stirrups were required for strength (11.5.7):
beams use the same
NOTE: When
- smax is the lesser of 0.75h or 24 inches force limits, but the Av fy d calculating
For 4 fc' bw d Vs 8 fc' bw d
maximum spacings are
d/2 or d/4 for non
Vs = maximum spacing,
- smax is the lesser of 0.375h or 12 inches prestressed. The s minimum stirrup

area or required
difference is because d
For Vs 8 fc' bw d can get small in a F = 0.75 stirrup strength, d
for prestressed
beam with harped
concrete does NOT
- resize the section strand!
Vu F Vc + Vs need to be taken
less than 0.8h!
Vs,reqd = 0; 0.75 h = 15 in<24 in. Use 15 inches.
SHEAR BRIDGE DESIGN
FACTORED SHEAR ENVELOPE
60
• Using AASHTO LRFD 5th Edition
50
• Loads and structural analysis covered in
40 another module. This module will cover
design/analysis of a prestressed beam.
30
Vu FVc • Only the major items are covered.
20
• Properties of an AASHTO Type III girder with
10
composite slab are given.
0 • IMPORTANT: AASHTO USES KIP UNITS!!!!!
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
LENGTH (ft)
DEFLECTIONS/CAMBER BRIDGE DESIGN

Important AASHTO Defintions:
Camber is the upward deflection of the beam

due to prestressing.
Buildings and bridges use the same method

for calculating camber and deflections.
Camber and deflection will be covered with AASHTO uses

bridges. different notation
from ACI
BRIDGE INFORMATION EFFECTIVE FLANGE WIDTH
NOTE: In 2009, this changed. The effective slab
width is now the tributary width of the slab:
4.6.2.6.1
Spacing between beams = 8 ft = 96 in = beff
Span = 58 ft. Overall girder length = 60 ft. Clear Span = 56 ft.
Overall width W = 44 ft. Overhang O = 2 ft.
Clear width C = 41 ft. Number of Lanes = 41/12 = 3 lanes
Type III AASHTO Girders. Spacing S = 8 ft.
HL 93 Truck Loading
Jersey Barriers @ 300 plf each
Future wearing surface 30 psf
Type (k) Bridge (Table 4.6.2.2.1 1)
Slab = 7.5 inch structural slab. 0.625 sacrificial wearing surface; f’c = 4 ksi
AASHTO TYPE III GIRDER COMPOSITE SECTION PROPERTIES

The section properties for a standard Composite properties are found
AASHTO Type III girder are: by “Transforming” the slab (made
of 4 ksi concrete) into an
h = 45.00 in. equivalent slab of beam (5.5 ksi)
A = 559.5 in2 concrete. The thickness (7.5
I = 125,390 in4 inches) does not change. The slab
width is reduced.
yb = 20.27 in.
neutral axis to bottom Ec slab = 3600 ksi
yt = 24.73 in. Ec beam = 4230 ksi
neutral axis to top
Sb = 6,185 in3 3600
St = 5,071 in3 b tr = 96 = 81.8in
4230
Concrete: fci’ = 4 ksi fc’= 5.5 ksi @ 28 days
PS Steel: ½ in; M203 Grade 270 Low Relaxation
Mild Steel: M31 Grade 60
COMPOSITE SECTION PROPERTIES HARPED STRANDS – SIDE VIEW
Str. slab thickness = 7.5”
h = 52.5 in
beff = 96 in. (AASHTO 4.6.2.6.1)
btr = 81.8 in
A = 1174 in2
I = 365828 in4 L = 58 ft c / c bearing
ybc = 35.17 in.
ytb *= 9.83 in. 0.4L = 0.4 58 ft + 1 ft = 24.2 ft = 290in.
ytc **= 17.33 in.
45"- 4"- 3"
Sbc = 10402 in3 Q = Arc tan = 7.5o
Stc = 21105 in3 ** 290"
Stbc = 37215 in3 *
Weight As will be shown, harped strands are used to control top stresses
at release. The number of strands to harp and the harp point is
beam only = 583 plf * neutral axis to top of slab determined by trial and error. Harp points are usually between
composite = 1333 plf ** neutral axis to top of beam
includes sac. wearing surface. 0.3L to 0.5L.
STRAND LAY OUT WEIGHTS

This section will use 18 strands; 4 will be harped strands:
Beam (0.150 kcf); w = 0.583 k/ft
Note: If the bridge meets 4.6.2.2.1, the slab load, the future
wearing surface and the barriers may be equally distributed to
the beams. We have assumed the structural slab is 7.5 in and
there is a 0.625 in sacrificial wearing surface. Slab thicknesses
and sacrificial wearing surfaces vary by state.
Slab = 0.150kcf(8.125in/12)(44ft)/6 beams = 0.750 klf

Barriers = 0.3klf(2)/6 beams = 0.100 klf
Future wearing surface = 30 psf (41ft)/6 beams =
0.205 klf.
LIVE LOAD DISTRIBUTION FACTORS -
MIDSPAN DL MOMENTS MOMENT
(Unfactored – 58 ft. span) The distribution tell how many “lanes” a beam must support.
Type (k) Bridge (Table 4.6.2.2.1 1). DF from Table 4.6.2.2.2b 1.
DC Loads: K ft We check both and take highest.
DL Beam Mg 245.3 Two Lanes

0.6 0.2 0.1
DL Slab Msl 315.4 S S Kg These are for an
DFM = 0.075 + interior beam.
Barriers Mb 41.6 9.5 L 12Lt s3
One Lane
DW Load:
0.4 0.3 0.1
S S Kg
Future Wearing Surface Mws 86.1 DFM = 0.06 +
14 L 12Lt s3
Total DL 687

LIVE LOADS MOMENT
Bridges use the truck+lane
load OR the tandem + lane
load.
K g = n Ibeam + Abeam eg2
Truck load governs with V =
14 ft. E = 33,000 w1.5 fc’ (Use ksi units for fc’)
n = Ebeam/Eslab =33000(145)1.5 ( 5.5/ 4) = (4273/3644)=1.173
Unfactored Midspan
Moments eg = distance from centroid of slab to centroid of beam
= 24.73+7.5/2 = 28.48 in
Mtruck = 770.8 k ft/lane
Mlane = 269.1 k ft/lane Kg = (1.173)[125,390 in4 +559.5in2 (28.48 in)2]
Force effects may be increased or decreased by the “importance factors”, = 679409 in4
h. See 3.4.2. Here, assume the factors = 1.
MOMENT
LIVE LOADS
Two Lanes Midspan Moments
0.6 0.2 0.1
S S Kg
DFM = 0.075 + Impact = 0.33 on truck only
9.5 L 12Lt s3
Mtruck = 770.8 k ft/lane(0.735 lanes/beam)(1+0.33)= 753.5 k ft/beam
S = 8 ft. Mlane = 269.1 k ft/lane (0.735 lanes/beam)= 197.8 k ft/beam
L = 58 ft.
Kg = 679409 in4 M(LL+I)= 951.3 k ft
ts = 7.5”
DFM = 0.735 lanes/beam

Remember – if the bridge has a skew, a skew multiplier may
be needed!

MOMENT
SERVICE LOADS
One Lane • Service loads are governed by
0.1
S
0.4
S
0.3
Kg – Service I for compression (3.4.1)
DFM = 0.06 + – Service III for tension in the precast beam (3.4.1)
14 L 12Lt s3
S = 8 ft. • Allowable stresses are given in:
L = 58 ft. – Table 5.9.4.2.1 1 Compression
Kg = 679409 in4 – Table 5.9.4.2.2 1 – Tension
ts = 7.5” • Some states allow no tension.
DFM = 0.540 lanes/beam – one lane • There are no classes in AASHTO. All beams
are designed as uncracked.
DFM = 0.735 lanes/beam –two lanes CONTROLS
This is for an interior beam. Exterior beams have different DFs!
LOSS OF PRESTRESS LOSS OF PRESTRESS – ES – 5.9.5.2.3a
The initial pull would be 0.75fpu = 202.5 ksi.
• Loss of prestressing is covered by 5.9.5 Assume ES = 7% (=14.2 ksi)
Pi = 18 strands (0.153in2/strand)(202.5ksi)(1 0.07) = 518.6 kips
• The total loss is the sum of instantaneous loss Eci = 33000 0.145kcf
1.5
4ksi = 3644ksi
(ES, AN, FR) and time dependent (CR, SH, RE) Pi Pi e M e2
fcgp = + - g c
c
• There are two methods for finding time Ag Ig Ig
dependent:
2
518.6k 518.6k 17.4in 3148k - in 17.4in
fcgp = 2
+ -
559.5in 125390in 4 125390in 4
– Simplified (5.9.5.3)
fcgp = 1.74ksi
• Only allowed for pretensioned members with decks.
Ep 28500ksi
– Refined (5.9.5.4) DfpES =
Eci
fcgp =
3644ksi
1.74ksi = 13.6ksi = 6.7% OK
This is close enough. (A second iteration gives ES = 13.6 ksi.)

Note that 3148 k in is Mg based on overall L = 60 ft.
LOSS OF PRESTRESS – APPROX. TIME

LOSS OF PRESTRESS – ES – 5.9.5.2.3a
DEPENDENT (5.9.5.3)
Bridges use almost the same formula for pretensioned beams
as buildings except that the constants are missing. The term e fpi Aps
DfpLT = 10.0 h st + 12.0 h st + DfpR (5.9.5.3 1)
is usually taken as the midspan value. Ag
Ep = 1.7 - 0.01H (5.9.5.3 2) This is a pretensioned

DfpES =
h
fcgp member with a deck, so
we can use the
Eci 5 approximate method.
st = (5.9.5.3 3)
2 1 + fci '
Pi Pe M e
fcgp = + i - g c c
Ag Ig Ig H = average relative humidity in % (so 70 not 0.7)

fci’ = strength of concrete at release, ksi.
5.9.5.2.3a requires that Pi be estimated, and then than DfpR = 2.4 ksi for low relaxation strand.
iterative solution is used until the ES loss matches the fpi = stress in steel before transfer = 202.5 ksi
assumed value of Pi.
LOSS OF PRESTRESS – APPROX. TIME
SERVICE LOADS TENSION
DEPENDENT (5.9.5.3)
The stress at midspan due to EFFECTIVE prestressing (after all
If 70% RH (would have to be given or use map in AASHTO or PCI) losses) is:
h = 1.7 - 0.01H = 1.7 - 0.01 70 = 1.0
Peff = 18 strand 0.153in2 / strand 164.5ksi = 453.0k
5 5
= = = 1.0
st
1 + fci ' 1 + 4 Peff Peff e
fpb = +
Ag Sb
202.5ksi 18 0.153in2
DfpLT = 10.0 1 1 + 12.0 1 1 + 2.4 ksi 453k 453k 17.4in
559.5in2 fpb = + = 2.08ksi COMPRESSION
2
DfpLT = 24.4ksi 559.5in 6185in3
DfpT = 13.6 + 24.4 = 38.0ksi Prestressing is applied to beam only so beam properties are used.
fpe = 202.5 - 38.0 = 164.5ksi
The loss is about 19%; very reasonable.
SERVICE LOADS TENSION SERVICE LOADS TENSION

Using Service III, the TENSILE stress due to APPLIED LOADS only Allowable tensile stress Table 5.9.4.2.2 1
is: Bonded tendons, not exposed to excessive corrosion
conditions:
Mg + Ms Mb + Mws + 0.8MLL +I
fbl = +
Sb Sbc ft < 0.19 fc’ = 0.19 5.5ksi = 0.446 ksi
245.3 + 315.4 12 86.1 + 41.6 + 0.8 951.3 12 The tensile stress due at the bottom is (tension is ( );
fbl = +
6185 10401 compression (+)):
fbl = 2.11ksi TENSION
fb = fbp + fbl = 2.08ksi – 2.11 ksi = 0.03ksi
Must separate the loads applied only to the beam and those applied to the fb = 0.03 Tension < ft = 0.446 ksi OK
composite.
SERVICE LOADS COMPRESSION SERVICE LOADS COMPRESSION
Using Service I, the COMPRESSION stress at the TOP OF THE The stress at midspan due to EFFECTIVE prestressing (after all
PRECAST BEAM due to APPLIED LOADS only is: losses) at the TOP OF THE PRECAST BEAM is:
Mg + Ms Mb + Mws + MLL +I Peff = 18 strand 0.153in2 / strand 164.5ksi = 453.0k
ftl = +
St Stc Peff Peff e
ftp = +
245.3 + 315.4 12 86.1 + 41.6 + 951.3 12 Ag Sb
ftl = + 453k 453k 17.4in
5071 37315 ftp = - = -0.745ksi
2
ftl = 1.67ksi COMPRESSION 559.5in 5071in3
ftp = 0.745ksi TENSION
Service I does NOT use the 0.8 factor on LL+IM.
SERVICE LOADS COMPRESSION SERVICE LOADS COMPRESSION

Using Service I, the COMPRESSION stress at the TOP OF THE The allowable compression stress in the top of the precast due
PRECAST BEAM due to SUSTAINED APPLIED LOADS only is: to all loads is (Table 5.9.4.2.1 1):
Mg + Ms Mb + Mws
ftls = + 0.6fwfc’ = 0.6(1)(5.5ksi) = 3.3ksi
St Stc
245.3 + 315.4 12 86.1 + 41.6 12 The term fw is defined by 5.7.4.7.2; but it meant to prevent
ftls = + failure in box girder webs. It is really not applicable to I
5071 37315 girders. If you calculate it, fw = 1 for this I section.
ftls = 1.37ksi COMPRESSION
There is also a check (to prevent excessive creep deflection)
for compressive stress due to sustained loads:
This is needed for a separate check.
0.45fc’ = 0.45(5.5ksi) = 2.50 ksi
SERVICE LOADS COMPRESSION FINDING Mn
The allowable compression stress in the top of the precast due The depth of the neutral axis, c, is found from a simple
to all loads is (Table 5.9.4.2.1 1): equilibrium and is given in equation (5.7.3.1.2 4):
Aps fpu + As fs - A 's f 's - 0.85 f 'c b - bw hf
ftl + fpt = 1.67 ksi – 0.745 ksi= 0.93 ksi < 0.6fwfc’ = 3.3ksi
c=
f
0.85 f 'c 1bw - kAps pu
dp
For compressive stress due to sustained loads: Aps = Area of prestressing steel
As = Area of non prestressed tension steel
A’s = Area of non prestressed compression steel
ftls + fpt = 1.37 ksi – 0.745 ksi = 0.622 ksi < 0.45fc’ = 2.50 ksi fpu = strength of prestressing steel
fs and f’s = stresses in non prestressed steel < fy.
b1 = concrete stress block factor (same b1 as in ACI)
k = prestressing steel factor – 0.28 for lo lax; 0.4 for stress relieved (Eq 5.7.3.1.1 2).
b = width of compression face.
bw = web width
hf = flange thickness
dp = effective depth to prestressing steel only.
SERVICE LOADS FINDING Mn

If the section is can be considered rectangular (b=bw) and
• Technically, the deck stresses should be there is no non prestressed steel:
checked, but they are always low and almost Aps fpu
never control. c=
f
0.85 f 'c 1 bw - kAps pu
• The beam was checked at midspan. dp
Additional points, like harp points, may need 18 0.153in2 270ksi
to be checked. c=
270ksi
• Calculation of stresses in the harped area will 0.85 4 ksi 0.85 96in - 0.28 18 0.153in2
49.61in
be illustrated under release stresses. c = 2.72in; a = 1c < h f = 7.5in
• Transfer length for AASHTO is 60db Since a=b1c<hf by inspection, the stress block is in the slab;
consider the section rectangular and use the properties of the
slab concrete. Also, the bw is the non transformed slab width
beff if a<hf.
FINDING Mn FINDING Mn
Equation 5.7.3.2.2 1:
If the previous slide had shown a> hf:
a a
Mn = Aps fps d p - + As fy d s -
1) Use the “T” beam form of the formula 2 2
2) Use the properties of the BEAM concrete a a hf
- A 's f 's d 's - + 0.85 f 'c b - bw hf -
3) Use bw =btr. 2 2 2
Since the section is rectangular and has only prestressing
steel and a=b1c:
c
Mn = Aps fps d p - 1 Use b1 for the
2 slab since a is in
the slab.
0.85 2.72
Mn = 18 0.153 265.8 49.61 -
2
Mn = 35470k - in = 2956k - ft
FINDING Mn FINDING F
The definition of tension control, compression control and
In the previous slide, dp = h – (yb e) = 52.5 – (20.27 17.38)=49.61 in. transition sections is the same for ACI and AASHTO (5.7.2.1).
For Low Relaxation steel, k = 0.28. The steel stress is 5.7.3.1.1 1: dt = 52.5 - 2 = 50.5in
The term dt is to
c 2.72in extreme tensile
= = 0.05 < 0.375
c dt 50.5in steel.
fps = fpu 1 - k
dp or
dt
= - 1 0.003
2.72in t
c
fps = 270ksi 1 - 0.28 50.5
49.61in t = - 1 0.003 = 0.053 > 0.005
2.72
fps = 265.8ksi
TENSION CONTROLLED!
FINDING F 5.5.4.2 MINIMUM STEEL
Same as ACI, FMn>1.2Mcr but a higher MOR is used (and
Condition F RC F Precast units are kips). We need to account for composite properties,
Tension Control 0.9 1.0 too. The fpb term is compression due to prestress and was
found under the service load checks:
Compression 0.75 0.75
Sbc
Control Spriral Mcr = 0.37 fc ' + fpb Sbc - Md / nc
Sb
-1 0.37 fc ' Sbc
Compression 0.75 0.75 10402in 3

Control Tied Mcr = 0.37 5.5ksi + 2.08ksi 10402in 3 - 561.7k - ft 12 -1
6185in 3
Mcr = 26066k - in > 0.37 fc ' Sbc = 9026k - in
Note the difference from ACI. AASHTO allows a F of 1.0 for
precast concrete. AASHTO does not differentiate between 1.2Mcr = 31280k - in < 35479k - in = Mn
spirals and ties for compression control.
Note: 0.37 fc’ in ksi units is about 12 fc’ in psi units.
CHECK FLEXURAL RESISTANCE DEVELOPMENT LENGTH

Mu < FMn 2
d = fps - fpe db 5.11.4.2 1
3
Using Strength I: fps = steel stress at strength limit state
fpe = effective prestressing stress after all losses
db = strand diameter
Mu = 1.25DC + 1.5 DW + 1.75 (LL+I)
k = 1.0 for pretensioned panels, piles and other
pretensioned members with a depth < 24 inches.
Mu = 1.25 (245.3+315.4+41.6) + 1.5 (86.1) + 1.75 = 1.6 for pretensioned members with a depth > 24 inches
(951.3) 2
d = 1.6 265.8 - 164.5 0.5 = 125in
3
Mu = 2544 k ft < (1.0)(2956 k ft) = FMn
125 in = 10.4 ft. Thus, strand must extend 10.4 ft from point of
max stress (midspan). There is 60/2= 30 ft from midspan to end
OK! (again, h = 1 for all h values) of the beam, so OK. Remember, the overall length is 60 ft!
RELEASE RELEASE
Compressive stresses in the precompressed tensile zone The allowable stress are:
If we did NOT harp the
are limited to: strands (left them straight),
Compression: here is the top stress:
0.6fci’ = 0.6(4ksi) = 2.4 ksi
0.6 f’ci 5.9.4.1.1 0
0.1
Tension: Allowable = 0.190 ksi
Unlike ACI, AASHTO restricts the TENSILE stresses in the 0.0948 f’ci =
0.2
girder (usually this is on the top). Basically, ACI allows the 0.0948 4ksi = 0.190 ksi 0.3
girder to crack as long as you control the cracking with

0.4
Allowable = 0.480 ksi w/steel
bar. AASHTO does NOT allow cracking (due to deicers). w/steel: 0.5
0.24 f’ci = 0.6
0.24 4ksi = 0.480 ksi 0.7
Allowable tensile stresses are in Table 5.9.4.2 1 0.8

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Overall Length (ft)
RELEASE RELEASE
Table 5.9.4.2 1 Temporary Tensile Stress Limits in Prestressed Concrete Before
Losses, Fully Prestressed Components. (Partial)
Harp the strand:
Bridge Type Location Stress Limit

Other than In precompressed tensile zone without bonded N/A
Segmentally reinforcement
Constructed In areas other than the precompressed tensile 0.0948 f’ci <0.2(ksi)
Bridges zone and without bonded reinforcement
In areas with bonded reinforcement (reinforcing
bars or prestressing steel) sufficient to resist the 0.24 f’ci (ksi)
tensile force in the concrete computed assuming
an uncracked section, where reinforcement is
proportioned using a stress of 0.5 fy, not to
exceed 30 ksi.
For handling stresses in prestressed piles
0.158 f’ci (ksi)
These are in ksi units. 0.24 f’ci (ksi) = 7.5 f’ci (psi) and 0.0948 f’ci (ksi) = 3 f’ci (psi)
RELEASE RELEASE
Harping works by changing “e” for the strand. Let us examine
the stresses at the transfer length (=60db = 30 in = 2.5 ft from Bottom stress:
the end). Recall release stresses apply only to the precast and
use the overall length.
P Pe Mg
fbottom = + -
A Sb Sb
520.2k 520.2k 9.81in 503k - in
fbottom = + -
559.5in2 6185in3 6185in3
We can calculate the net eccentricity, e, fbottom = 1.67ksi compression
at 2.5 feet from the end:
8 2" + 6 4" + 2 36.07 + 2 38.07
e = 20.27 -
18 strands
e = 9.81in
RELEASE RELEASE
Here are the stresses in the beam at release. The bottom
The initial pull was 0.75fps and the ES loss was calculated as 13.6 compression stress is OK < 2.4 ksi. Note that bonded steel is
ksi, so the NET stress at release is 202.5 ksi – 13.6 ksi = 188.9 ksi. needed on top. The stress is between 0.19 ksi and 0.48 ksi.
P = 18 strand(0.153 in2/strand)(188.9 ksi) = 520.2 k 2
Bottom Stress
Top stress: f = P - Pe + Mg
1.5
top
A St St 1
0.583k / ft 2.5 ft
Mg = 60 ft - 2.5 ft 12 = 503k - in
2 0.5
Tensile stress
520.2k 520.2k 9.81in 503k - in = 0.26 ksi
ftop = - + 0
559.5in2 5071in3 5071in3 Top Stress
ftop = 0.023ksi compression 0.5

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Overall Length (ft)
Note, some use ES as loss at release, some assume 10%.

RELEASE SHEAR
As before, we cannot analyze every point, so we will just pick
The top stress is greatest at the harp point. one point. Let’s choose the critical section.
The top flange is 7 in thick, so the
neutral axis is in the flange. The Assume there are 6 inches from the center of the support to the
flange is 16 in wide. face (If you do not know this, conservatively use center of
bearing).
Tensile force:
T = 0.5(0.256ksi)(5.34 in)(16 in) Ignore harped strand; for 14 strand d = 49.64 in. and c = 2.10 in;
T = 10.93 kips so a = b1c = 0.85(2.10) = 1.79 in
As = 10.93k/30 ksi = 0.37 in2 dv = 49.64 – 1.79/2 = 48.8 in.
2 #4 is sufficient. These may be So the critical section is 48.8 in from face of support or 54.8
the corner bars for the stirrups. inches from the center of bearing.
SHEAR SHEAR
For shear design (5.8), the beam is divided into sections
(just like buildings). Commonly, the beam is analyzed at the We need the following information:
critical section, every 0.1L and at critical points (like harp
points, end of debonds, etc.). Msw+slab+bar = 170.8k ft Vsw+slab+bar = 35.1 k
Mws = 23.8 k ft V ws = 4.91 k
AASHTO introduces a new term, dv, the shear depth. Mlane,max = 76.1 k ft Vlane = 15.7 k assoc w/Mmax
Vlane, max = 15.8 k
THE CRITICAL SECTION is dv Mtruck,max = 243.8 k Vtruck = 54.9 k assoc w/Mmax
from the face of the support Vtruck,max = 54.9 k
IF the reaction force in the
direction of applied shear All values are UNFACTORED. LL does not include IM or DF.
introduces compression in the
end region; otherwise use the Note that we need both the maximum shear AND the shear
face of the support. (5.8.3.2) associated with maximum moment.
SHEAR SECTIONAL 5.8.3.4.2
Here, the specification has different procedures for beams with
We have previously calculated DFM as 0.735 lanes/beam. For and without minimum stirrups. Beams without minimum
shear: stirrups are rare, so we will assume minimum stirrups.
Two Lanes
2 2 Now, an important definition: Act is the area of concrete on the
S S 8 8 tension half of the beam. The beam is simply divided at h/2.
DFV = 0.2 + - = 0.2 + - = 0.814
12 35 12 35
For our beam, we want the
One Lane positive moment (shaded)
S 8 half (the unshaded half
DFV = 0.36 + = 0.36 + = 0.680 would be for ( ) moment).
25 25 h/2 = 26.25 in:
Two lanes controls. Act = 22(7) + 0.5(22+7)(7.5)

+ 7(26.25 7 7.5) = 345 in2
The first step is to calculate the strain at the level of the

SHEAR tensile steel:
Unfactored: Mu
Msw+slab+bar = 170.8 k ft Vsw+slab+bar = 35.1 k + 0.5Nu + Vu - Vp - Aps fpo
Mws = 23.8 k ft V ws = 4.91 k dv
= (5.8.3.4.2 4)
Mlane,max = 76.1 k ft(0.735) = 55.9 k ft s
Es As + E p Aps
Vlane = 15.7 k(0.814) = 12.8k assoc w/Mmax
Vlane, max = 15.8 k(0.814) = 12.9 k Mu
Mtruck,max = 243.8 k(0.735)(1.33) = 238.3 k ft + 0.5Nu + Vu - Vp - Aps fpo
dv
Vtruck = 54.9 k (0.814)(1.33) = 59.4 k assoc w/Mmax s = -0.0004
Vtruck,max = 54.9 k (0.814)(1.33) = 59.4 k Es As + E p Aps + Ec Act
Mu = 1.25(170.8) + 1.5(23.8) + 1.75(55.9+238.3) = 764 k ft=9170k in The first equation is used if the section is cracked; es > 0
Vu,max = 1.25(35.1) + 1.5 (4.91) + 1.75 (12.9+59.4) = 177.8 k
Vu = 1.25(35.1) + 1.5 (4.91) + 1.75 (12.8+59.4) = 177.7 k If the section is uncracked, either use the second equation OR
(associated with Mmax) assume es = 0.
Mu Maximum spacing of stirrups (5.8.2.7)
+ 0.5Nu + Vu - Vp - Aps fpo
dv
= -0.0004 Vu - F Vp 177.8k - 0.9 13.1k
s
Es As + E p Aps + Ec Act vu = = =
Fbv dv 0.9 7in 48.5in
9170
+ 0.5 0 + 177.8 - 13.1 - 2.142 0.7 270 vu = 0.54ksi 0.125 fc ' = 0.125(5.5) = 0.68ksi
48.5
s = smax = 24" or 0.8dv = 38in
29000 0 + 28500 2.142 + 4273 345
If vu > 0.125 fc ' smax = 12" or 0.4dv
s = -0.00003 > -0.0004
Minimum area of stirrups (5.8.2.5 1)
Vp is the vertical component of the harped strand (using fpe):
4(0.153in2)(164.5ksi)sin7.5o= 13.1 k bv s
Av ,min = 0.0316 fc '
Nu is applied axial load = 0 fy
(Mu/dv) is not taken less than Vu Vp (OK in this calculation) If s = 24 "
fpo may be assumed = 0.7fpu
Aps = 2.142; the harped strand is not counted at this section. (7in )(24in )
Av ,min = 0.0316 5.5ksi = 0.207in 2
es is negative, so uncracked assumption correct. Since es is 60ksi
negative, we could take this as es = 0.
Now (5.8.3.4.2 1 and 5.8.3.4.2 2):

Vs ,min = 65.1 k
4.8 4.8
= = = 4.9 a is the angle between
1 + 750 s 1 + 750 -0.00003 # 4 @ 24 Av = 2(0.2) = 0.4 in 2 the longitudinal axis of
the beam and the
= 29 + 3500 s = 29 + 3500 -0.00003 = 28.9o Av fy dv cot + cot sin stirrups. For normal,
Vs = upright stirrups, a = 90o.
Then (5.8.3.3 3): s
Vc = 0.0316 fc ' bv dv = 900
= 0.0316(4.9) 5.5ksi (7in )(48.5in ) 0.4in 2 60ksi 48.5in cot 28.9 + 0 1
= 123.3 k Vs =
NOTE: 24in
Vs,min =
Vu
- Vc - Vp F= 0.9 for Vs = 87.8 k > 61.2 k
shear!
(5.5.4.2.1) Use #4 hoops @ 24”. The formula for Vs is 5.8.3.3 4. The
177.8k
= - 123.3k - 13.1k = 61.2 k stirrups are vertical (a = 90o).
.9
Check limit on shear strength (5.8.3.3):
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH
Vc + Vs + Vp 0.25fc ' bv dv + Vp This diagram (C5.11.4.2 1) shows the allowable stress (fpx) at
Mn if you don’t have the entire development length. Note
Vc + Vs 0.25fc ' bv dv that in AASHTO, the TRANSFER LENGTH = 60db!
0.25fc ' bv dv = 0.25(5.5ksi )(7in )(48.5in ) = 467 k Our development length
Vc + Vs = 123.3k + 87.8k = 211.2 k OK is 125 in, but we only
have 54.5 + 12 = 66.5
inches of development.
px - 60db
fpx = fpe + fps - fpe
- 60db
d
66.5 - 30
fpx = 164.5 + 265.8 - 164.5
125 - 30
fpx = 203.4ksi
The minimum tension the longitudinal steel must resist is Mu N V

Ap fps + As fs + 0.5 u + u - 0.5Vs - Vp cot
(5.8.3.5 2): dv
9170
Mu N V 2.142 203.4 + 0 + 198 - 0.5 87.8 - 13.1 cot28.9
Ap fps + As fy + 0.5 u + u - 0.5Vs - Vp cot 1.0 48.5
dv 435.7k < 443.7k
This does not work. We could add mild steel. We need 40.3 kips.
We can easily develop a #6 bar and 2 #6 gives us 0.88(60)=52.8 k.
Note that f is the appropriate strength reduction factor for the
load effect (e.g. 0.9 for Mu in reinforced concrete). We could also increase the stirrups to #4@12. Vs = 175.6 k:
Also note that Vs < Vu / f; Vs = 87.8k < Vu / f= 177.8/0.9= 198 ok Mu N V
Ap fps + As fs + 0.5 u + u - 0.5Vs - Vp cot
dv
The terms fps and fy are reduced for lack of development.
9160
2.142 203.4 + 0 + 198 - 0.5 175.6 - 13.1 cot28.9
1.0 48.5
435.7k > 364.7k
At the inside edge of a simple support, we must meet
equation 5.8.3.5 2. We have 1 foot of overhang to the The top of the girder is 16 inches wide. The minimum
center of the support and 6 inches to the face; 18 in total. We stirrups are #4@24in, so if Lvi = 24 inches (5.8.4.2 2):
are inside the TRANSFER LENGTH:
px 18
fps = fpe = 164.5 = 98.7ksi Vci = v ci Acv
60db 30
Vu Acv = bvi Lvi
Ap fps + As fs - 0.5Vs - Vp cot
bvi = 16in; Lvi = 24in
2.142 98.7 198 - 0.5 175.6 - 13.1 cot28.9
Vci ,min = 0.230ksi 16in 24in = 88.0k
211.4 k > 176k OK
Again, we have used #4 @ 12 stirrups. We could use #4 @
Vci Vri
24 stirrups and then added mild longitudinal steel.
The allowable interface shear is:

Check horizontal shear. Note that the horizontal shear is
caused only by composite loads!
Vri = Vni (5.8.4.1 1)
Calculate composite shear at the critical section: The nominal shear resistance of the interface plane is:
Vu1 = Vu = 177.8 k Vni = cAcv + [ Avf fy + Pc ] (5.8.4.1 3)
The width of the top flange, bvi = 16 in Where:

c = Cohesion factor ksi
= Friction factor [LRFD 5.8.4.3]
Vu1
v ui = Acv = Area of concrete engaged in shear transfer = bviLvi in2
bvi dv Avf = Area of shear reinforcement crossing the shear plane in2
Pc = Permanent net compressive force normal to the shear plane kips
177.8k
v ui = = 0.230ksi (5.8.4.2 1) fy = Shear reinforcement yield strength ksi
16in 48.5in bvi= Width of area of concrete engaged in shear transfer in
Lvi = Length of area of concrete engaged in shear transfer in
For a cast-in-place concrete placed against CAMBER/DEFLECTION
clean concrete girder surfaces, free of
laitance with surface intentionally roughened • LL deflection is governed by 2.5.2.6.
– These are only applied if the owner invokes them.
to an amplitude of 0.25 in:
– For precast, use gross section properties.
– It is assumed all lanes are loaded and all girders
deflect equally.
c = 0.28 (5.8.4.2) – The deflections for straight bridges are calculated by
m = 1.0 determining the stiffness of the entire cross section
(including barriers) and dividing by the number of
girders.
– Use the DF for moment to determine LL on one girder.
– Allowable deflections are in 2.5.2.6.2.
– These are independent of any other deflections.
The shear reinforcement was previously calculated to be #4

with a 24 inch maximum spacing. The shear width is bvi = 16
CAMBER/DEFLECTION
inches as this is the width of the top of the girder. If Lvi = 24 There are no specifications for DL deflections.
inches:
Prestressed girders will camber UP due to prestressing. This will
Vni = cAcv + [ Avf fy + Pc ] be mitigated by self weight, but the girder may still have an
upward deflection, which will increase due to creep. This may
Acv = 16 24 = 384in 2 affect elevation at erection, so camber at erection is often
calculated.
Vni = 0.28 384 + 1.0 0.4 60 + 0 = 131.5k
Vri = Vni = 0.9 131.5 = 118.4k > 88.0k OK The PCI Design Handbook, the PCI Bridge Design Handbook,
most prestressed concrete textbooks and various other
references have formulae for camber of various strand patterns.
Note that we only need #4 @ 24 sticking out the top of the
type III for horizontal shear. If we have #4 @12, that’s OK.
CAMBER/DEFLECTION CAMBER/DEFLECTION
For our case, the PCI BRIDGE Design Handbook, has a useable
formula. For a beam with both straight and harped strand,
camber is:
Pi ec L2 e ' a 2
Dp = -
Eci Ig 8 6
2 2
520.2k 17.38in 720in (17.38 - 8.94)in 290in
Dp = -
3644ksi 125390in 2 8 6
D p = 1.15in To get long term cambers, multiply the short term
camber/deflection by these values (Table 4.8.4.1, PCI Design
Pi is the prestressing force at release; a is the distance to the Handbook, 6th ed. May be used for bridges C5.7.3.6.2).
harp point; ec is the eccentricity of the strand group at midspan;
e’ is the DIFFERENCE between the midspan eccentricity and the = 1.8 1.15 - 1.85 0.37 = 1.39in
eccentricity at the end. L = 60 ft (release case). erection
CAMBER/DEFLECTION P.E. Structural Exam Review:

4
=
5wL Masonry Design
sw
384Eci Ig
4
5 0.583k / ft 720in
sw =
384 3644 ksi 125390in2 12in / ft
Mark McGinley
sw = 0.37in Phone # : 502.852.4068
= 1.15 - 0.37 = 0.78in E-mail: [email protected]
So the beam cambers up about 0.8 in.

Any masonry design
Presentation Outline
experience? – courses or design
Masonry Experience- Feed back from sites –
“via chat”- How many at site have: • Review basics terms
A. Little or None – units
B. A Short course and/or a little design – mortar
C. Design simple buildings/elements – grout
D. Design masonry routinely – Reinforcement - Etc
E. Design masonry in sleep – a masonry wiz- • Address Code issues and basic behavior
etc. • Then on to design and analysis
2 4
NCEES GUIDE As Per NCEES use the MSJC -

1. Vertical Forces Exam Friday Breadth
2008 Code (ACI 530) and
Masonry 7.5% - Flexural members - Compression Specification
members- Bearing walls- Detailing (e.g., crack
control, deflection, masonry openings)
2. Vertical Forces Exam Friday Depth
4-1 hour problems may include a Masonry Structure.
3. Lateral Forces Exam- Sat. Breadth
Masonry 7.5% -Flexural-compression members,
Slender walls, Ordinary or intermediate shear walls,
Special shear walls, Anchorages, Attachments
4. Vertical Forces Exam Sat. Depth
4-1 hour problems may include a Masonry Structure.
3 5
• Clay masonry units
Bond Patterns head
joints
– ASTM C 62 or C
216 or C 652
(hollow)
– usually solid, with
bed small core holes
joints for manufacturing
purposes
Running Bond Stack Bond – if cores occupy
25% of net area
units can be
considered 100%
solid
– Bia tech Note 10 B
1/3 Running Bond Flemish Bond See www.bia.org
6 Spring 2008 8
• Concrete masonry units ( CMU

) Usually Hollow & 8x16x(8 or
10 or 12) Masonry Mortar
– specified by ASTM C 90
– minimum specified compressive
strength ( net area ) of 1900
psi (Ave. • ASTM C 270 - Mortar
– net area is about 55% of
gross area for unit masonry
– nominal versus specified
versus actual dimensions • Three systems
– Type I and Type II – Portland-cement–lime
designations no longer exist
• Also - Concrete Brick - ASTM C
mortar (PCL)
55 – masonry cement
• MOST MASONRY MODULES 8” mortar
• See TEK NOTE 2-1A – mortar cement mortar
www.ncma.org (online resources)
– Two ways to spec –
Proportion and
property
– Then have 4 types
Spring 2008 7 9
Masonry Mortar . . . role of fm’
• Concrete
• Mortar Type( M a S o N w O r K )
– designer states assumed value of f’c
• Going from Type K to Type M - – compliance is verified by compression
more portland cement - higher tests on cylinders cast in the field
compressive and tensile bond and cured under ideal conditions
strengths, stiffer. • Masonry
• Types N and S are specified for – designer states assumed value of f’m
– compliance is verified by “Unit
modern masonry construction . Strength Method” or by “Prism Test
Method”
10 12
. . . verify compliance with

Reinforcement -Code 1.13 specified fm’
• reinforcing bars in • Unit strength method ( Spec 1.4 B 2 )
grout; joint – compressive strengths from unit
reinforcement manufacturer
(ties)- embedded in – ASTM C 270 mortar
mortar – grout meeting ASTM C 476 or 2,000 psi
• Usually center • Prism test method ( Spec 1.4 B 3 )
placement of – Pro : can permit optimization of materials
reinforcement – Con : requires testing , qualified testing lab
• protection– in code , and procedures in case of non -
complying results
• hooks – in code
11 13
Unit Strength Method ASCE 7-05 ASD Load Combinations
Code references - Building Code
• D +F
• D + H+ F+L+T
• D + H +F+(Lr or S or R)
• D +H+F+0.75(L+T) + 0.75(Lr or S or R)
• D +H+F+(W or .7E)
• D +H+F+0.75(W or .7E) + .75L+0.75(Lr or S or R)
Concrete masonry
• 0.6D +W + H
units ( Table 2 )
• 0.6D +H + .7E
unit compressive
• NOTE IBC prohibits use of 1/3 stress increase unless
strength 1900 alternative ASD Load combos used increase for W
Type S mortar and E but must have omega factor and reduced DL, if
f’m can be taken DL helps – net little benefit. Don’t use.
as 1500 psi
14 16
Relation between Code and GENERAL

Specification . . . Structural Analysis and Design
• Unreinforced vs. Reinforced masonry
– MSJC Sections 1.2.4 and 1.18
• unreinforced masonry : masonry
require a QA Code Section 1.4
resists flexural tension ,
invokes the Specification by reinforcement is neglected
reference .
• reinforced masonry : masonry in
flexural tension neglected,
reinforcement resists all tension
• Applied resses serv ce ds ≤ ed
resses f≤
15 17
Allowable Stresses (ASD) Material Properties
depend on Code – 1.8
• specified masonry compressive strength , fm’ • chord modulus of elasticity
– compressive strength of masonry units – 700 fm’ for clay masonry
– mortar type – 900 fm’ for concrete masonry
• bond pattern • thermal expansion coefficients for
• unit type- hollow, or solid clay and concrete masonry
• extent of grouting • moisture expansion coefficient for
• slenderness clay masonry
• type of stress –flexure-tension-compression- • creep coefficients for clay and
shear- etc concrete masonry
18 20
General Analysis Composite vs. noncomposite

Considerations construction
• Load distribution and deformation - elastic
analysis based on uncracked sections – • Masonry can have more than one wythe
(thickness)
except beam defl. (Ieff in Commentary) • Multiwythe walls may be designed for :
• member stresses and actions -calculated on – Composite action , or noncomposite action
minimum critical sections - (reinforced – • Composite action requires that collar joints
cracked). be :
• member stiffness calculated based on • Crossed by connecting headers , or filled
with mortar or grout and connected by ties
average sections.
• Code 2.1.5.2.2 limits shear stresses on
• For CMU – See Tek Note 14-1B Section collar joints or headers – 5 psi for mortar, 10
Properties (www.ncma.org) psi for grout, (Header strength)1/2
19 21
Stresses -composite action Stresses with noncomposite action
Code Commentary - Fig. 2.1.1 Code Commentary - Fig. 2.1-3
collar joint filled Assumed

collar joint open
stress
distribution in
lateral lateral multiwythe
load lateral lateral
load
load noncomposite
load
walls
Horizontal Bending
tension parallel to bed joints
Vertical Bending Horizontal Bending
tension normal to bed joints tension parallel to bed joints Vertical Bending
tension normal to bed joints
22 24
If not a composite Multi- Ch 2.3 in MSJC-ASD

wythe Masonry Wall Reinforced Masonry
ASSUMPTIONS
• Horizontal in - plane loads and • Masonry in flexural tension is cracked
• Reinforcing steel is needed to resist
gravity loads resisted to wythe
tension
applied to only • Linear elastic theory
• Weak – axis bending moments are • No minimum required steel area
distributed to each wythe in • Wire joint reinforcement can be used as
proportion to flexural stiffness flexural reinforcement
• No unity or interaction equation -use
Interaction Curves
23 25
Allowable axial compressive
Allowable stresses steel
capacity
Tension Code Equations ( 2-17 ) and ( 2-18 )
Grade 40 or 50 20,000 psi Slenderness reduction factors are the
Grade 60 24,000 psi same as unreinforced masonry .
Wire joint reinforcement 30,000 psi
• Compression h
2
h
– Only reinforcement that is laterally tied Pa = (0.25 f An + 0.65 Ast Fs ) 1 −
'
m for 99
( Section 2.1.6.5 ) can be used to resist 140r r
compression
– Allowable compressive stress = 0.4 , 2
but not greater than 24,000 psi 70r h
Pa = (0.25 f An + 0.65 Ast Fs )
'
m for > 99
h r
26 28
Axial Compression in Bars Can be

Allowable axial compression accounted for ONLY if tied as:
Code 1.14.1.3 :
• ASD reinforced allowable compressive • (a) Longitudinal reinforcement -enclosed by lateral
capacity is expressed in terms of force ties at least ¼ in dia.
rather than stress
• (b) Vertical spacing of ties 16 db , 48 dties, or least
• Allowable capacity (masonry+ compressive cross-sectional dimension of the member.
reinforcement)
• (c) Lateral ties have requirement to enclose bar have
• Max. compressive stress in masonry from o
splices and included angle of <135 . Can be in
axial load & bending ≤ ( 1/3 ) fm’ mortar
• Axial compressive stress must not exceed • (d). ½ spacing at top and bottom.
allowable axial stress from Code 2.2.3.1
• (e) terminated within 3” of beams
27 29
Amount of masonry effective around
ASD Reinforced Masonry-
each bar is limited by code Singly Reinforced
For running - bond masonry , or masonry C
with bond beams spaced no more than 48
in. center – to – center , the width of masonry
M
in compression per bar for stress jd V
fv bdx
calculations less than or = to :
– Center – to - center bar spacing T
– Six times the wall thickness ( nominal )
n = Es/Em and from equil. k = ( n ) 2 + 2( n ) − n
– 72 in . Ms= Asfsjd (at the limit) = AsFsjd
j =1− k /3
As
Now in Code 1.9.6 Mm = ½ bjkd2fm (at limit)= ½ bjkd2Fb
=
bd
30 32
Example Design Masonry Flexure (ASD)

Given A lintel – Over a door in a 8 CMU wall –
Code Section 1.13 Beams Only Max moment = 370 kip.in V = 8 kips
Assume by tests f’m = 2000 psi
• span = clear span plus depth ≤ than
distance between support centers
• minimum bearing length = 4 in .
• lateral support on beam compression
face at a maximum spacing of 32 • Assume that the beam is sized for shear
• try four courses h ~ 32
times the beam thickness ( nominal ) • As req = M/Fsjd = 370000/ (24000x0.9x27.8)
• must meet deflection limits of Code = 0.62 in2
• Try 2 - #5 rebar As =0.62 in2
1.13.3 – gives Ieff and lets you ignore Guess j=0.9
• n= Es/Em = 29000000/(900)(2000)= 16.11
deflection for Span ≤ 8d
31 33
Design Masonry Wall Flexure
Lintel Design Out-of-Plane
per foot of wall - assume j=0.9 and d = t/2 = 7.625/2=3.81”
k =[(nρ)2+2(nρ)]1/2-nρ =0.2635
0.2635 j =1-.2635/3
0.2635/3 =0.912
0.912 As req = M/Fsjd = 455.6 x 12/(24000x0.9x3.81) = 0.066in2
0.912 377
b
0.912 0.2635
522
Try - #5 rebar at 56 OC ”As =0.31 in2
As/ft ~0.066 in2/ft
OR
The Mm = ½ Fb x b x k x j x d2 Check section – Effective width= 6t = 48, or s=56 or 72
Mm = ½ 2000/3 x 7.625 x 0.263 x 0.912 x (27.8)2
Mm = 471.1 kips.in > 377 - Steel stress governs
ρ= As/bd = 0.31/48(3.81)=0.001695,
• Problem types- Could ask you to calculate moment capacity , n= 29000000/(900(1500)) =21.48
or select the number of # 5 bars need to resist load, etc.
34 36
Design Masonry Wall Flexure Design Masonry Wall Flexure

Out-of-Plane Out-of-Plane
k =[(nρ)2+2(nρ)]1/2-nρ =0.236 j =1-k/3 = 0.921
W = 20 psf
13.5 ft
Ms = AsjdFs=0.31(.921)(3.81)(24000)/12= 2176 lb.ft
Fb = 1/3 f’m = 1500/3 = 500 psi
Mm =1/2(.921)(.236)48(3.81)2(500)/12 = 3155 lb.ft

Try a reinforced 8” CMU f’m = 1500 psi, Grade 60 rebar
.6D +W governs at mid-height – per ft of wall
Ms governs since 2176 is less than 3155 and is greater
Mmax = 20(13.5)2/8 than the applied moment= 455.6 * 56/12 = 2126 lb.ft
Mmax = 455.6 lb.ft per ft of wall
35 37
Design Masonry Wall Flexure Allowable Stress Interaction
Out-of-Plane Diagrams- Flexural
Compression Members
• To design reinforced walls under combined
loading must construct interaction diagram
Check depth of Neutral Axis -
• stress is proportional to strain ; assume
kd = 0.236(3.81) = 0.90 the face shell of a 8 CMU is plane sections remain plane ; vary stress
1.25” ( stress ) gradient to maximum limits and
So compression stresses are in face shell and partial position of neutral axis and back
grouting is possible without recalculation.
calculate combinations of P and M that
Use - #5 at 56” OC
38
would generate this stress distribution 40
Design Masonry Wall Flexure Out-

Allowable Stress Interaction
of-Plane – Partial Grouting Diagrams
• Assume single reinforced
• Out-of-plane flexure
You would need to sum
• Grout and masonry the same
the moment produced
by each couple or just • Solid grouted
limit the moment to the • Steel in center
flange stresses.
CL
39 41
Allowable Stress Interaction Allowable Stress Interaction
Diagrams Walls - Singly Reinforced Diagrams Walls - Singly Reinforced
• allowable – stress interaction diagram Assume Stress gradient- Range B –
Not All Section in compression- but no
• Linear elastic theory – tension in masonry tension in steel
it is ignored- Plane sections remain plane Get equivalent force-couple about center
• Limit combined compression stress to Fb line
= 1/3 F’m Pb = Cm = 0.5(fm1)αtb

• P M b = em x C m
em =d-αt/3 = t/2-αt/3 =t(1/2-α/3)
• d usually = t/2 - no compression steel
This is valid until steel goes into tension
since not tied – ignore in compression Set fm1 = Fb at limit
42 44
Allowable Stress Interaction Allowable Stress Interaction

Diagrams Walls - Singly Reinforced Diagrams Walls - Singly Reinforced
Assume Stress gradient- Range C –
Assume Stress gradient- Range A –
Section in compression- tension in steel
All Section in compression Get equivalent force-couple about center line
Get equivalent force-couple about
em =d-αt/3 = t/2-αt/3 =t(1/2-α/3)
center line
Cm = 0.5(fm1)αtb
Pc = Cm –Ts & Ts = As x fs
Pa= 0.5(fm1+fm2)An From similar triangles on stress diagram
αt fs/n
Ma= (fm1-fm2)/2 (S) S = bd2/6 fs/n= ([d-αt]/αt)fm1
Note at limit – fm1 and fm2 ≤Fb (set Mb= em x Cm –Ts(d-t/2) note that d=t/2 usually
so second term goes to zero
fm1=Fb)
At limit fs = Fs and fm1 = Fb one or the other
Note much of this is from Masonry governs
Course notes By Dan Abrams 43 45
Allowable Stress Interaction ASD Interaction Diagrams Walls -
Diagrams Walls - Singly Reinforced Singly Reinforced Example
OUT-OF PLANE - No Comp
NO GOOD ABOVE P CUT OFF Allowable Stress In
Axial Load P
Inputs
Capacity envelop letting fm1 = Fb Bar Spacing (in) 16 Outputs
t (in) 7.625
P cut off Eq 2-17 or 2-18 f'm (ksi) 1.5 fm1 (psi) fm2 (psi) α Cm (kips) εm Ts (kips) P (kips) M (Kip.in)
Range A Fs (ksi) 24 500.00 500.00 - 61.00 - - 61.00 0.00
d 3.8125 Range "A" 500.00 250.00 - 45.75 - - 45.75 19.38
A s per b eff 0.31 500.00 0.00 - 30.50 - - 30.50 38.76
Eff. Width (b) 16 Compression Range "B" 500.00 - 0.75 22.88 1.91 - 22.88 43.61
Range B face shell (in) 1.25 Controls 500.00 - 0.50 15.25 2.54 - 15.25 38.76
wall height (ft) 16.67 500.00 - 0.40 12.20 2.80 0.83 11.37 34.11
Calculated values Range "C" 500.00 - 0.25 7.63 3.18 3.33 4.30 24.23
Can get a three point interaction 2 500.00 - 0.20 6.10 3.30 4.99 1.11 20.16
diagram easily An (in ) 122
3 478.82 - 0.15 4.38 3.43 7.44 -3.06 15.03
Most walls have low axial loads Sn (in ) 155.04 Tension 494.94 - 0.15 4.63 3.42 7.44 -2.81 15.86
r per b (in) 2.20 Controls 372.41 - 0.13 2.84 3.49 7.44 -4.60 9.92
R 0.579 0.00 18.89
Capacity Fb (psi) 500.00 P alone 216.98 216.98 26.47 0.00
envelop letting Range C Em (ksi) 1350 Includes R 26.47 43.61
n 21.481481
fs = Fs M alone Ms 24.86
Capacity envelop letting fm1 = Fb ρ 0.005082 Mm 18.89 0
ρn 0.1091682
k 0.3706798
kd 1.4132166
Ms Mm
Moment M Unit Type Block'
46 48
ASD Interaction Diagrams Walls - ASD Interaction Diagrams Walls -

Singly Reinforced Example Singly Reinforced Example Plot of Allowable Stress Interaction Diagram
Construct the interaction diagram for a solidly grouted 8” 70.00
CMU Wall, f’m = 1500 psi, with height 16.67 ft and grade 60
#5 rebar at 16” OC. Also see if the wall is adequate for the 60.00
loads below. Assume pinned top and bottom of the wall. 50.00
40.00
P M P vs. M
D+.75L+.75W @ mid-height
30.00
D+L @ top
Pmax Pmax
.6D+W @ mid-height
(kip) (k*in) 20.00
D+.75L+.75W @ mid- 10.00
height 2.072 9.204

0.00
D+L @ top 2 5.5 0.00 20.00 40.00 60.00
.6D+W @ mid-height 0.642667 13.33 -10.00

M (kip in)
47 49
What would happen to previous Shear in Reinforced Masonry
problem if I increased the steel size? - ASD
Possible Answers- IN DESIGN
A. Nothing First Assume masonry resists all shear
B. The entire capacity curve would shift • Check shear stress ≤Allowable masonry
up and to the right. shear stress in flexural members is given
C. The moment capacity governed by in Code Eq. ( 2-24 )
steel stress would increase but this • Allowable masonry shear stress in shear
would not increase the wall capacity walls is given in Code Eqs. ( 2-25 ) and
D. The lower section of the curve would (2-26) , and depends on (M/ Vd) ratio
shift to the right (increase M).
50 52
Possible Wall Breadth Exam Problems ASD - Reinforced Masonry - Shear

a) Given a non load bearing wall with out–of- (No shear reinf- masonry resists all shear)
plane loading (wall size and f’m). Size rebar dx
placed in center of wall. Assume steel C C + dC
governs j=.9 and set Ms= Mmax.Applied find As
check Mm. Iterate if needed.
b) Given a wall configuration – size of units, M M + dM
rebar location and size etc. Find Max jd V V + dV
fv bdx
Moment capacity. Get smaller of Mm or Ms. µdb dx = bond force
c) Given a wall configuration – size of units, T T + dT
rebar location and size etc. Find axial load V V
fv = = applied shear stress
capacity. Eq 2-17 or 2-18 (slide 29) bjd bd
51 53
REINFORCED MASONRY ASD of Reinforced Masonry -Shear
SHEAR STRESSES (Shear reinf. Steel resists all shear)
s
V Vs
fv = = applied shear stress (2 - 23) Vm
C Av =
bd d Vaggregate Fs d
Vs = Av fs
T
V Vdowel
V
fv = = applied shear stress Must still be checked Fv
bd
54 56
Shear Stresses Shear stress

• Shear walls : • if shear reinforcement used to resist
< 1 (h/d) for cantilevers all the shear , the masonry shear
stress is also still limited:
• For flexural members (BEAMS AND
WALLS OUT-OF-PLANE):
55 57
Look at Shear Wall Design
Shear Walls Shear Stress
Shear walls • Check Wall Segments under
For < 1 In -Plane Loads
• Distribute Load to Shear wall
lines – Either by Trib. Width
or Rigid Diaphragm analysis.
1
• Distribute Line load to each
segment w.r.t. relative
rigidity.
58 60
For example Shear wall in a single

Shear Reinforcement Design story Building Shear Wall Ex1 –
(Lateral Loads Breadth or Depth) 7 North Wall 8
2 VD1N2
Diaphragm
East Wall 2
1 1
North Wall
A 1
VD1N1 VD2N1
• Shear reinforcement as per Eq. 2- Plan of Typical Big VD1E2 VD1E1
Box - single story

30 - parallel to shear force - Flexible diaphragm
maximum spacing of / 2 or 48 in East Wall 1
• One - third of is required

West Wall Diaphragm
2
See MDG for Load

perpendicular to the applied force determination and
-spaced at no more than 8 ft distribution to
shear wall lines -
Flex Diaphragm –
SDC- D
E
South Wall VD2S
59 61
VD2W VD2E1
Shear Wall Loads Distribution
Shear Wall Load Distribution
Segments get load w.r.t. relative k
160.8 kips
Diaphragm
Shear
doe to
seismic
62 64
Shear Wall Loads Distribution Shear Wall Load Distribution

Segments get load w.r.t relative k
• For Cantilevered Shear wall segments
• For Fixed-Fixed Shear wall segments
1.715
Vi = 160.8
10.687
63 65
Segment 2 Designed in later Example
Design of Reinforced Masonry (ASD) P-M Diagrams ASD-In Plane
In Plane Loading (shear Walls)
• Initially assume fm = Fb and Neutral Axis
Axial Force • then same as out-of-plane but area and S are
V based on Length = d and t = b use OOP equations
in Range A and B.
• Adjust αL as before until rebars start to go into
tension
h • Determine fsi from similar triangles & get Ti
• Check extreme fsi Fs & fm Fb
• Cm = αL x b x ½ Fb (or fm when fsn = Fs)
• M capacity ( about center)= (Ti x (di -L/2) + Cm
L 66
x(L/2 – c/3)) 68
ASD Design of Reinforced Masonry -In Reinforced Masonry Shear Walls - ASD
Plane Loading (Shear Walls) Axial Force ~ 0
V
• Still use interaction diagrams
• Axial Load is still dealt with as out
of plane (M=0)
h
• In plane load produces moment and
thus moment capacity is dealt with
slightly differently
L V= base shear
P M = overturning moment
67 69
Moment only ASD In Plane
Reinforced Masonry Shear Walls - ASD
• Flexure Only P = 0 on diagram
V Multiple rebar locations • To locate Neutral Axis – Guess how many
bars on tension side – As*
• Find d* (centroid of tension bars) and

h ρ*=As*/bd*
• Get k* = ((ρ*n)2 + 2ρ*n)1/2 – nρ*
L
• Unless tied ignore compression
V= base shear
M = over turning moment P- self weight only ignore
70 72
Reinforced Masonry Shear Walls – ASD

(P =0) Can use the singly reinforced equations Moment only ASD In Plane
di – location to centroid of each bar
Tension Compression
• Check k* d* to ensure assume tension

fsn/N<= Fs/N d*– location centroid of all bars in tension
bars correct – iterate if not
f*si/N
k*d*
fsi/N fsi/N fsi/N fsi/N
fsi/N fsi/N
fsi/N
fsi/N
Fs1/N
Fsc/N
fm
• Determine fsi from similar triangles and Ti
Tsn= Fs As Ti Ti Ti Ti Ti Ti Ti Ti T1
Cm
• M capacity ( about C)= (Ti x (di –

L V= base shear k*d*/3))
M = over turning moment 71 73

Shear Wall Example 2 Shear Wall Example 2
Geometry:
typical wall element: #5 bar (typ)
25 ft – 4 in. total height

3 ft – 4 in. parapet VD
24 ft length between
control joints 4” 8” 8” 24” 24”
8 in. CMU grouted solid: VP

25’-4”
80 psf dead Assume the rebar in the wall are as shown

22’-0”
12’-8”
f’m = 1500 psi

– Axial load is legible – ignore
- To simplify assume that only three end
24’-0”
bars are effective (only lap these to
foundation)
74 76
Shear Wall Example 2 Shear Wall Example 2

West Wall seismic load condition
Vdiaphragm= 25,800lb acting 22 ft above foundation
Vpier = 8,100lb acting 12.7 ft above foundation
8 in. CMU grouted solid (maximum possible dead load)
Pbase = 80lb/ft2 x 25.3 ft x 24 ft = 48,6 00 lb
Vertical Seismic: Vpier = 0.2 SDSD= (-0.2 (1.11)(48,600 )=10,800 lb
ASD Load Combination 0.6 D + 0.7 E
P = 0.6 x 48,600 + 0.7 x-0.2 (1.11) (48,600 ) = 21,600lb
M = 0.6 x 0 + 0.7 x (25,800 lb x 22ft + 8,100lb x 12.7ft)
= 469,000lb-ft = 5,630,000 lb in.
V = 0.6 x 0 + 0.7 x (25,800 lb + 8,100lb) = 23,700 lb
75 77
Shear Wall Design
Calculate j and k :
Shear Wall Design
As 0.93in 2
= =
bd 7.63 in 276 in
= 0.000442 n = 21.5 0.000442 = 0.00950 So the Final Design – can use the # 5 at
k = 2n + n
2
− n = 2 0.00950 + (0.00950) 2 − 0.00950 = 0.129
the ends of the wall – ignoring any bars
k 0.129
that will likely be there for out-of-plane
j = 1− =1− = 0.957
3 3 loading
You need to get stress at centroid based on extreme bar fs = FS
276-kd #5 bar (typ)
x 24,000 = 23607 psi
280 − kd
M = 0.93in 2 23607 lb in 2 0.957 276 in = 5,799,000 lb − in > 5,630,000 lb − in ok
Check masonry compression
4” 8”
Fb = 1 f m = 1 1500 lb in 2 = 500 lb in 2
' 8” 24” 24”
3 3
2 M 2 5,630,000 lb − in
M = 1 b d 2k j fb ∴ fb = = = 157 lbpsii
2 2
bd k j 7.63 in (276 in) 2 0.129 0.957
78 80
Possible Breadth Exam Problems

Shear Wall Example 2
a) Given a diaphragm shear line load determine
the critical shear and overturning moment
on a shear wall segment. SW Ex1.
b) Given a shear wall segment size and rebar
config. find max. diaphragm shear at top of
wall. SW Ex2-just back calculate V after
setting applied stresses = Allowable stress
values. Look at both shear and flexure take
lowest resulting V.
c) Given a SW segment loading, wall size and
rebar location, select size of bars needed.
SW Ex 2. Flexure only-assume Ms governs
79
find As check Mm. 81
Minimum reinforcement for detailed
Seismic Detailing Code -1.17 plain shear walls and SDC C
roof connectors roof #4 bar (min) within
As per BC or ASCE 7 diaphragm 16 in. of top of parapet
• Define Seismic Design Category ASCE 7 IBC – 4 ft usual
Top of Parapet
• SDC determines #4 bar (min) @
– required types of shear walls diaphragms
continuous through
– prescriptive reinforcement for other #4 bars around
openings
24 in. or 40 db
past opening
control joint
masonry elements (non Participating walls – #4 bar (min)

#4 bar (min) within 8 in. of
must be isolated) within 8 in. all control joints
of corners &
– Type of design allowed for Lat. Force ends of walls
resisting system – Note for Special Shear control joint
walls Vcapacity ≥ 1.5 x Vapplied. #4 bars @ 10 ft oc & within #4 bars @ 10 ft oc or 2 leg W1.7
16 in. of openings joint reinforcement @ 16 in. oc
82 84
Min. Reinf., SW Types- etc -Commutative

SW Type Minimum Reinforcement SDC MSJC 1.14
• Seismic Design Category D
Empirically None- Drift limits and connection force A
– Masonry - part of lateral force – resisting
Designed
system must be reinforced so that ρv + ρh
Ordinary None- same as A A, B 0.002 , and ρv and ρh 0.0007
Plain
Detailed Vertical reinforcement = 0.2 in.2 at corners, A, B – Type N mortar & masonry cement mortars are
Plain within 16 in. of openings, within 8 in. of prohibited in the lateral force – resisting
movement joints, maximum spacing 10 ft; system
horizontal reinforcement W1.7 @ 16 in. or #4
in bond beams @ 10 ft – Shear walls must meet minimum prescriptive
requirements for reinforcement and
Ordinary same as above A, B,
Reinforced C
connections ( special reinforced )
Intermediate same as above, but vertical reinforcement @ A, B, – Other walls must meet minimum prescriptive
Reinforced 4 ft C requirements for horizontal and vertical
Special same as above, but horizontal reinforcement any reinforcement
Reinforced @ 4 ft, and ρ = 0.002 – no stack bond
83 85
Minimum reinforcement for special
reinforced shear walls -running bond Thank you for your attention!
roof connectors roof #4 bar (min) within
@ 48 in. max oc diaphragm 16 in. of top of parapet
Top of Parapet
#4 bars around 24 in. or 40 db

#4 bar (min) @
diaphragms
continuous through
control joint
Any questions?
openings past opening
#4 bar (min)
#4 bar (min) within 8 in. of
within 8 in. all control joints
of corners &
ends of walls
control joint
#4 bars (min) @ smallest of Asvert > 1/3 Asv #4 bars min @ smallest of
4 ft , L/3, or H/3 (int. SW just 4 ft) Asvert + Asv 4 ft , L/3, or H/3 (int. SW just 4 ft)
Asvert or Asv 007Ag Hook to vert.
86 88

a) Select type of shear wall for a given
SDC
b) Define prescriptive detailing Steel Design
requirements needed for a specific
shear wall type and SDC.
Terry Weigel
Phone # : 502.445.8266
87
Thirteenth
Edition
SCM - Steel ASCE 360 - Required Strength

Construction Specification
Manual for Structural
Steel
Buildings
2 4
Contents of Presentation Required Strength

ASCE 360 Chapter C – elastic analysis
Required strength 1- General second-order analysis
Tension and block shear rupture 2- Second-order analysis by amplified
Comparison of LRFD and ASD first-order elastic analysis
Combined forces (beam-columns) (moment magnification)
Column base plates 3 - Direct Analysis Method – Appendix 7
Beam bracing
Ratio of second-order drift to first
End plate moment connections
order drift not greater than 1.5, may
Column stiffening use methods 1,2, or 3. Otherwise, must
use method 3.
3 5
Required Strength Amplified First-Order Elastic
Analysis
With ASCE 360-10 the Direct Design
method moves to Chapter C and (1) and B1 and B2 are moment magnifiers intended to account for
(2) move to Appendix 7. secondary effects
Pnt first-order axial force assuming no lateral translation
Plt first-order axial force caused by lateral translation
M nt first-order moment assuming no lateral translation
M lt first-order moment caused by lateral translation
Pe is the Euler buckling load
6 8
Amplified First-Order Elastic Amplified First-Order Elastic

Analysis ASCE 360 Section C2.1b - Page 16.1-21 Analysis
M r = B1M nt + B2 M lt C2 - 1a Cm coefficient for use with no translation case
Pr = Pnt + B2 Plt C2 - 1b
Cm For no transverse loads between supports in the plane of bending
B1 = 1 use Pr = Pnt + Plt C2 - 2
P Cm = 0.6 - 0.4 M 1 M 2 C2 - 4
1- r
Pe1
M1 M 2 moment ratio for reverse curvature
1
B2 = C2 - 2 M1 smaller moment
Pnt
1- M2 larger moment
Pe 2
=1 LRFD
For transverse loads between supports in the plane of bending
Pnt total vertical load supported by the story,
Cm determined by analysis see Commentary Section C2.1b
including any gravity load columns
Cm = 1 conservative
7 9
Amplified First-Order Elastic Required Strength Example
Analysis A W14x109 section of A992 steel is part
Pe1 =
2
EI
C2-5 (assume no sidesway)
of an unbraced frame consisting of
K1 L
2
twenty columns per story. A factored
K1 effective length factor in plane of bending first-order analysis produced an axial
non-translation case loads of 450 k (1.2 + 0.5 ) and 200
use 1 unless a smaller value can be justified (1.6 ). The non-sway moments ( )
by analysis under (1.2 + 0.5 ) are 100 k-ft and 80
(at each end of the column causing
single curvature). The sway moments
( ) under 1.6 are 200 k-ft at each
end of the column. For the story in which
the column resides, S = 20,000 k.
10 12
Amplified First-Order Elastic Required Strength Example

Analysis EI 2
Pe 2 =
K2 L
2
C2-6a (for sidesway)
The allowable story drift index is
or Pe 2 =RM
L
H C2-6b
0.002 under the total under
DH
unfactored wind forces = 100 .
K2 effective length factor in plane of bending
translation case
The column is 14 ft long, and =
See Commentary Table C-C2.2, Page 16.1-240 1.5. Compute the required design
2
EI
all columns in the story
forces for this column.
2
K2 L
DH first order interstory drift caused by lateral forces
The column weak axis is not
H story shear produced by lateral forces used
to calculate D H
considered in this example.
11 13
Required Strength Example Required Strength Example
Evaluate B2 x using C2-6b
1
L DH = = 500
0.002
RM 1.0 braced frame systems
RM 0.85 moment frame systems
larger value may be used if justified by analysis
L
Pe 2 x = RM H = 0.85 500 500 k = 212, 500 k
DH
1 1
B2 x = = = 1.104
Pnt 1 20,000 k
1- 1-
Pe 2 x 212,500 k
14 16
Required Strength Example Required Strength Example

M1 80 k-ft Pr = Pnt + B2 x Plt = 450 k + 1.104 200 k
Cmx = 0.6 - 0.4 = 0.6 - 0.4 - = 0.92
M2 100 k-ft
= 670.1 k
2
2
EI x 29, 000 ksi 1240 in 4 M r = B1x M nt + B2 x M lt = 1 100 k ft + 1.104 200 k ft
Pe1x = 2
= 2
= 12, 600 k
K1x L 1 14 ft 12 in ft = 320.1 k ft
For calculation of Pe1 x , sidesway is assumed not to occur With this problem K 2 x = 1.5 is not used. Equation C2-6b
and thus K1x = 1. is used to calculate Pe 2 x , and that equation does not use
Cmx 0.92 K2 x .
B1 x = = = 0.970 < 1\ use 1
Pr 1 450 k + 200 k
1- 1-
Pe1 x 12, 600 k
15 17
Required Strength Example Tension Members
Evaluate B2 x using C2-6a
2
EI Yield limit state
Pe 2 =
K2 L
2
Fracture limit state
The approach requires that the Euler buckling load Net area
be known for all columns in the story. Assume that
all columns on the story are W14x109.
Effective net area
2
29, 000 ksi 1240 in 4
Block shear rupture limit state
Pe 2 x = 20 2
= 111, 600 k
1.5 14 ft 12 in ft
1 1
B2 x = = = 1.218
Pnt 1 20,000 k
1- 1-
Pe 2 x 111, 600 k
18 20
Calculating Block Shear

Tension Members
Rupture Strength
19 21
Block Shear Strength BSR Notation
ASCE 360 Section J4.3 Page 16.1-112
Design strength = Rn
Rn = 0.6 Fu Anv + U bs Fu Ant 0.6 Fy Agv + U bs Fu Ant
Agv = gross area subject to shear, in 2
= 0.75 Agt = gross area subject to tension, in 2
U bs = 1 when the tensile stress is uniform
U bs = 0.5 when the tensile stress is non-uniform
Anv = net area subject to shear, in 2
Ant = net area subject to tension, in 2
22 24
Ubs Tension Analysis Example

Figure C-J4.2 Determine if a W12x45 of A992
Page 16.1-352 steel is adequate for the following
loads: = 90 k, = 130 k, = 145 k
The member is connected to a gusset
plate as shown.
Use 3/4 inch
bolts - 4 rows
3 bolts each
row.
23 25
Tension Analysis Example
Page 1-24
SCM
26 28
Tension Analysis Example Tension Analysis Example

Determine the maximum load effect
1.4 D = 1.4 90 = 126 k
Steel properties: Fy= 50 ksi Fu= 65 ksi
1.2 D + 1.6 L +0.5 Lr or S or R =
W section properties: 1.2 90 k + 1.6 130 k = 316 k
A = 13.1 in2; bf = 8.05 in; tf = 0.575 in 1.2 D + 1.6W + 0.5L + 0.5 Lr or S or R
= 1.2 90 k + 1.6 145 k + 0.5 130 k =
405 k Controls
See footnote 1 page 2-8 of SCM for more information

on the load factor to use with .
27 29
Yield and Fracture Limit States Block Shear Rupture Limit State
T = t Ag Fy = 590 k > 405 k Ok
t n
T = t Ae Fu = 460 k > 405 k Ok

t n
8.05 in - 5.5 in
Agt = 0.575 in
2
= 0.7331 in 2
Agv = 2.5 in + 3 in + 3 in 0.575 in = 4.887 in 2
1
Ant = 0.7331 in 2 - 0.5 0.75 in + in 0.575 in = 0.4815 in 2
8
1
Anv = 4.887 in 2 - 2.5 0.75 in + in 0.575 in = 3.629 in 2
8
30 32
Block Shear Rupture

Block Shear Rupture Areas
Limit State
U bs = 1 see Commentary Figure C-J4.2 Page 16.1-352
There are four BSR planes; calculate for one plane and multiply
by four:
Rn = 0.6 Fu Anv + U bs Fu Ant 0.6 Fy Agv + U bs Fu Ant
0.6 Fu Anv + U bs Fu Ant =
0.6 65 ksi 3.629 in 2 + 1 65 ksi 0.4815 in 2 = 172.8 k controls
0.6 Fy Agv + U bs Fu Ant =
0.6 50 ksi 4.887 in 2 + 1 65 ksi 0.4815 in 2 = 177.9 k
t Rn = 0.75 4 172.8 k = 518.4 k > 405 k Ok
31 33
Members Subjected to
ASD/LRFD Comparison
Combined Forces
34 36
ASD/LRFD Comparison Combined Forces Notation

Compare for the limit state of tension yield Pr = required axial compressive strength k - see ASCE 360 Section C2.1b
Nominal strength calculation is idential for both methods Pn = nominal compressive strength k - see ASCE 360 Section E3
LRFD Pc = P = design axial compressive strength k
c n
t Pn = 0.9 Pn c = resistance factor for compression = 0.90

ASD b = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90
M r = required flexural strength k in - see ASCE 360 Section C2.1b
Pn P
= n M n = nominal flexural strength k in - see ASCE 360 Section F2
Wt 1.67
Mc = M n = design flexural strength k in
1 b
x = subscript referring to strong axis for bending

Wt
t
y = subscript referring to weak axis for bending

Assume an average LRFD load factor of 1.5
1.5
= 0.898 0.9 = t
1.67
35 37
LRFD Combined Forces LRFD Combined Forces
Provisions Provisions
Pr 8 M rx M ry
+ + 1.0 when
Pr
0.2 (ASCE 360 H1-1a)
Confirm that y-axis buckling controls. If x
Pc 9 M cx M cy Pc axis buckling controls, enter Table 6-1 with
Pr
+
M rx M ry
+ 1.0 when
Pr
< 0.2 (ASCE 360 H1-1b) (KL)y,equiv = (KL)x / (rx/ry).
2 Pc M cx M cy Pc
Equation H1-1b controls for beam-columns with relatively If Cb > 1, adjust the tabular value of bx by
small axial load dividing by Cb. The adjusted value of bx
may not be less than that corresponding to
bMnx = bMpx, or the minimum value of bx
found in Table 6-1. Using Cb = 1 is
conservative.
38 40
LRFD Combined Forces

Combined Forces Example 1
Provisions
Inequalities H1-1a and H1-1b
may be written, Determine if a W14x99 section of
respectively: Table 6-1 A992 steel is adequate to resist the
pP + b M + b M
r x 1.0 rx
Caveats:
y ry following factored loads: = 400 k,
1
2
9
pP + b M + b M
r
8
1.0 x Fy = 50 ksi
rx y ry = 250 k-ft, = 80 k-ft. Use
where: Cb = 1 ( ) = 20 ft, ( ) = 14 ft, = 12 ft,
p=
1
P
Column buckling = 1.0.
c n
8
about the y axis
bx =
9 b M nx
8
by =
9 b M ny
Values of p, bx and by are tabulated in SCM Table 6-1 Page 6-5

39 41
Table 6-1
Combined Forces Example 1 Page 6-69
W14x99
From Table 6-1, Page 6-69, for a W14x99: p = 0.886x10-3 ; bx = 1.38x10 -3 ;

by = 2.85x10-3
rx KL 20 ft
= 1.66 > x
= = 1.429 \ y axis buckling controls
ry KL y
14 ft
Determine which equation applies:
1 1
p= = = 0.886x10 -3 ; Pc = 1130 k
P
c n Pc
Pr 400 k
= = 0.3540 \ Use H1-1a
Pc 1130 k
Evaluate the section:
0.886 x10 -3 400 k + 1.38x10-3 250 k ft + 2.85 x10-3 80 k ft
= 0.927 < 1.0 Ok
A W14x99 is adequate.
rx / ry =1.66
42 44
Table 6-1
Page 6-69
W14x99 Combined Forces Example 2
Determine if a W14x99 section of
A992 steel is adequate to resist the
p = 0.886x10-3
following factored loads: = 400 k,
= 250 k-ft, = 80 k-ft. Use
( ) = 20 ft, ( ) = 14 ft, = 26 ft,
= 1.10.
by = 2.85x10-3
43 45
Table 6-1
Page 6-69
From Table 6-1, Page 6-69, try a W14x99: p = 0.886x10 -3 ; bx = 1.60x10-3 ;
by = 2.85x10 -3
For Cb = 1.10, bx = 1.60x10 -3 1.10 = 1.455x10-3 > 1.38x10-3
\ Use 1.455x10-3
rx KL 20 ft
p = 0.886x10-3 = 1.66 > x
= = 1.429 \ y axis buckling controls
ry KL y
14 ft
Determine which equation applies:
1 1
p= = = 0.886x10 -3 ; Pc = 1130 k
c Pn Pc
Pr 400 k
= = 0.3540 \ Use H1-1a
Pc 1130 k
Evaluate the section:
by = 2.85x10-3 0.886 x10 -3 400 k + 1.455x10 -3 250 k ft + 2.85 x10 -3 80 k ft
= 0.946 < 1.0 Ok
A W14x99 is adequate.
46 48
Table 6-1
Page 6-69
Determine if a W14x99 section of
A992 steel is adequate to resist the
following factored loads: = 200 k,
= 250 k-ft, = 80 k-ft. Use
( ) = 30 ft, ( ) = 14 ft, = 26 ft,
= 1.80.
47 49
Combined Forces Example 3 Combined Forces Example 3
From Table 6-1, Page 6-69, for a W14x99: p = 0.886x10 -3 ;
bx = 1.60x10 -3 ; by = 2.85x10 -3 1 9
pPr + bx M rx + by M ry 1.0
For Cb = 1.80, bx = 1.60x10 -3 1.80 = 0.889x10-3 < 1.38x10 -3 2 8
\ Use 1.38x10 -3 Evaluate the section:
rx
= 1.66 <
KL x
=
30 ft
= 2.143 \ x axis buckling controls 0.977 x10 -3
ry KL 14 ft 200 k
y 2
30 ft 9
Re-enter table with KL y , equiv
= = 18.07 ft 18 ft + 1.38x10 -3 250 k ft + 2.85 x10-3 80 k ft
1.66 8
p = 0.977x10 -3 = 0.742 < 1.0 Ok
Determine which equation applies: A W14x99 is adequate.
1 1
p= = = 0.977x10 -3 ; Pc = 1020 k
P
c n Pc
Pr 200 k
= = 0.1961\ Use H1-1b
Pc 10200 k
50 52
Table 6-1
W14x99
Page 6-69
Column Base Plates
Minimum bx = 1.38x10-3
51 53
A2
Column Base Plates Axially Loaded c Pp = c 0.85 f c' A1
A1
Reference – Base Plate A2

2
A1
Example = 0.60
Fisher, J. M. and Kloiber, L. A., 2006, c
N - 0.95d
Case I - A2 = A1
AISC Design Guide No. 1, m=
Case II - A2 4 A1 2
, Second Edition, AISC, Case III - A1 < A2 < 4 A1
B - 0.80b f
n=
Chicago, IL. 2
4db f Pu
X =
See also pages 14-4 to 14-6 and Section J8, d + bf
2
c Pp
page 16.1-113 SCM 2 X

= 1
1+ 1- X
db f
n' =
4
54 56
Axially Loaded Base Plates Axially Loaded Base Plates

Concentric compressive axial loads
Tensile axial loads
Design of column base plates with
small moments
Design of column base plates with
large moments
Design for shear
55 57
Axially Loaded Base Plates Axially Loaded Base Plates
58 60
Axially Loaded Base Plate

Axially Loaded Base Plates
Example
= max m, n, n '
Design a base plate for a W12x106 ( =
12.9 in; = 12.2 in.) column supporting a
dead load of 300 k and a live load of 400
k. The plate bears on a 30 x 30 in.
concrete pedestal. The concrete
strength is 3 ksi and the column is made
of A992 steel. The base plate is made of
A36 steel.
59 61
Axially Loaded Base Plate Axially Loaded Base Plate
Example P = 1.2 300 k + 1.6 400 k = 1000 k
u
Example
Assume full concrete confinement Case II - A2 4 A1
2
A2 = 30 in = 900 in 2
Use trial and error
Pu 1000 k Try N = 23 in; B = 19 in
A1 reqd = = = 326.8 in 2
2 c 0.85 f c' 2 0.60 0.85 3 ksi A1 = 23 in 19 in = 437 in 2
Optimize base plate dimension N 2 = 30 in
D = 0.5 0.95d - 0.8b f = 0.5 0.95 12.9 in - 0.8 12.2 in B N = 19 in 23 in = 0.8261
= 1.248 in B2 = 0.8261 30 in = 24.78 in
N A1 + D = 301.7 in 2 + 1.248 in = 18.62 in A2 = 30 in 24.78 in = 743.4 in 2

Try N = 19 in A2 743.4 in 2
c Pp = c 0.85 A1 = 0.60 0.85 3 ksi 437 in 2
326.8 in 2 A1 437 in 2
B= = 17.2 in
19 in = 872.1 k < 1000 k
Try B = 18 in
62 64

Example Example
A1 = 19 in 18 in = 342 in 2 > 326.8 in 2
Try 24 in 20 in
Calculate the area A2 geometrically similar to A1
A1 = 24 in 20 in = 480 in 2
Based on the 30 in pier
N 2 = 30 in
N 2 = 30 in
B N = 20 in 24 in = 0.8333
B N = 18 in 19 in = 0.9474
B2 = 0.8333 30 in = 25.0 in
B2 = 0.9474 30 in = 28.42 in
A2 = 30 in 25.0 in = 750.0 in 2
A2 = 30 in 28.42 in = 852.6 in 2
A2 750.0 in 2
852.6 in 2 < 4 304 in 2 = 1216 in 2 \ Case III applies c Pp = c 0.85 A1 = 0.60 0.85 3 ksi 480 in 2
A1 437 in 2
= 962 k < 1000 k
63 65
Example Example
Try 25 in 22 in l = max 5.872 in, 5.120 in, 3.136 in = 5.872 in
A1 = 25 in 22 in = 550 in 2
2 Pu 2 1000 k
tp = n = 5.872 in
N 2 = 30 in Fy BN 0.9 36 ksi 20 in 24 in
B N = 22 in 25 in = 0.8800 = 2.106 in
B2 = 0.8800 30 in = 26.4 in Use 25" 2-1/4" 22"
A2 = 30 in 26.4 in = 792.0 in 2
A2 792.0 in 2
c Pp = c 0.85 A1 = 0.60 0.85 3 ksi 550 in 2
A1 500 in 2
= 1059 k > 1000 k
66 68
Axially Loaded Base Plate

Example
N - 0.95d 24 - 0.95 12.9 in
m= = = 5.872 in
2 2
B - 0.80b f 20 - 0.80 12.2 in
n= = = 5.120 in
2 2
4db f Pu 4 12.9 in 12.2 in 1000 k
Beam Bracing
X = 2
= 2
= 0.9589
d + bf c Pp 12.9 in + 12.2 in 1042 k
2 X 2 0.9589
= 1; = = 1.628 1
1+ 1- X 1 + 1 - 0.9589
db f 12.9 in 12.2 in
n' = = 1 = 3.136 in
4 4
67 69
Beam Bracing Beam Bracing Example
ASCE 360 Appendix 6 – Stability
Determine the bracing requirements for
Bracing for Beams and Columns
the beam system shown. The simply
Lateral bracing
supported beams are A992 W21x62.
Relative
Each bracing truss stabilizes 2-1/2
Nodal
beams. The factored moment in the
Torsional bracing
beams is 350 k-ft. Assume that the x-
Nodal
bracing (relative bracing) is to be
Continuous torsional
designed as a tension only system so
Reference –
that in each panel only one diagonal is
Yura, J. A.,
effective. Bracing consists of A36 rods.
, AISC Engineering Journal,
First Quarter 2001 70 72
Beam Bracing Beam Bracing Example

• A relative brace works by controlling relative
lateral movement between two points along
the span of the girder
• A discrete or nodal bracing is attached to the
beam at discrete points (e.g., guy cables
attached at points along the span)
71 73
Beam Bracing Example
M r = 350 k ft Both strength and stiffness must
Lb = 16 ft be considered!!!
d = 21.0 in
t f = 0.615 in
ho = d - t f = 21.0 in - 0.615 in = 20.39 in
Relative bracing Moment Connections (FR)
Cd = 1 singular curvature Section A6.3.1a
= 0.75 A-6-5
Required brace strength
0.008 350 k ft 12 in ft 1
Pbr = 0.008M r Cd ho = = 1.648 k
20.39 in
2.5 1.648 k = 4.120 k
Perpendicular to
longitudinal axis of beam 74 76
Beam Bracing Example End-Plate Moment

Relative bracing
Connections
Section A6.3.1a Perpendicular to
A-6-6 longitudinal axis of beam
Required brace stiffness
1 4 M r Cd 1 4 350 k ft 12 in ft 1
br = = = 5.722 k in
Lb ho 0.75 16 ft 12 in ft 20.39 in
2.5 5.722 k in = 14.31k in
Brace area to satisfy strength requirement
Ab Fy = Ab 36 ksi = 4.120 k 5; Ab = 0.260 in 2
Brace area to satisfy stiffness requirement
2
AE 1 Ab 29000 ksi
cos 2 = = 14.31k in ; Ab = 0.5296 in 2
L 5 8 ft 12in ft 5
75 77
Moment End-Plate Extended Moment End-Plate
Connections Connections
1. Carter, C. J., 2003, Steel Design Guide No. 13,
, AISC,
Chicago, IL.
2. AISC, 2002, Steel Design Guide No. 16
, AISC, Chicago, IL.
3. Murray. T. M. and Summer, E. A.,2003, Steel

Design Guide No. 4,
, Second
Edition, AISC, Chicago, IL.
78 80
Moment End-Plate
Moment End-Plate Connections
Connection Limit States
Flush
Two-bolt unstiffened
Four-bolt unstiffened 1. Flexural yielding of the beam
Four-bolt stiffened with stiffener between section
tension bolts 2. Flexural yielding of the endplate
Four-bolt stiffened with stiffener inside
tension bolts
3. Yielding of the column panel zone
Extended 4. Tension failure of the endplate
Four-bolt unstiffened bolts
Four-bolt stiffened 5. Shear failure of the endplate bolts
Multiple-row 1/2 unstiffened
Multiple-row 1/3 unstiffened
6. Failure of welds
Multiple-row 1/3 stiffened
79 81
Plate Geometry and Yield
Split-T Model
Beam Pattern
flange
End
plate
Column
flange
82 84
Connection Information Bolt Force Model Split-T
Four-bolt extended unstiffened
Reference 2
No prying force
83 85
Extended Moment End-Plate
Example
A W21x68 beam is to be connected
to a W14x99 exterior column using a four-bolt
unstiffened extended end plate connection.
The moment that must be developed by the
connection is 350 k-ft ( ) and the required
shear resistance is 45 k. The required axial
Beam Side
strength of the column is = 600 k. The
connection will be used in a low-seismic
application ( <= 3). The beam and column are
made of A992 steel and the connection plate is
made of A36 steel. ASTM A325-N snug-tight
bolts are to be used and welds will be made
with E70 electrodes.
86 88
Section and Material Properties Geometric Design Data

r = 1 extended end plate connection
Beam data Column data bp = b fb + 1 in = 8.27 in + 1 in = 9.27 in; Use b p = 9.25 in
Ab = 20.0 in 2 Ac = 29.1 in 2 Material data g = 5.5 in
db = 21.1 in d c = 14.2 in Fy ,b ,c = 50 ksi p fi = 2 in
twb = 0.430 in twc = 0.485 in Fu ,b ,c = 65 ksi p fo = 2 in t fb
b fb = 8.27 in 0.685 in
b fc = 14.6 in Fy , pl = 36 ksi 5 d 0 = db + p fo - = 21.1 in + 2 in - = 22.76 in
d e = 1 in 2 2
t fb = 0.685 in t fc = 0.780 in Fu , pl = 58 ksi 8 t fb 0.685 in
kb = 1.19 in h0 = d 0 + = 22.76 in + = 23.10 in
kc = 1.38 in 2 2
7
k1 = in h tw = 23.5 in Bolt data t fb 0.685 in
8 c d1 = d b - t fb - p fi - = 21.1 in - 0.685 in - 2 in -
1 Ft = 90 ksi 2 2
Workable gage = 5-
1
in Workable gage = 5- in = 18.07 in
2 2
Z xc = 173 in 3 t fb 0.685 in
Z xb = 160 in 3 h1 = d1 + = 18.07 in + = 18.41 in
2 2
87 89
Beam / Plate Configuration Calculate No-Prying Moment
Thick plate - no prying force
M np no prying force moment
Bolt tensile strength
2
1 in
Pt = Ft Ab = 90 ksi = 70.65 k
4
M np = 2 Pt h0 + h1 = 2 70.65 k 22.76 in + 18.07 in
5769 k in
M np = 0.75 5769 k in = 4326 k in > 4200 k in Ok
90 92
Select Bolt Diameter Select End Plate Thickness

End plate yield line mechanism parameter
Note: the symbol is used to represent
both beam depth and bolt diameter. The s=
1
bp g =
1
9.25 in 5.5 in = 3.57 in > p fi = 2.0
meaning of the symbol applies should be 2 2
If p fi > s, use p fi = s
clear from the context.
\ Use p fi = 2.0
Required bolt diameter bp 1 1 1 1
M uc = 350 k ft 12 in ft = 4200 k in Yp = h1 + + h0 - +
2 p fi s p fo 2
2M u 2 4200 k in 2
db ,reqd = = h1 p fi + s =
Ft d 0 + d1 0.75 90 ksi 22.76 in + 18.07 in g
= 0.9852 in 9.25 in 1 1 1 1
18.41 in + + 23.10 in - +
Try d b = 1 in 2 2 in 3.57 in 2 in 2
Minimum p f = 1 + 1 2 = 1.5 in < 2 in Ok 2
18.41 in 2 in + 3.57 in = 154.8
5.5 in
91 93
Select End Plate Thickness - Check End
Flexure Plate
Note: 1.11 insures Thickness –
Required end plate thickness thick plate behavior Shear
1.11 r M np
t p ,reqd =
b Fy , plYp Factored beam flange force
1.11 1.0 4326 k in Mu 4200 k in
= = 0.9785 in Ffu = = = 205.7 k
0.9 36 ksi 154.8 d b - t fb 21.1 in - 0.685 in
Use t p = 1 in Shear yielding in the extended part of the end plate
Rn = 2 0.6 Fy , pl b pt p
= 2 0.9 0.6 36 ksi 9.25 in 1 in = 359.6 k
205.7 k < 359.6 k Ok
94 96
Shear Check End Plate Thickness -

Areas Shear
Shear rupture in the outside row of bolts
1
An = bp - 2 db + t p = 9.25 - 2 1 in + 0.125 in 1 in
8
= 7.0 in 2
Rn = 0.75 0.6 Fu , pl An = 0.75 0.6 58 ksi 7.0 in 2 = 132.7 k
205.7 k
= 102.9 k < 132.7 k Ok
2
95 97
Compression Bolt Shear Rupture Bolt Bearing / Tearout – End
Capacity Plate
Vu = 45 k
Section J6 and
Table J3.2 - AISC 360-05
2
1 in
Rn = nb Fv Ab = 0.75 2 48 ksi = 56.5 k
4
45 k < 56.5 k Ok
98 100
Bolt Bearing / Tearout Capacity Bolt Bearing / Tearout Capacity

in Endplate R = 1.2 L t F 2.4d t F n c p u . pl b p u , pl
in Column
1.2 Lc t p Fu . pl tearout strength
2.4d b t p Fu , pl bearing strength
Compression bolts bearing
Nominal bolt bearing strength - one bolt Tearout not possible
2.4dt p Fu , pl = 2.4 1 in 1 in 58 ksi t fc = 0.780 in
Tearout - one bottom bolt = 139.2 k bolt 2.4dbt p Fu , pl = 2.4 1 in 0.780 in 65 ksi
Lc db - 2 p fi = 21.1 in - 2 2 in = 17.1 in = 121.7 k bolt
Rn = 1.2 Lc t p Fu , pl = 1.2 17.1 in 1 in 58 ksi Rn = 2 0.75 121.7 k = 182.6 k > 45 k Ok
= 1190 k
1190 k > 139.2 k \ bearing controls
Rn = 139.2 k
Capacity for two bolts
Rn = 2 0.75 139.2 k = 208.8 k > 45 k Ok
99 101
Beam Flange to End Plate Weld Beam Web to End Plate Weld
Design Design - Flexure
Minimum fillet weld size 5 16 in Minimum weld size 5 16 in

Weld design force should be equal to the calculated flange force Fybt wb 0.9 50 ksi 0.430 in
D= = = 4.633 sixteenths 5
but not less than 0.6 Fy A fb 2 1.5 1.392 2 1.5 1.392
Ru = Fuf 0.6 Fy Afb Use 5 16 in fillet weld
Fuf = 205.7 k
0.6 Fyb Afb = 0.6 50 ksi 8.27 in 0.685 in = 170.0 k < 205.7 k
Ru = 205.7 k
102 104
Beam Flange to End Plate Weld Beam Web to End Plate Weld
Design Design - Shear
Minimum weld size 5 16 in
Beam flanges to end plate db 21.1 in
Lw = 2 - t fb = 2 - 0.685 in = 19.73 in
Lw = b fb + b fb - twb = 8.27 in + 8.27 in - 0.430 in = 16.11 in 2 2
Vu 45 k
205.7 k D= = = 1.639 sixteenths
D= = 6.115 sixteenths 7 2 1.392 Lw 1.392 19.73 in
1.5 1.392 16.11 in
Minimum weld size controls
Use 7 16 in fillet weld
Page8-8 SCM
103 105
Beam to End Plate Welds Local Tensile Bending in Column
Flange R = b t F C Equation 2.2-9 Reference 1
n
s 2
fc y t
m pe
Rn = 6.25t 2f Fy J10.1 - AISC 360-05

= 0.9; Ct = 1
bs = 2.5 2 p f + t fb = 2.5 2 2 in + 0.685 in = 11.71 in
g db 5.5 in 1 in 7
pe = - - k1 = - - in = 1.625 in
2 4 2 4 8
14 14
pe 1.625 in
m = 1.36 = 1.36 = 1.536
db 1 in
11.71 in 2
Rn = 0.780 in 50 ksi 1 = 142.7 k
1.536 1.625 in
Rn = 142.7 k < 205.7 k \ Column flange needs stiffening
106 205.7 k - 142.7 k = 63.0 k 108
Concentrated Force
on
Column
Flange
Column Side
107 109
Column Local Web Yielding Column Web Crippling
Assume connection not at top of column Ct = 1
AISC Equation J10-4
Rn = Ct 6kc + 2t p + N Fyc twc Equation 2.2-11 Reference 1
Force applied at distance greater than d 2 from end of member
Rn = 5k c + N Fyc twc J10-2 ASCE 360-05 3
N twc EFyct fc
= 1; Ct = 1 Rn = 0.80t 2
wc 1+ 3
dc t fc twc
N = t fb + 0.707aw = 0.685 in + 0.707 0.4375 in = 0.9943 in 2
= 0.75 0.80 0.485 in
Rn = 1 1 6 1.38 in + 2 1 in + 0.9943 in 50 ksi 0.485 in
3
0.9943 in 0.485 in 29000 ksi 50 ksi 0.780 in
= 273.4 k > F fu = 205.7 k 1+ 3
14.2 in 0.780 in 0.485 in
Stiffeners not required
= 226.4 k > Fuf = 205.7 k
110 112
Column Web Buckling Column

Panel
Because this is an exterior column, web buckling of the
column does not need to be checked. If the connection was Zone
to an interior column (beams on each side of the column),
the following check would be performed:
h
h= twc = 23.5 0.485 in = 11.40 in
tw c
3 3
24twc EFyc 0.9 24 0.485 in 29000 ksi 50 ksi
Rn = =
h 11.40 in
= 260.3 k > Fuf = 205.7 k
111 113
Column Panel Zone
AISC 360 - Section J10.6
Pc = Py = Fy Ac = 50 ksi 29.1 in 2 = 1455 k
M u 4200 k in
Vr = Vu = Puf - Vus = = - 0 = 285.7 k neglect story shear Vus
dc 14.7 in
0.4 Pc = 582.0 k < Pr = 600 k
Rn = 0.6 Fy d c twc 1.4 -

Pr Column Stiffening
Pc
600 k
= 0.9 0.6 50 ksi 14.7 in 0.645 in 1.4 -
1455 k
= 252.8 k < 285.7 k
Panel zone shear strength is not adequate -
doubler plates are required
114 116
Column Stiffening Column Stiffening Example

Stiffening requirements for this column are
minimal. It may be more economical to increase In the previous example, change the
the column size to W14x109 rather than column to a W14x90. Design
stiffen the W14x99.
stiffeners for this column.
115 117
Section and Material Properties Column Web Yielding
Unstiffened column capacity
Column data
Assume not at top of column Ct = 1
Ac = 26.5 in 2 Material data
d c = 14.0 in Fy ,b ,c = 50 ksi Rn = Ct 6kc + 2t p + N Fyctwc
twc = 0.440 in Fu ,b ,c = 65 ksi N = tbf + 0.707 aw = 0.685 in + 0.707 0.4375 in = 0.9943 in
b fc = 14.5 in Fy , pl = 36 ksi Rn = 1 1 6 1.31 in + 2 1 in + 0.9943 in 50 ksi 0.440 in
t fc = 0.710 in Fu , pl = 58 ksi = 238.8 k > F fu = 205.7 k
kc = 1.31 in
h tw c
= 25.9 in Bolt data
1 Ft = 90 ksi
Workable gage = 5- in
2
Z xc = 157 in 3
118 120
Local Tensile Bending in Column Column Web Compression Buckling

Flange b This check must be made only if beams frame
Rn = s
t 2fc Fy Ct Equation 2.2-9 Reference 1
m pe into column on two sides.
= 0.9 Unstiffened column capacity
bs = 2.5 2 p f + t fb = 2.5 2 2 in + 0.685 in = 11.71 in h

h= twc = 25.9 0.440 in = 11.40 in
tw
g db 5.5 in 1 in 7 c
pe = - - k1 = - - in = 1.625 in 3 3
2 4 2 4 8 24twc EFyc 0.9 24 0.440 in 29000 ksi 50 ksi
14 14
Rn = =
pe 1.625 in h 11.40 in
m = 1.36 = 1.36 = 1.536 = 194.4 k < Fuf = 205.7 k
db 1 in
Stiffeners are required
11.71 in 2
Rn = 0.710 in 50 ksi 1 = 118.2 k 205.7 k - 194.4 k = 11.3 k (compressive force)
1.536 1.625 in
Rn = 106.4 k < 205.7 k \ Column flange needs stiffening
205.7 k - 106.4 k = 99.3 k tensile force
119 121
Column Web Crippling Stiffener Design – Tensile Force
Unstiffened column capacity Stiffener requirements
1.5 AISC Section J10.8 - Page 16.1-120
N twc EFyct fc
Rn = 0.80twc
2
1+ 3 Stiffeners required to resist tensile forces must be designed
dc t fc twc
in accordance with provisions of Chapter D.
2
= 0.75 0.80 0.440 in The stiffener must be designed to resist the difference
0.9943 in 0.440 in
1.5
29000 ksi 50 ksi 0.710 in between the required strength and the available
1+ 3 limit state strength.
14.0 in 0.710 in 0.440 in
For tension the required stiffener strength is 99.3 k.
= 196.2 k < Fuf = 205.7 k
Stiffeners are required
205.7 k - 196.2 k = 9.5 k (compressive force)
122 124
Column Panel Zone Stiffener Design – Compressive

AISC 360 - Section J10.6 Force
Pc = Py = Fy Ac = 50 ksi 26.5 in 2 = 1325 k
Stiffener requirements
M 4200 k in AISC Section J10.8 - Page 16.1-120
Vr = Puf - Vus = u = - 0 = 300.0 k neglect story shear
dc 14.0 in Stiffeners required to resist compressive forces must be designed
0.4 Pc = 530.0 k < Pr = 600 k in accordance with provisions of Sections E6.2 and J4.4.
P The stiffener must bear on or be welded to the loaded flange
Rn = 0.6 Fy d ctwc 1.4 - r
Pc and welded to the web. Welds must be sized to resist the
600 k difference between the required strength and the limit
= 0.9 0.6 50 ksi 14.0 in 0.440 in 1.4 -
1325 k state strength.
= 157.0 k < 285.7 k For compression the required stiffener strength is 11.3 k
Panel zone shear strength is not adequate
Vu ,dp = 300.0 k - 157.0 k = 143.0 k
123 125
Stiffener Design Doubler Plate Design
99.3 k > 11.5 k
Ru ,dp = 99.3 k
Required capacity = 143.0 k
Ru.st 99.3 k
Ast ,min = = = 3.06 in 2 Vu ,dp 143.0 k
Fy , st 0.9 36 ksi tp =
0.9 0.6 Fy ,dp d c 0.9 0.6 36 ksi 14 in
Prescriptive stiffener requirements
= 0.5254 in
AISC Section J10.8 - Page 16.1-120
Use 5 8" plate
b fb twc 8.27 in 0.440 in
bs - = - = 2.54 in
3 2 3 2
t fb 0.685 in
ts = = 0.3425 in
2 2
bstff 2.54 in
ts = = 0.169 in
15 15
d c 14 in
ls = = 7 in
2 2
126 128
Stiffener Design
1 1
Try two plates 3- " " 7" - A36 - partial depth
4 2
Ast = 2 3.25 in 0.5 in = 3.25 in 2 > 3.06 in 2
Ru , st
ts
0.9 0.6 Fy , st ls - clip 2 Thank You
99.3 k
= = 0.3929 in
0.9 0.6 36 ksi 7 in - 0.5 in 2 Questions?
127 129
NCEES GUIDE
P.E. Structural Exam Review: 1. Vertical Forces Exam Friday Breadth
Timber Design Wood 10% - Sawn beams, Glue-laminated beams,
Columns, Engineered lumber, Bearing walls
Trusses, Bolted, nailed, and screwed connection.
2. Vertical Forces Exam Friday Depth
Mark McGinley 4-1 hour problems may include a Wood Structure.
Phone # : 502.852.4068 3. Lateral Forces Exam- Sat. Breadth
Wood 7.5% -Shear Walls, Plywood Diaphragms and
Sub-diaphragms.
4. Vertical Forces Exam Sat. Depth
4-1 hour problems may include a Timber Structure.
Focus on the Red topics – Use ASD
3
Any timber design experience?

Presentation Outline
– courses or design
Timber Experience-”Via Chat”-How
• Review basics
many at site have
A. Little or None • Address Code issues and basic
B. A Short course and/or a little design
behavior
C. Design simple buildings/elements • Do some simple examples of design
D. Design timber routinely and analysis
E. Design timber in sleep – a timber wiz-
etc.
2 4
As Per NCEES use the NDS -2005 As Per NCEES use the NDS -2005
ASD/LRFD STANDARD ASD/LRFD STANDARD
5 7
As Per NCEES use the NDS -2005

Wood Design Methods
ASD/LRFD STANDARD
•Generally 3 methods used
•Prescriptive – for conventional construction
– limited to typical residential construction –
span and height tables – NOT ADDRESSED
•Allowable Stress Design (ASD)– Engineered
– most common historically [f ≤ Adjusted F]-
In NDS (National Design Standard)
•Load Resistance Factor Design- (LRFD) -
Newer – What I normally teach – Not on
Exam – In NDS
6 8
ASCE 7-05 ASD Load Combinations
• D +F
• D + H+ F+L+T
• D + H +(Lr or S or R)
• D +H+F+0.75(L+T) + 0.75(Lr or S or R)
• D +H+F+(W or .7E)
• D +H+F+0.75(W or .7E) + .75L+0.75(Lr or S or
R)
• 0.6D +W + H
• 0.6D +H + .7E
9 11
10 12
WOOD SYSTEMS AND LIGHT TIMBER SYSTEMS
ELEMENTS
TWO BASIC TYPES OF SYSTEMS
LIGHT TIMBER SYSTEMS
• Plywood Sawn Timber
Trusses and other
• Joists – Sawn timber or EWP engineered products
• Beams - Sawn timber or EWP substituted for
roof/floor joists and
• Stud Walls beams Also Heavy-
Usually design using
• Posts – columns – Pipe columns load tables
13 15
LIGHT TIMBER SYSTEMS

WOOD SYSTEMS AND
ELEMENTS
HEAVY TIMBER SYSTEM
(“POST AND BEAMS”)
•Planks
•Glu-laminated beams and
girders (sometimes Sawn
Sawn Timber Timber)
Sawn Timber
Floor Joists Stud Walls •Glu-laminated columns or
posts
14 16
Wood Beams– Flexural Design Examples for Sawn Timber
5/8" Ply wood sheathing
2 x 10 wood joists @ 16" OC Assume braced by sheathing
(3) 2 x 10 Built up Beams ?
General - Under flexure only

•Check Bending Capacity (fb≤F’bASD)
Under Service Level Loads
•Check Shear Capacity (fv≤F’vASD)
Under Service Level Loads
•Check Deflections ( max ≤max allowed) 16'-0" 16'-0" 16'-0" 16'-0" 16'-0"
Under Service Level Live Loads
From Calculations - Dead Load including joist weight and partitions = 12 psf
Live Load = 40 psf
17 19
Wood Design “Guess and Check” Example Sawn Timber Beam

Get basic layout then
Design Joists – max span – 12 ft
1. Determine span and spacing
Live Load = 40x 16/12= 53.3 lb/ft
2. Determine Load – max unfactored Dead Load = 12 x 16/12 = 16 lb/ft
Shear and Moment. Max moment = 69.3(12)2/8= 1247.4 lb.ft
3. Select size/species to ensure fbmax Now either guess at size of joist or wood
and fvmax ≤ F’bASD and F’VASD. (adjusted species and grade
Allowables) Try a 2 x 10 S= 1.5(9.25)2/6= 21.4 in3
4. Check deflect. – resize or reduce A = 1.5 x 9.25 = 13.9 in2
spacing or span if needed. See Tables in NDS Supplement - Next
18 20
Look at the Check Bending
NDS
Supplement Sawn Timber –Design Equation
fb = Mmax/S ≤ F’bASD
F’bASD = CDCM Ct CL CF Cfu Ci Cr FbASD
FbASD is from the Tables depending
on species, grades, size, grading
rules etc. - See Supplement
21 23
Bending
CM = Tables (4 A,B,C.D,E,F)- See Supplement
= 0.85 or 1.0 for visually graded sawn timber
4A (2or4) or 4D (5x5 or larger) (when EMC >19%
for extended time)
Note CM = 1.0 if (Fb CF) ≤ 1150 psi
o
Ct = 1.0 for T ≤ 100 F (2.3.3 in code)
For 100oF ≤ T ≤ 125o F
= 0.8 (dry) OR 0.7 Wet
For 125o F ≤ T
= 0.7(dry) OR 0.5 Wet
22 24
F’bASD
Cfu = Flat use factor -When lumber is turned flat
Ci = Incising factor – when dimension lumber is

grooved >0.4” & up to 3/8” long - 1100 ft2
Then Ci = 0.8 For Fb, Ft, Fc, Fv
For E and Emin Ci = .95 For all other cond. Ci = 1
25 27
F’bASD F’bASD
CF= For SAWN TIMBER
Cr = repetitive member factor – must have at least
three members, 2-4 thick member spaced up 2’
apart and joined by other members such as floors
then = 1.15, other wise = 1.0.
CD = Duration Factor - see Appendix B – Use

shortest for a given load combo.
26 28
Bending FbASD
CL = Stability factor (braced vs.unbraced beams) Fb = FbASD
See Spec 3.3.3 – CL = 1.0 if braced, blocked, or Values
near square. See requirements of Section 4.4.1 listed in
for sawn timber only Supplement
for varies
species and
grades of
lumber
1.2 E ' min

FbE =
RB2
29 31
Fb – choose from table
30 32
For the Sawn Timber Beam (joist) Example Example Sawn Timber Beam
Fb’ASD req=M/S=(1247.1/21.4 in3)12= 699 psi
A No 1 or 2 SPF 2 x 10 would work
F’bASD = CDCM Ct CL CF Cfu Ci Cr FbASD
Fb= 875 psi
Dry service, normal temps, no incisions Ct=Cm=Ci=1.0
Braced by sheathing so CL = 1.0,
on edge Cfu= 1.0,
(D+L) load CD=1.0
LOOK AT SHEAR DESIGN FOR SAWN
Multiple member so Cr = 1.15, TIMBER BEAMS
CF = 1.1 for #1-3 for 2” width
So FbASD must be ≥ 699/1.15(1.1)
= 553 psi
Choose a species and grade with
FbASD ≥ 553psi
33 35
Fb=FbASD – choose from

Shear Design-Sawn timber
Table 4A
fv ≤ F’vASD
fv=VQ/Ib & For rectangular cross
sections
fvmax = 1.5 (V/A)
F’vASD = CDCM Ct Ci FvASD
CM = 0.97 for shear wet service= 1.0
for dry service
34
The rest is the same for bending 36
Shear Design Deflections
Service Level Loads Deflection
Can reduce Limit live load deflections to L/360 or L/240
shear and -Long term effects – creep-
design for
shear at d
from supports
If notched - look to Section 3.4.3 for

certain conditions or use mechanics
37 39
For Sawn Timber Beam (joist) Sawn Timber Joist Example

Example 2 x 10 wood joists @ 16" OC Assume braced by sheathing
fvmax = 1.5 V/A = (1.5 (69.3)(12)/2)(1/13.9)= 44.9psi (3) 2 x 10 Built up Beams ?
Only CD, Cm and Ct - all = 1.0
SPF (any grade) has a FvASD = 135 psi

F’vASD = CDCM Ct Ci FvASD=1(1)1(1)(135) = 135
OK in Shear – 135 > 44.9
Note should add the weight of the joist and re- 16'-0" 16'-0" 16'-0" 16'-0" 16'-0"
check stresses – by inspection OK

From Calculations - Dead Load including joist weight and partitions = 12 psf
Live Load = 40 psf
38 40
Example Sawn Timber Joist Example Sawn Timber Beam
Check Deflections-only short term (2 x 10)
Check Deflections-only short term
I = 1.5(9.25)3/12= 98.9 in4 WL=1.33(40) = 53.3 lb/ft
I = 1.5(9.25)3/12= 98.9 in4
∆max =
5(40)(53.3)(12)4(12)3/[384(510,000)98.9]=0.49” ∆max = 5(53.3)(12)4(12)3/[384(1400000)98.9]=0.17”
= L/292 WHAT’S WRONG WITH THIS? = L/801 Less than L/360 or L/480 OK
Use 2x10 x 16” OC – SPF No 2 or better Use 2x10 x 16” OC – SPF No 2 or better
41 43
E from Table 4A for light

members Heavy Timber Beam Design
•
•
42 44
Design Properties of Glulam
• Bending members are specified w.r.t.
maximum allowable bending stress.
• For example, a 24F has allowable
bending stress of 2400 psi. & 26F an
allowable bending stress of 2600 psi.
• Various layups are used -an
unbalanced 24F layup using visually
graded Douglas-fir lumber, - is a 24F-
V4. The "V" indicates visually graded
lumber. A 24F-E4 indicates
mechanical graded lumber.
45 47
Glulam Sizes for Western Species and

Southern Pine shown in Supplement
Glued Laminated Timbers
• Glued-Laminated Timbers are
made up of wood laminations,
or "lams" that are face
bonded (glued) together with
waterproof adhesives.
• The grain of all laminations
run parallel with the length of
the member. Lams are
typically less than 2" inches
thick.
• Glulam range in net widths
from 2 1/2 to 10 3/4 inches,
although nearly any member
width can be produced.
46 48
49 51
Cv = Volume factor
50 52
•
•
53 55
HEAVY WOOD SYSTEM ALTERNATIVE 1

Glulam Girders 40 ft
Medium to heavy loads
Plan span 24 " Deep pg 61
COLUMNS
10 x 10 posts
40'-0" 40'-0"
Glulam Beams @ 10' Centers

Light to Medium loads,
20' span ,13.5 " deep Pg61 Planks 10 ft span 3 or 4" thick
pg 51 light to medium loads
DESIGN LOAD =40 Live load psf and 20 psf Dead (not including beam wts.)
54 56
Example Exterior Glulam Girder Example Glulam Beam
Use Trib. width and Uniform Load Analysis FbE=1.2E’min/RB2

Guess 16F-1.3 E (16F-V6) - From Table 5A Emin = 780,000
Live Load = 40x 10= 400 lb/ft
Fbx = 1600 so F*b = 1600 psi
Dead Load = 20 x 10 = 200 lb/ft FbE = 1.2(780000)/(14.55)2 = 4421 psi
Max moment = 600(40)2/8= 120,000 lb.ft CL = (1+FbE/F*b)/1.9-[[(1+FbE/F*b)/1.9]2-(FbE/F*b)/0.95]1/2
Now either guess at size of Girder or wood = 0.97
Check Cv = (21/L)1/x(12/d)1/x(5.125/b)1/x <1.0
species and grade
X = 10 for all but southern pine
Try a 6.75 x 39, Glulam S=1711 in3, L in ft and d an b in inches
A = 263.3 in2 weight ~ 65 lb/ft Cv= (21/40)1/10(12/39)1/10(5.125/6.75)1/10 =.811 < CL Gov.
57 59
Example Glulam Girder
Fb’ASD req=M/S=(133000/1711 in3)12= 932 psi

F’bASD = CDCM Ct CL (or CV) Cfu Cc FbASD
Dry service, normal temps, no curvature not on flat
Cfu=Ct=CM=Cc=1.0
UnBraced length Table 3.3.3
Simple span beam - Le =1.54 x (Lu= 10‘) = 15.4 –
concentrated loads and bracing at ¼ points or = 2.06
Lu =20.6 for uniform loads braces at supports
Use Le=20.6 – Check Slenderness Ratio=RB = [Led/b2]
RB= [20.6(12) 39/6.752]1/2 = 14.55 < 50 (limit)
58 60
What would change in the girder
Example Glulam Girder design if the deck was assumed to
fully brace the Girder?
F’bASD = 0.811 x 1600 = 1297 > 932 psi Possible Answers-
A. The CL factor would change and the girder
OK in bending capacity would increase.
Check Shear B. The CL factor would change and the girder
fvmax = 1.5(V/A) =(1.5)(665(40)/2)/263.3 = 75.8 psi capacity would decrease.
F’vASD= Only CD, Cm and Ct = 1.0 all
C. The Cv factor would change and the girder
16F-1.3 E (16FV6) F’vASD = 265(1x1x1) = 265 psi > 75.8 capacity would decrease.
OK in Shear D. The CL factor would change and the girder
Note this would work for CD= 0.9 as well capacity would not change.
61 63

Example Glulam Girder
a) Given a loading and span select grade of
lumber of a given size (or given grade select
Check Deflections-only short term size) to resist load. Beam Ex 1or2 just use
I = 33370 in4 (Table1C) size given.
b) Given a beam what is the maximum load that
∆max =
can be applied - smaller of that given by
5(400)(40)4(12)3/[384(1,500,000)33370]=0.46”
moment, shear or deflection check. Beam Ex
= L/1043 OK for L/360 1 or 2 -just use size given and check
flexure, etc.
c) Given a beam find max. moment capacity or
Use 6.75 x 39” 16F-1.3 E (16FV6) Glulam
shear capacity, etc. Beam Ex 1 or 2 just use
size given and check flexure, etc.
62 64
•
•
•
65 67
2
1 + FcE / F *c 1 + FcE / F *c FcE / F *c
• Cp =
2c
−
2c
−
c
• F *c = Adjusted allowable except C p
0.822 E 'min
• FcE =
le / d
2
c = .8 sawn timber, .9 for glulams
• largest le /d governs = and must not exceed 50 , l e = K e l
66 68
Example Sawn Timber Column
0.822 K X E 'min
FcE = 2
c = .8 sawn timber, .9 for glulams
le / d
largest l/d governs = and must not exceed 50 or 40 see Section 15.2,
k x = 2.5 for condition a and 3.0 for condition b Assume Column as Shown – Pin–Pin supports
le = K l
P = 5760 lb dead + 24000 lb live= 29760 lb
Note that split ring systems must provide capacity as defined in 15.2
Dry service, normal temps, no incising

Cm=Ct=CD=1.0 – Guess Cp = .8
9 ft
Guess larger than 2-4” use Table 4D post and
timber SPF#1
FcASD = 700 psi = F*c since factors except Cp are=1.0
(including CF)
Then Area required = 29760/700x.8 = 53.1 in2
try an 8 x 8 in – Area = 7.52= 56.25 in2
69 71
Built-up
Columns Example Sawn Timber Column
2
1 + FcE / F *c 1 + FcE / F *c FcE / F *c
Cp = K f − −
2c 2c c FcE = 0.822(Emin)/(Le/d)2=.822(470000)/(9x12/7.5)2= 1863
psi
Cp = (1+(FcE/F*c))/2c-[[(1+(FcE/F*c))/2c)]2-(FCE/F*c)/c]1/2
= 0.906 (note c = 0.8- sawn timber and CF = 1.)
F’c= 700 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 0.906 = 634 psi
fc = 29760/56.25 = 529 psi < 634 - OK
Use a 8x8 SPF #1 Post
70 72
Example Built-up Sawn Timber Possible Breadth Exam Problems
Column
a) Given a loading and height select grade of
Similar to previous Example – Pinned –Pinned lumber of a given size (or given grade select
supports - Find capacity of the column size) to resist load. Column Ex 1 or 2 just
Assume (5) 2 x 6, SPF#2 Built-up Column use size given.
Dry service, normal temps, no incising b) Given a column what is the maximum load
Cm=Ct=CD=1.0 – that can be applied. Column Ex 1 or 2 just
9 ft use Table 4 A and CF = 1.1 ,SPF#1&2 Fc=1150 psi use size given and back calculate load from
Assume nailed to meet 15.3.3 Kf2= 0.6 for stress.
buckling about nailed axis and Kf1=1.0 for
buckling about solid axis
c) Truss compression members – design as a
Area= 5 x 1.5 x 5.5 = 7.5 x 5.5 =41.25 in2 column after load is determined – usually pin-
pin supports.
73 75
Example Built-up Timber Column

FcE1 = 0.822(Emin)/(Le1/d1)2=.822(510000)/(9x12/5.5)2= 1087 psi
FcE2 = 0.822(Emin)/(Le2/d2)2=.822(510000)/(9x12/7.5)2= 2022 psi

F*c=1.1 x 1150 = 1265 psi
CP1 = Kf1((1+(FcE1/F*c))/2c-[[(1+(FcE1/F*c))/2c)]2-(FCE1/F*c)/c]1/2)
= 0.636
CP = Kf2((1+(FcE2/F*c))/2c-[[(1+(FcE2/F*c))/2c)]2-(FCE2/F*c)/c]1/2)
= 0.495 -governs
(note c = 0.8- sawn timber)
F’c= 1265 x0.495 = 626 psi
Capacity = 41.25 x 626 = 25,830 lb

For truss tension
members - no bending
just limit ft =T/An ≤F’t
74 76
Length Shear Wall
•
Wall
Shear Wall
•
Shear
Moment T
C
CH 15.4 NDS –Columns with eccentric axial loads and side loads
77 79
slightly different formula
Length Shear Wall

•
• For Segmented Shear Walls 3
Wall
Methods of design are used–
Shear Wall
• The simplest is to design full
Shear height segments to have a sum
C
Moment T • of resistances that is greater
that the total diaphragm
reaction. OK as long as same
materials
• Must have cord elements at
edge of each segment.
78 80
81 83
Example Shear Wall
Reaction from Diaphragm A Stud Shear Wall –

Assume 2x4 SPF #2
Studs, 16” OC, with
7/16” Structural I
sheathing and 8d nails
9 ft at 6” O.C. at panel on
edges and 12” OC inter.
Fastn.
What is the shear
8 ft diaphragm reaction
allowed and the cord
82
forces on the wall? 84
Example Shear Wall Example Shear Wall
The aspect ratio= h/l = 9/8 =1.125 < 2 allowed Allowable Shear per unit length = 280 lb/ft
for structural sheathing and seismic See Adjust for Specific Gravity Adjustment Factor =
TABLE 2305.3.4 in IBC - OK [1-(0.5 - SG)]
Check Max Shear allowed in Table (TABLE Table 11.3.2A – NDS – SG SPF = 0.42
2306.4.1) Allowable diaphragm reaction = 280 x 8 x [1-(0.5 -
.42)] = 2061 lb
For this reaction the Cord forces are:
Assume (2) 2x4 on each edge d = 96-3 = 93”=7.75’
Cord forces = 2061 x 9/7.75 = ±2400 lb
85 87
Thank you for your attention!
Note d
allows
Any questions? –
values for [email protected]
15/32 to be
used if stud
spacing does
not exceed
See www.awc.org
16” OC For free Education modules and info
86 88
P.E. Civil Exam Review:
Strength of Materials
J.P. Mohsen
Email:[email protected]
Strength of Materials
Stress vs. Strain

Stress = Force / Area
P
=
A
Strain = Change in Length / Original Length
DL
=
L
2
Elastic limit
Proportional limit
ε ε
Strain Strain
Stress – Strain Diagram Typical for Ductile Materials Stress – Strain Diagram
3 5
Yield point
Elastic limit
Proportional limit Proportional limit
ε ε
Strain Strain
Stress – Strain Diagram Stress – Strain Diagram
4 6
Ultimate strength
Rupture
Yield point
Elastic limit
Proportional limit
ε ε
Strain Strain
Stress – Strain Diagram Stress Strain Diagram
7 9
Ultimate strength
True rupture
Ultimate strength
Rupture
Yield point Yield point
Elastic limit Elastic limit

Proportional limit Proportional limit
ε ε
Strain Strain
Stress – Strain Diagram Stress- Strain Relationship
8 10
Elastic limit
0.2% offset yield 0.5% extension

strength yield strength
Proportional limit
Dy D
Slope of the linear portion = = =E
Dx D Strain, % Strain, %
ε
=E Hooke’s Law
0.2% 0.5%
(a) (b)
Strain
Stress – Strain Relationship Typical for Ductile Materials Methods for estimating yield stress: (a) offset method and (b) extension method
11 13
Problem 1)
High strength For the beam shown, compute the maximum bending stress in compression
Fracture and maximum bending stress in tension. Also compute the shear stress at the
neutral axis as well as at a section 6 in. from the bottom of the cross-section.
High Calculate the shear stresses at a point along the beam where the maximum
Modulus of toughness
resilience Toughness shear force occurs.
1500 lb 4500 lb 1500 lb

Strain Strain Strain
1 in
(a) (b) (c)
8 in NA
3.5 in
1 in
4 ft 6 ft 6 ft 4 ft
4 in
INA = 97.0 in 4
Areas under stress-strain curves: (a) modulus of resilience, (b) toughness, and (c) high-
strength and high-toughness materials.
12 14
Problem 1 (continued)
Bending Stress in beams : MC
For the beam shown, compute the shear stress at the NA and at 6 in. from the =
bottom of the cross section at the point where the maximum shear force I
occurs. M Cc M Ct
c = t =
I I
In the negative moment region In the positive moment region
1500 lb 4500 lb 1500 lb
1 in
Cc = 3.5 in Cc = 5.5 in
8 in NA
4 ft 6 ft 6 ft 4 ft
3.5 in Ct = 5.5 in Ct = 3.5 in
3750 lb 3750 lb 1 in
4 in
2250 1500 1500 lb
(6000)(12)(5.5) (7500)(12)(3.5)
INA = 97.0 in 4 t = = 4082 psi t = = 3247 psi
97 97
V (Ib) (7500)(12)(5.5)
=
(6000)(12)(3.5)
= 2598 psi c = = 5103 psi
c
97 97
-1500 lb 15 17
- 2250 - 2250
Problem 1 (continued) - For the beam shown, compute the max. bending
stress in tension and in compression.
------ ---i--- I
Section Modulus S=
C
M
=
MC S
1500 lb 4500 lb 1500 lb
=
1 in I
8 in NA
4 ft 6 ft 3.5 in
6 ft 4 ft
1 in I 97
+7500 4 in
S= = = 17.6 in 3
C 5.5
M (ft-lb)
INA = 97.0 in 4
-6000 -6000
16 18
For the beam shown, compute the shear stress at the NA and at 6 in. from the
What is the value of Q if shear stress is being calculated at:
bottom of the cross section at the point where the maximum shear force
occurs.
Neutral axis a section 6 in. above the base

1500 lb 4500 lb 1500 lb
1 in 3 in 1 in
5.5 in 4.0 in
8 in NA 2.75 in 2.5 in 8 in NA
NA
4 ft 6 ft 6 ft 4 ft NA
3.5 in 3.5 in
3750 lb 3750 lb 1 in 1 in
4 in 4 in
2250 1500 1500 lb
Q = (3) (1) [ 4] = 12 in 3
INA = 97.0 in 4
Q = (5.5) (1) [ 2.75] = 15.12 in 3
INA = 97.0 in 4
V (Ib)
-1500 lb 19 21
- 2250 - 2250
Problem 2.
VQ
Shear stress in bending = The vertical shear force acting on the I-section shown is 100 kN. Compute
the maximum shear stress in bending acting on the this beam section.
Ib
20 mm
Q6 in from bottom of cross -sec tion = (3) (1) [ 4] = 12 in 3
(2250) (12)
6 in from bottom of cross - sec tion = = 278.3 psi
(97)( 1)
20 mm 160 mm
Q at netural axis = (5.5) (1) [ 2.75] = 15.12 in 3
(2250) (15.12)
at netural axis = = 350.7 psi 20 mm
(97)( 1) 120 mm
20 22
Problem 3.
bh 3
I= + Ad 2 Parallel Axis Theorem The simply supported beam has the T-shaped cross section shown.
12
Determine the values and locations of the maximum tensile and compressive
(120)(20)3 bending stresses.
I1 about NA = + (120)(20)[90]2 = 19,520,000 mm 4
12
y
3 20 mm
(20)(160) 3
1000 lb 6 in
I 2 about NA = = 6,826,667 mm 4 400 lb/ft 0.8 in
12
B
x
20 mm A 8 in
D
160 mm
NA
RA = 1600 lb RB = 3400 lb
(120)(20) 3 2 0.8 in
I 3 about NA = + (120)(20)[90]2 = 19,520,000 mm 4
12 10 ft 4 ft
1 20 mm 20 mm
I total about NA = 45,866,666 mm 4 120 mm
23 25
Problem 2 (continued) Shear Diagram

y
Maximum shearing stress occurs at 1000 lb
the neutral axis. 400 lb/ft
B
Q at NA = (20)(80)[40] + (120)(20)[90] = 280,000 mm 3 A 10 ft 4 ft D
x
V = 100 KN RA = 1600 lb RB = 3400 lb
VQ
b = 20 mm at NA =
Ib 1600
I total about NA = 45,866,666 mm 4 1000
V (lb)
4 ft
(100) (280000)
= = 0.03 KN / mm 2 -2400
(45866666) (20)
24 26
Moment Diagram 1000 lb Compute Moment of Inertia, I.
400 lb/ft
B 6 in
x
A 10 ft 4 ft D 0.8 in
A2
RA = 1600 lb RB = 3400 lb N.A.
1600 8 in C
1000 y2
V (lb) y-bar
4 ft y1
A1
-2400 0.8 in
3200
3 3
0.8 8 6 0.8
I= + 6.4 4 - 5.886 + + 4.8 8.4 - 5.886
2 2
2°
M (lb-ft)
12 12
4 ft
27
I = 87.49 in 4 29
-4000
3200
Find y-bar. Stresses at x = 4 ft

4 ft
A1 y1 + A2 y2 ctop = 2.914 in. -4000

6 in
y - bar =
0.8 in A1 + A2 N.A.
C ---i---
8.8 in
A2
N.A. 6.4 4 + 4.8 8.4 y-bar cbot = 5.886 in.
= y1
6.4 + 4.8
8 in C
y2
y1
y-bar = 5.886 in
A1 Mctop 3200 12 2.914
top = = = 1279 psi Compression on top
I 87.49
0.8 in
Mcbot 3200 12 5.886

bot = = = 2580 psi Tension in bottom
28
I 87.49 30
3200
Stresses at x = 10 ft
10 ft Original State of Stress
ctop = 2.914 in. -4000
N.A. ------
C
8.8 in a y
y-bar cbot = 5.886 in.

y1 xy
x x x
Mctop 4000 12 2.914

top = = = 1599 psi Tension on top
I 87.49 xy
a
y
Mcbot 4000 12 5.886
bot = = = 3230 psi Compression in bottom
I 87.49 31 33
Problem 3 results. y
Construction of Mohr’s circle from given

stress components. xy
Identify maximum tensile and compressive stresses in the beam.
y
T max = 2580 psi (bottom of the section at x = 4 ft) x x
y
C max = 3230 psi (bottom of the section at x = 10 ft)
y
R
xy
xy
32 x 34
Convention for plotting shear stress on Mohr’s circle. Problem 4 )
For the state of stress shown, determine (a) the principal stresses; and (b) the
maximum in-plane shear stress. Show the results on properly oriented
elements.
8 ksi
6 ksi
y
4 ksi
x
Shear plotted up Shear plotted down
35 37
xy
1 8 ksi
x x
6 ksi
a
y
y y
y
y (y-axis) 4 ksi
y’ y’ x
xy
2 1 x’ y
(-8, 6)
2
xy
x
xy
x’ y (x-axis)
x 2 1
b
1 (4,-6)
x x
x
1 2
36 38
Problem 4 (continued) 8 ksi 8 ksi
6 ksi 6 ksi
y y
(y-axis) 4 ksi (y-axis) 4 ksi
x x
y y
(-8, 6) (-8, 6)
R R
2 1
(x-axis) (x-axis)
-2
(4,-6) (4,-6)
x x
39 41
Problem 4 (continued) 8 ksi 8 ksi
6 ksi 6 ksi
y y
(y-axis) 4 ksi (y-axis) 4 ksi
x x
max
y y
(-8, 6) (-8, 6)
R R
2 2 1
1
(x-axis) (x-axis)
-2 -2
(4,-6) (4,-6)
x x
40 42
max
10.49
22.5°
y The internal force system acting on the cross section at the base of the rod is
shown in Fig. (b). It consists of the torque T = 540 lb-in, the bending moment
6.49
6
R M = 15P = 15(30) = 450 lb-in (acting about the x-axis), and the transverse
2 4 1 shear force V = P = 30 lb.
2 1
-8 -2 2 The cross-sectional properties of the bar are:
8.49
6 4
2
r4 3/8
22.5°
I= = = 15.532 10 -3 in 4
x 4 4
r4
= R = 72 = 8.49 ksi Polar moment of Inertia J=
(a) R = 6 2 + 6 2 = 72 ksi (b) max 2
2Q1 = tan -1 6 / 6 = 45 Q1 = 22.5
= -2 + 72 = 6.49 ksi J = 2 I = 2 15.532 10 -3 = 31.06 10 -3 in 4

1
43 45
2 = -2 - 72 = -10.49 ksi
Problem 5) Problem 5 (continued) PART 1

The radius of the 15-in. long bar in Fig. (a) is 3/8 in. Determine the maximum State of stress at point A with the corresponding Mohr’s circle.
normal stress in the bar at (1) point A; and (2) point B.
30 lb (ksi)
10.865
y
540 lb-in y
y
= 10.865 ksi = 6.520 ksi
M
6.520
V
T
x
(ksi)
y
z A B x
A B
z x
z x
5.433
(a) (b) 44 46
The bending stress is calculated: Problem 5 (continued)
The maximum normal stress at point A is:
Mr 450 3 / 8
= = = 10 865 psi = 10.865 ksi = 5.433 + 8.487 = 13.92 ksi
I 15.532 10 -3 max
(ksi) (ksi)
10.865 10.865
y y
y y
6.520 6.520
= 10.865 ksi = 6.520 ksi = 10.865 ksi = 6.520 ksi (ksi)
x x
x x
z z
47 49
5.433 5.433
Problem 5 (continued) Problem 5 (continued) PART 2

And the shear stress is calculated: State of stress at point B with the corresponding Mohr’s circle.
Tr 540 3 / 8
= = = 6 520 psi = 6.520 ksi (ksi)
J 31.06 10 -3
T
The shear stress due to the transverse shear force V is zero at A. y

y
= 6.611 ksi
(ksi)
6.611
10.865
y
B
y x
(ksi)
6.520 max
= 10.865 ksi = 6.520 ksi (ksi)
x z
z
x
z
48 50
5.433
Problem 5 (continued) Problem 5 (continued)
The shear stress due to torque is T = 6.520 ksi, as before. But because the Since T and V act on the same planes they can be added. So the total shear
point lies on the neutral axis, the bending stress is zero. There is, however, stress is:
an additional shear stress caused by the transverse shear force V. The
magnitude of this shear stress is V = VQ/(Ib), where b = 2r = ¾ in. and Q is
the first moment of half the cross-sectional area about the neutral axis. = T + V = 6.520 + 0.091 = 6.611 ksi
Referring to the figure below, Q is calculated:
z
r2 4r
Q = A' Z ' = (ksi)
2 3 V
y
C y
3 4r 6.611
2r 3 2 3/ 8 Z'= = 6.611 ksi
= = x
3
3 3
B
(ksi)
max
x
= 35.16 10 -3 in 3
z
z
51 53
Problem 5 (continued) Problem 5 (continued)

Therefore: The Mohr’s circle for this state of pure shear yields for the maximum normal
stress at B:
VQ 30 35.16 10 -3
= = = 90.5 psi = 0.091 ksi
15.532 10 -3 3 / 4
V
Ib = 6.61 ksi
max
(ksi) (ksi)
y y
y y
= 6.611 ksi 6.611 = 6.611 ksi 6.611
B
(ksi) B
(ksi)
max max
x x
z z
z z
52 54
Poisson’s ratio Problem 6)
For the state of stress shown, determine the maximum in-plane shear stress
and the absolute maximum shear stress.
If a structural member is subjected to axial tension, the

material elongates and there is a reduction in its cross- 20 ksi
section. When the member is under compression, the

opposite happens. The ratio of the lateral strain to axial
y
strain is Poisson’s ratio. 50 ksi
x
-
= lateral
axial
Most solids have a Poisson’s ratio between 0.10 and 0.45 55 57
- - -
General State of Stress abs = max 1 2
, 2 3
, 3 1
2 2 2
The given stresses are:
20 ksi
= = 50 y
1 x 50 ksi
y 1 x
2 = y = 20
2 2
1
x
3
z
3
56 58
The maximum in-plane shear stress max is equal to the radius of the circle
that represents transformation in the xy-plane.
(ksi)
1 = 50 max = 15 ksi
2 = 20
(ksi)
10 15
Transformation
Transformation
in yz-plane
in xy-plane
25
Transformation
in zx-plane 59 61
The absolute maximum shear stress equals the radius of the largest circle,
which represents the transformation in the zx-plane.
(ksi)
1 = 50 abs = 25 ksi
2 = 20
(ksi)
10 15
Transformation
Transformation
in yz-plane
in xy-plane
25
Transformation
in zx-plane 60 62
Beam Sign Convention (BSC)
Structural Analysis
Terry Weigel
Phone # : 502.445.8266
Contents of Presentation
• Deflections
• Influence lines
• Moving loads
• Moment distribution Deflections
• Shear and moment diagrams
2 4
Deflections Conjugate Beam
• Double Integration • The conjugate beam has same length as the
• Moment Area real beam
• Conjugate Beam • Potentially different supports
• Virtual Work • Loaded with the M/EI diagram of the real
• Castigliano’s Theorem beam
• Tables
5 7
Conjugate Beam Conjugate Beam

• Theorem 1 – The slope at a point in the real • Load on the conjugate beam is upward if the
beam is numerically equal to the shear at the M/EI value is positive
corresponding point in the conjugate beam • Positive shear (BCS) in the conjugate beam
• Theorem 2 – The displacement at a point in corresponds to counterclockwise rotation in
the real beam is numerically equal to the the real beam
moment at the corresponding point in the • Positive moment (BSC) in the conjugate beam
conjugate beam corresponds to upward displacement in the
real beam
6 8
Conjugate Conjugate
Beam Beam
Supports Example
9 11
Conjugate Beam Example Conjugate Beam Example

Compute the slope and deflection of the PL2 PL2 PL2 5 PL2
= Vconjugate = + + =
cantilever beam real
8 EI 8EI 16 EI 16 EI
CCW
at its free end ∆ real = M conjugate =

PL2 L
+
PL2 3L
+
8EI 3 8EI 4
PL2 5L 3PL3
+ =
16 EI 6 16 EI
10 12
Beam Used To Illustrate Influence Lines
Influence Lines A B C
20 ft 12 ft
13 15
Influence Lines Influence Line for Reaction at A

Muller-Breslau Principle
If some force component in a structure is
considered to act through a small distance (or
angle), the shape of the displaced structure
will be, to some scale, the influence line for
that force component
14 16
Influence Line for Moment Influence Line for Moment at D
17 19
Influence Line for Moment Influence Line for Moment at B
18 20
Influence Line Shear Discontinuity Influence Lines Problem
The beam shown is subjected to a single concentrated load of 10 k
and a uniform load of 1.5 k/ft of arbitrary length. The concentrated load may
positioned at any point and the uniform load may occupy any length on the
beam. Determine the maximum upward reaction at B.
1
A= 1.6 32 ft = 25.6
2
10 k 1.6 + 1.5 k/ft 25.6
= 54.4 k
21 23
Influence Lines Problem Influence Lines Problem

The beam shown is subjected to a single concentrated load of 10 k The beam shown is subjected to a single concentrated load of 10 k
and a uniform load of 1.5 k/ft of arbitrary length. The concentrated load may and a uniform load of 1.5 k/ft of arbitrary length. The concentrated load may
positioned at any point and the uniform load may occupy any length on the positioned at any point and the uniform load may occupy any length on the
beam. Determine the maximum upward reaction at B. beam. Determine the maximum negative moment at B.
A B C A B C
20 ft 12 ft 20 ft 12 ft
22 24
beam. Determine the maximum positive moment at a point half way between
beam. Determine the maximum negative moment at B.
A and B.
1
A= 5 20 ft = 50
2
1
A= 12 12 ft = 72 10 k 5 + 1.5 k/ft 50
2
= 125 k-ft
− 10 k 12 − 1.5 k/ft 72
= −228 k-ft
25 27

The beam shown is subjected to a single concentrated load of 10 k The beam shown is subjected to a single concentrated load of 10 k
and a uniform load of 1.5 k/ft of arbitrary length. The concentrated load may and a uniform load of 1.5 k/ft of arbitrary length. The concentrated load may
positioned at any point and the uniform load may occupy any length on the positioned at any point and the uniform load may occupy any length on the
beam. Determine the maximum positive moment at a point half way between beam. Determine the maximum positive shear at a point half way between
A and B. A and B.
A B C
A B C
20 ft 12 ft
20 ft 12 ft
26 28
Influence Lines Problem More Influence Lines
The beam shown is subjected to a single concentrated load of 10 k Influence line for shear at B.
beam. Determine the maximum positive shear at a point half way between
A and B.
1 1
A= 10 ft = 2.5
2 2
1
10 k + 1.5 k/ft 2.5 Influence line for moment at B.
2
= 8.75 k
29 31
More Influence Lines

Draw the influence lines for the shear at B and the moment at B. Note
that the beam is statically determinate.
Qualitative Influence Lines
30 32
Muller-Breslau Principle for
Indeterminate Structures
Draw the influence lines for the shear at B and the moment at B. Note
that the beam is statically indeterminate.
33 35
Muller-Breslau Principle for

Indeterminate Structures Influence line for shear at B.
Influence line for moment at B.
34 36
Loading for Maximum
Negative Moment
Loading for Maximum Effect
37 39
Loading for Maximum Positive Loading for Maximum

Moment Reaction
38 40
Influence Lines Example Influence Lines for Frames
41 43
Influence Lines for Rigid

Influence Lines Example
Frame
42 44
ACI Approximate Analysis ACI Approximate Analysis
For gravity load
only
45 47
46 48
49 51
ACI Approximate Analysis
Moving Loads
50 52
AASHTO Vehicle Loads Maximum Reaction
14 ft 14 ft Influence line for reaction

at left support.
8k
32 k
32 k
53 55
Maximum Reaction (Shear) Maximum Reaction

Absolute maximum shear due to moving concentrated loads occurs
at a support, when one of the loads is at the support. The location that
produces the maximum shear must be determine by trial. 14 ft
Compute the maximum shear at the support of a 100-ft-long simply supported

beam under the action of the AASHTO truck load. 32 k
8k
54 56
Maximum Reaction Absolute Maximum Moment
Position 1
Center of gravity of the load system
86 72
RL = 32 k 1 + 32 k + 8k = 65.3 k 32 k 14 ft + 8 k 28 ft
100 100 CG = = 9.33 ft
32 k + 32 k + 8 k
Position 2
14.0 ft − 9.33 ft = 4.67 ft
86
RL = 32 k 1 + 8 k = 38.9 k First case
100
Position loads so that the centerline of the span bisects
the 4.67 ft dimension. Compute the moment under
each 32 k load.
Design lane load
57 59
Absolute Maximum Moment Absolute Maximum Moment

In a simply supported beam, the absolute maximum moment occurs when
the centerline of the span bisects the distance between the center of
gravity of the load system and one of the two adjacent load. The maximum
moment usually occurs under the closer load.
Compute the absolute maximum moment for a 100-ft-long simply supported

beam under the action of the AASHTO truck load.
58 60
Second case
Left reaction Position loads to bisect the 9.33 ft dimension
8 k 33.67 ft + 32 k 47.67 ft + 32 k 61.67 ft Left reaction
RL =
100 ft 8 k 26.66 ft + 32 k 40.66 ft + 32 k 54.66 ft
= 37.68 k RL =
100 ft
Moment at center 32 k load = 32.64 k
M = 37.68 k 52.34 ft − 32 k 14 ft = 1,524 k ft Compute the moment under the left 32 k load
M = 32.64 k 45.33 ft = 1, 480 k ft
Compute the moment under the center 32 k load
M = 32.64 k 59.33 ft − 32 k 14 ft = 1, 490 k ft
61 63

Note: if the center 32 k load is placed at the centerline of the
beam, the moment at that point is 1,520 k ft. There is very little
difference and it is not worth the effort to calculate the absolute
maximum moment.
Moment at left 32 k load
M = 37.68 k 38.34 ft = 1, 445 k ft
62 64
Moment Distribution Sign Convention
• Clockwise moment acting on a member is
positive. Counterclockwise moment acting on
a member is negative. Don’t confuse this sign
Moment Distribution convention with the beam sign convention.
65 67
Moment Distribution Member Rotational Stiffness

• Sign convention The moment required to rotate the near end of
• Member rotational stiffness the member one radian, when the far end of the
• Member modified rotational stiffness member is fixed
• Joint stiffness factor 4EI
E is the modulus of elasticity K=
• Distribution Factor I is the moment of inertia
L
• Carry-over factor L is the length
• Fixed-end moment
66 68
Member Modified Rotational Stiffness Joint Stiffness Factor
The moment required to rotate the near end of The moment required to rotate a joint through
the member one radian, when the far end of the one radian. It is equal to the sum of the
member is pinned rotational stiffnesses of members framing into
the joint
3EI
K=
L
K A = ΣK = 4000 + 5000 + 1000
= 10,000
69 71
Use of Modified Stiffness Distribution Factor

The distribution for a factor for a member is the
ratio of its rotational stiffness factor and the
joint stiffness factor for the joint into which it
frames
K KAD = 1000 KAB= 4000
DF = A
KA D B
4000
DFAB = = 0.4
10,000
5000
DFAC = = 0.5
10,000
1000
DFAD = = 0.1
10,000 C
70
Important: the sum of the DFs at a joint equals 1. 72
Fixed-End
Carry-over Factor
Moments
The carry-over factor represents that amount of
moment “carried-over” from one end of a
member to the other. For a prismatic member
(EI = constant), its value is 0.5.
100k-ft
50k-ft
73 75
Fixed-End Moments
Moment(s) developed at the ends of a member
assuming that those ends are fixed. Normally
determined from entries in tables
MD Beam Example
74 76
Beam Moment Distribution Example
For span
I AB = 1110 in 4 CD
I BC = 1240 in 4
I CD = 1240 in 4
P 2 a 2b
FEM AB = b a +
L2 2
For span
AB
77 79
Rotational Stiffness and Distribution Split the trapezoidal load into two triangular loads,
Factors one with intensity of 1 k/ft at A and the other with
intensity of 3 k/ft at B. Clockwise moment is positive (different
from BSC).
4
4 EI BA 4 E 1110 in
K BA = = = 33.64E k-in / rad
LBA 12 11 ft
4
4 EI BC 4 E 1240 in
K BC = K CB = = = 29.52 E k-in / rad 1 k/ft 11 ft
2
LBC 12 14 ft FEM AB = −
3E 1240 in 4 K BA 20
3EI CD DFBA = =
K CD = = = K BA + K BC 3 k/ft 11 ft
2
LCD 12 25 ft −
33.64E k in / rad
12.40E k-in / rad = 0.53256 30
33.64E k in / rad + 29.52 E k in / rad
K BC = −18.150 k ft
DFBC = =
K BA + K BC
29.52 E k in / rad
= 0.46744 FEM BC = FEM CB = 0
33.64E k in / rad + 29.52 E k in / rad
Note: E can be omitted from DFCB =
KCB
= 1 k/ft 11 ft
2
3 k/ft 11 ft
2
KCB + KCD FEM BA = + = 22.183 k ft
calculations when it has 29.52 E k in / rad 30 20
= 0.70423
the same value for all spans 29.52 E k in / rad + 12.40 E k in / rad
DFCD = 1 − DFCB = 1 − 0.7042 = 0.29577
78 80
2
Initial Distributions
10 k 2 7 ft 18 ft
− 2
18 ft 7 ft +
25 ft 2
= −43.34 k ft
15 k 2 17 ft
2
8 ft Joint B is out of balance by -22.183 k-ft. Apply moments at
− 8 ft 17 ft +
25 ft
2
2 that joint in proportion to the DFs for that joint
= −53.86 k ft 0.53256 −22.183 k ft = −11.814 k ft
0.46744 −22.183 k ft = −10.369 k ft
Joint C is out of balance by 97.2 k-ft. Apply moments at

that joint in proportion to the DFs for that joint
0.70423 97.2 k ft = 68.451 k ft

0.29577 97.2 k ft = 28.749 k ft
FEM CD = −43.34 k ft − 53.86 k ft = −97.20 k ft
81 83
Beam Moment Distribution Beam Reactions

Joint A Joint B Joint C Joint D
Member AB BA BC CB CD DC
DF 0 0.53256 0.46744 0.70423 0.29577 1
FEM -18.150 22.183 0 0 -97.200 0
Dist -11.814 -10.369 68.451 28.749

CO -5.9069 34.225 -5.185
Dist -18.227 -15.998 3.651 1.534
CO -9.1135 1.8256 -7.9992
Dist -0.9722 -0.85337 5.633 2.366
CO -0.4861 2.8166 -0.4267
Dist -1.500 -1.3166 0.30048 0.126
CO -0.7500 0.1502 -0.65831
Σ -33.657 -10.330 10.330 64.425 -64.425 0
82 84
Moment Distribution – Beam
Reactions
MB = 0
−33.657 k ft − 10.330 k ft 1 2
VA = − + 1 k/ft 11 ft +
11 ft 2 3
1 1
3 k/ft 11 ft = 13.165 k
2 3
MA = 0 Shear and Moment Diagrams
−33.657 k ft − 10.330 k ft 1 1
VB1 = + 1 k 11 ft +
11 ft 2 3
1 2
3 k 11 ft = 8.835 k
2 3
MC = 0
10.330 k ft + 64.425 k ft
VB 2 = − = 5.340 k
14 ft
VB = 8.835 k +5.340 k = 3.495 k 85 87
Moment Distribution – Beam

Shear and Moment Diagrams
7 + 10 + 8 = 25 ft
Reactions
MD = 0 Relation between shear and load –
−64.425 k ft 10 k 10 ft + 8 ft 15 k 8 ft
VC1 = −
25 ft
+
25 ft
+
25 ft
= 14.577 k The slope of the shear diagram at any point is
MB = 0 equal to the intensity of the loading diagram at
10.330 k ft + 64.425 k ft the same point (upward acting load is positive)
VC 2 = = 5.340 k
14 ft
The change in shear between two points on the
VC = 5.340 k + 14.577 k = 19.917 k
MC = 0 shear diagram is equal to the area under the
−64.425 k-ft 10 k 7 ft loading diagram between the same two points
VD = + +
25 ft 25 ft
15 k 7 ft + 10 ft
= 10.423 k
25 ft 86 88
Shear and Moment Diagrams Shear and Moment Diagram Example
1 x x2
V = 13.165 k − 1k ft x − 3k ft − 1k ft x = 13.165 k − x + k
Relation between moment and shear –
2 11 ft 11
The slope of the moment diagram at any point is

equal to the intensity of the shear diagram at V = 0 = 13.165 k − x +
x2
11
k
the same point x = 7.773 ft
The change in moment between two points on A= 13.165 k − x +

x2
k dx
11
the moment diagram is equal to the area under x 2 x3
= 13.165 − +
the shear diagram between the same two points 2 33
A07.773 = 57.888
A011 = 43.967
43.967 − 57.888 = −13.921
89 91
Shear and Moment Diagram Example

I AB = 1110 in 4
I BC = 1240 in 4
I CD = 1240 in 4
Shear Diagram Example
Continuous Beam
90 92
Beam Shear Diagram Beam Shear Diagram
−8.835 k + 3.495 k = −5.340 k

93 95
Zero load on beam

Beam Shear Diagram Beam Shear Diagram in these regions
x2
V = 13.165 k − x + k
11
−5.340 k + 19.917 k
2 = 14.577 k
13.17 − x + x = 0
11
x = 7.733 ft 13.165 k − 22 k = −8.835 k
94 96
Zero load on beam
Beam Shear Diagram in these regions
Moment Diagram Example
Continuous Beam
4.577 k − 15.0 k = −10.423 k 97 99
Beam Moment
Beam Shear Diagram
Diagram
Shear diagram closes
-10.423 k + 10.423 k = 0 98 100

Beam Moment Beam Moment
Diagram Diagram
-33.657 k ft + 57.888 k ft 10.310 k ft − 74.760 k ft

= 24.231 k ft = −64.450 k ft
101 103
Beam Moment Beam Moment

Diagram Diagram
24.231 k ft − 13.921 k ft −64.450 k ft + 102.04 k ft

= 10.310 k ft = 37.590 k ft
102 104
Beam Moment
Diagram
Moment and Shear By Section
37.590 k ft + 44.770 k ft
= 82.360 k ft
105 107
Beam Moment
Moment and Shear By Section
Diagram
Determine the moment and shear midway
between the 10 k and 15 k loads
82.360 k ft + 82.384 k ft
0
V = 10.4 k − 15 k = 4.6 k
positive shear by the BCS
M = 10.4 k 13 ft − 15 k 5 ft
Moment diagram = 60.2 k-ft CW

closes positive moment by the BCS
106 108
Structures
• Determinate
Thank You • Indeterminate

Questions?
109 2
STATICALLY DETERMINATE
P.E. Civil Exam Review:

Structural Analysis
J.P. Mohsen
Email: [email protected]
3
Determine the force in members BH, BC, and DG of the truss shown. Note that
the truss is composed of triangles 7.5 ft : 10.0 ft : 12.5 ft, so that they are 3:4:5
right angles.
STATICALLY INDETERMINATE
300 lb. 400 lb.
B C D
7.5 ft
10 ft H 10 ft G 10 ft F 10 ft E
RL RR
4 6
Stability and Determinacy of Trusses Member BH.
300 lb. 400 lb.
B C D
7.5 ft 300 lb. 400 lb.
A C
B D
E
10 ft H 10 ft G 10 ft F 10 ft
RR
RL
A
10 ft H 10 ft G 10 ft F 10 ft E
2j = m + r Truss is determinate RL RR
J = number of joints
m= number of members
2j m+r indeterminate r = number of reactions
2j m+r Unstable
5 7
Analysis of Member BH. Analysis of Member BC.
300 lb. 400 lb. 300 lb. 400 lb.
B C D B C D
A E A E
10 ft H 10 ft G 10 ft F 10 ft 10 ft H 10 ft G 10 ft F 10 ft
RL RR RL RR = 275 lb.
+ MG = 0 − 20 RR − 7.5 FBC = 0
− 275(20)
FBH Applying Equation of Equilibrium to Joint H FBC = = − 733 lbs ( compression)
400 lb. 7.5
+ Fy =0 Fbh = 0 B C D
FBC
12.5 ft
FBG 7.5 ft
E
FAH FHG FHG
G 10 ft F 10 ft
H
RR
8 10
Member BC. Member DG.
300 lb. 400 lb. 300 lb. 400 lb.
B C D B C D
A A
10 ft H 10 ft G 10 ft F 10 ft E 10 ft H 10 ft G 10 ft F 10 ft E
RL RR RL RR
9 11
Analysis of Member DG.
300 lb. 400 lb. Draw the shear and moment diagrams for the beam shown. Indicate the
maximum moment.
B C D
A E
10 ft H 10 ft G 10 ft F 10 ft
60 kN
RL RR 20 kN/m
120 kN-m
A C D
B E
2m 2m 2m 2m
C D
FCD
FDG 12.5 ft
7.5 ft
E
FGF
G F 10 ft
RR
12 14
Analysis of Member DG.
300 lb. 400 lb. Draw the Free Body Diagram (FBD).
(Note: The horizontal force at point B is equal to zero.)
B C D
A E
10 ft H 10 ft G 10 ft F 10 ft
60 kN
RL RR 20 kN/m
120 kN-m
+ FY = 0 RR − DGY = 0 DGY = 275 lbs A C D

DGY 3 FB FE
= DG = 458 lbs tension
DG 5
2m 2m 2m 2m
C D
FCD
FDG 12.5 ft
7.5 ft
E
FGF
G F 10 ft
RR
13 15
60 kN
20 kN/m
120 kN-m
Solve for the reactions at supports B and E. Show the change in Shear
at B.
60 kN A 2m 2m C 2m D 2m
20 kN/m
120 kN-m 100 kN 40 kN
60 100 kN
A C D
FB = 100 kN FE = 40 kN
0 0 V (kN)
2m 2m 2m 2m
-40
+ ∑MB = 0 0( 1 0 – 6FE 0 FE = 40 kN
+ ∑FY = 0 -60 – 80 + FE + FB 0 -100 + FB 0 FB = 100 kN
16 18
60 kN 60 kN
20 kN/m 20 kN/m
120 kN-m 120 kN-m
Draw the Shear Diagram Draw the Shear Diagram
for segment AB. for segment BC.
A 2m 2m C 2m D 2m A 2m 2m C 2m D 2m
100 kN 40 kN 100 kN 40 kN
2 m − 20 kN = −40 kN 60 2 m − 20 kN = −40 kN
m m
20
0 0 V (kN) 0 0 V (kN)
-40 -40
17 19
60 kN 60 kN
20 kN/m 20 kN/m
120 kN-m 120 kN-m
Show the change in Shear Show the change in Shear
at C. at E.
100 kN 40 kN 100 kN 40 kN
60 − 60 kN 60 40 kN
20 20
0 0 V (kN) 0 0 V (kN)
-40 -40 -40 -40 -40
20 22
60 kN 60 kN
20 kN/m 20 kN/m
120 kN-m 120 kN-m
Draw the Shear Diagram Completed Shear Diagram
for segment CE.
100 kN 40 kN 100 kN 40 kN
60 4 m 0 kN = 0 kN 60
m
20 20
0 0 V (kN) 0 0 V (kN)
-40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40
21 23
60 kN 60 kN
20 kN/m 20 kN/m
120 kN-m 120 kN-m
Draw the Moment Diagram Draw the Moment Diagram
for segment AB. for segment BC.
100 kN 40 kN 100 kN 40 kN
60 60
20 20
0 0 V (kN) 0 0 V (kN)
-40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40
1 1
2 m − 40 kN = −40 kN m 2 m 40 kN + 2 m 20 kN = 80 kN m
2 2
40
2°
0 0 M (kN-m) 0 0 M (kN-m)
2° 2° 2°
-40 -40
24 26
60 kN 60 kN
20 kN/m 20 kN/m
120 kN-m 120 kN-m
Draw the Moment Diagram Draw the Moment Diagram
for segment AB. for segment CD.
100 kN 40 kN 100 kN 40 kN
60 60
20 20
0 0 V (kN) 0 0 V (kN)
-40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40
1
2 m − 40 kN = −40 kN m 2 m − 40 kN = −80 kN m
2
40
2°
0 0 M (kN-m) 0 0 M (kN-m)
2° 2°
-40 -40 -40
25 27
60 kN 60 kN
20 kN/m 20 kN/m
120 kN-m 120 kN-m
Show the change in Completed Moment
bending moment at D. Diagram.
100 kN 40 kN 100 kN 40 kN
60 60
20 20
0 0 V (kN) 0 0 V (kN)
-40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40
120 kn m
80 80
40 40
2° 2°
0 0 M (kN-m) 0 0 M (kN-m)
2° 2° 2° 2°
-40 -40 -40 -40
28 30
60 kN 60 kN
20 kN/m 20 kN/m
120 kN-m 120 kN-m
Draw the Moment Diagram Find the maximum
for segment DE. moment.
100 kN 40 kN 100 kN 40 kN
60 60
20 20
0 0 V (kN) 0 0 V (kN)
-40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40
2 m − 40 kN = −80 kn m M max = 80 kn m
80 80
40 40
2° 2°
0 0 M (kN-m) 0 0 M (kN-m)
2° 2° 2° 2°
-40 -40 -40 -40
29 31
32 34
Find the force in the truss members shown.
33 35
What are the vertical and horizontal components of deflection at the 30K Load? All members have a cross
sectional area of 1 square inch and modulus of elasticity of 29000 ksi.
These are internal member forces due to

original loading
36 38
These are internal forces due to a vertical unit load at L2

SuL
=
AE
S = member force with proper sign
A= Cross-sectional area of each member
L= Length of each member
E= modulus of elasticity of materials
37 39
These are internal member forces due to a horizontal unit load at L2
Please find all member forces and specify whether in tension or compression
40 42
41 43
What are the support reactions for the beam shown?
KAB=4EI = I KBC=4EI = I
L 10 L 20
44 46
Moment Distribution
• 1) calculate the fixed end moments
• 2) Calculate distribution of moments at the clamped ends of the members

by the rotation of that joint
• 3) Calculate the magnitude of the moments carried over to the other ends
of the members
• 4) The addition or subtraction of these latter moments to the original fixed

ends moments
45 47
Fixed End Moments
P
L/2 L/2
FEM = PL FEM = PL
8 8
w
L 10 L 20
L
FEM= wL2
FEM= wL2
12 Distribution Factor = K_______________
12
Sum of K for all members at the joint
K1
a
P
b
DF1 =
K
L
K2
FEM= Pb2a
FEM= Pa2b
L2
DF2 =
L2 K
48 50
Lock the joint B
L 10 L 20
Distribution Factor = K_______________

Sum of K for all members at the joint
FEM -25 + 25 - 50 + 50
K1
DF1 =
Distribution Factor = KBA_ K
KBA + KBC
K2
DF2 =
K
49 51
Joint B Released
KAB=4EI = I KBC=4EI = I Stiffness K KAB=4EI = I KBC=4EI = I

L 10 L 20 L 10 L 20
D. F. 2/3 1/3
1__
10____ = 2/3 D.F. at B for BA
1__ + 1_ FEM -25 + 25 - 50 + 50
10 20
Balancing + 16.67 +8.33
Joint B
1__
20____ = 1/3 D.F. at B for BC
1__ + 1_
10 20
52 54
Stiffness K KAB=4EI = I KBC=4EI = I Stiffness K KAB=4EI = I KBC=4EI = I

L 10 L 20 L 10 L 20
D. F. 2/3 1/3 D. F. 2/3 1/3
-25 + 25 - 50 + 50 FEM -25 + 25 - 50 + 50

FEM
Balancing + 16.67 +8.33

Balancing
Joint B Joint B
C.O.M. + 8.33
53 55
L 10 L 20 L 10 L 20
D. F. 2/3 1/3 D. F. 2/3 1/3
FEM -25 + 25 - 50 + 50 FEM -25 + 25 - 50 + 50
Balancing Balancing + 16.67 +8.33

+16.67 +8.33
Joint B Joint B
C.O.M. C.O.M. + 8.33 +4.17

+ 8.33 +4.17
Final
56
Moments - 16.67 + 41.67 58

L 10 L 20 L 10 L 20
D. F. 2/3 1/3 D. F. 2/3 1/3
-25 + 25 - 50 + 50 FEM -25 + 25 - 50 + 50

FEM
+ 16.67 +8.33 Balancing + 16.67 +8.33

Balancing
Joint B Joint B
C.O.M. C.O.M. + 8.33 +4.17

+ 8.33 +4.17
Final
Final - 16.67 + 41.67 - 41.67
Moments
Moments - 16.67 57 59
1.5 K/FT
Stiffness K KAB=4EI = I KBC=4EI = I 20 k
L 10 L 20
-16.67 FT.K 41.67 -41.67

D. F. 2/3 1/3 54.2
20 k 1.5 K/FT
FEM -25 + 25 - 50 + 50
Balancing + 16.67 +8.33

Joint B
14.4 k 15.6 k
C.O.M. + 8.33 +4.17 12.5 k
7.5 k
Final
Moments - 16.67 + 41.67 - 41.67 + 54.17 60 62
References
• Hibbeler, C. R., Structural Analysis, 3rd Edition,

Prentice Hall, 1995.
Stiffness K KAB=4EI = I KBC=4EI = I
L 10 L 20
D. F. 2/3 1/3 • Chajes, Alexander, Structural Analysis, Prentice

Hall, 1982.
FEM -25 + 25 - 50 + 50
Balancing
+ 16.67 +8.33
Joint B
C.O.M.
+ 8.33 +4.17
---------- ------------ ---------- ----------
Final - 16.67 + 41.67 - 41.67 + 54.17
Moments 61 63
Thank You!
• Any Questions?
• Good Luck!
64

ASCE PM All in One PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ASCE PM All in One PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ASCE PM All in One PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the different load combinations considered in design?

What are the different load combinations considered in design?

What are the main live loads that need to be considered?

What are the main live loads that need to be considered?

Basic Information

P.E. Structural Exam Review:

Topics Basic Information

Load Factors and Combinations Factored Force Effect

AASHTO Loads Live Loads

• Design Tandem is 2 axles at 25k.

Live Loads Problem No 1

Influence Line for Reaction at Support A

Lane Loading for Max. Reaction at Support A

Dynamic Load Allowance

• Does not apply to:

Live Load Distribution Live Load Distribution

Live Load Distribution Live Load Distribution

Compute One Lane Distribution Factor

Live Load Distribution Live Load Distribution

• MPF is for calculating the

Multiple Presence Factor Multiple Presence Factor

Pedestrian Loads Centrifugal Force (CE)

– All lanes simultaneously loaded if likely to – Not needed if:

Braking Force (BR) Water Loads (WA)

Water Loads (WA) Wind Load (WL and WS)

• If temp below 32° for 14 or more days then

• Creep covered in prestressed concrete

Problem 3 Are we there yet?

Compute the ultimate moments using the Strength

• S = spacing of supporting components (ft

Deck Design Problem 4

Deck Design Deck Design

Future Wearing Surface = 30 psf

Parapet = 0.53 K / ft (Composite loads may be spread

Deck Design Deck Design

+ pDWmax (0.29 K ft / ft) Required Pos. Mom.

Deck Design Foundation

Foundation Pile Group Properties

Find reaction on exterior girder about

Reinforcing Steel Cover Lever Rule

ASCE 7-05 Chapter 3

ASCE 7-05 Table 4-1

Live Load Reduction

ASCE 7-05 Section 4.8 Corner columns with cantilever slabs

(IBC Sections 1607.9)

Floor Live Load Reduction

In structures where scaffolding is used 0.6 for F 12

Roof Live Load Reduction

Roof Beam Live Load Floor Beam Live Load

Roof Column Live Load

Reduced Live Load – Interior Reduced Live Load – Corner

Snow Load Methodology

Snow Load – Terminology and Figure 7-1

*Terrain categories defined in Chapter 6 45 47

ASCE 7-05 Table 7-3,

ASCE 7-05 Figure 7-2a ASCE 7-05 Figure 7-2b

Unobstructed slippery surfaces

All other surfaces

Balanced and Unbalanced Loading